Q Logic Switch 59022 11 A 4 13 User Guide
0
S i m p l i f y  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Firmware Version 5.0  
59022-11 A  
Page i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Section 1  
Introduction  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
1.4.1  
1.4.2  
1.4.3  
Intended Audience ............................................................................................. 1-1  
Related Materials ............................................................................................... 1-1  
JDOM License.................................................................................................... 1-2  
Technical Support............................................................................................... 1-3  
Availability.................................................................................................. 1-3  
Training...................................................................................................... 1-3  
Contact Information ................................................................................... 1-3  
Section 2  
Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
2.1  
2.2  
Workstation Requirements ................................................................................. 2-2  
Installing the Management Application............................................................... 2-2  
SANsurfer Switch Manager ....................................................................... 2-3  
SANsurfer Management Suite................................................................... 2-4  
SMS Installation for Windows........................................................... 2-4  
2.2.1  
2.2.2  
2.2.2.1  
2.2.2.2  
2.2.2.3  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
2.5.1  
2.5.2  
2.6  
SMS Installation for Linux................................................................. 2-6  
SMS Installation for Solaris............................................................... 2-7  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager................................................................... 2-9  
Exiting SANsurfer Management Suite.............................................................. 2-12  
Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager .......................................................... 2-13  
SMS Uninstall.......................................................................................... 2-14  
Standalone Uninstall................................................................................ 2-15  
Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File......................... 2-15  
Saving and Opening Fabric View Files ............................................................ 2-16  
Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences ............................................. 2-16  
Using Online Help ............................................................................................ 2-18  
Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information ...................................... 2-18  
2.7  
2.8  
2.9  
2.10  
59022-11 A  
Page iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
2.11  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface ...................................................... 2-19  
Menu Bar................................................................................................. 2-20  
Topology Display Menu .................................................................. 2-20  
Faceplate Display Menu................................................................. 2-21  
Shortcut Keys ................................................................................. 2-21  
Tool Bar ................................................................................................... 2-22  
Fabric Tree .............................................................................................. 2-23  
Graphic Window ...................................................................................... 2-24  
Data Window and Tabs............................................................................ 2-24  
Working Status Indicator.......................................................................... 2-24  
Using the Topology Display.............................................................................. 2-25  
Switch and Link Status ............................................................................ 2-25  
Working with Switches and Links ............................................................ 2-26  
Selecting Switches and Links......................................................... 2-26  
Arranging Switches in the Display.................................................. 2-26  
Opening the Faceplate Display and Topology Popup Menus.................. 2-27  
Topology Data Windows.......................................................................... 2-27  
Using the Faceplate Display............................................................................. 2-28  
Port Views and Status ............................................................................. 2-28  
Working with Ports................................................................................... 2-29  
Selecting Ports................................................................................ 2-29  
Opening the Faceplate Popup Menu.............................................. 2-30  
Faceplate Data Windows......................................................................... 2-31  
2.11.1  
2.11.1.1  
2.11.1.2  
2.11.1.3  
2.11.2  
2.11.3  
2.11.4  
2.11.5  
2.11.6  
2.12  
2.12.1  
2.12.2  
2.12.2.1  
2.12.2.2  
2.12.3  
2.12.4  
2.13  
2.13.1  
2.13.2  
2.13.2.1  
2.13.2.2  
2.13.3  
Section 3  
Managing Fabrics  
3.1  
RADIUS Servers ................................................................................................ 3-1  
Adding a RADIUS Server .......................................................................... 3-2  
Removing a RADIUS Server ..................................................................... 3-4  
Editing RADIUS Server Information .......................................................... 3-5  
Modifying Authentication Order RADIUS Server Information.................... 3-6  
3.1.1  
3.1.2  
3.1.3  
3.1.4  
Page iv  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
3.2  
Securing a Fabric ............................................................................................... 3-7  
Connection Security .................................................................................. 3-7  
User Account Security............................................................................... 3-8  
Security Consistency Checklist ................................................................. 3-8  
Device Security.......................................................................................... 3-9  
Edit Security Dialog ........................................................................ 3-10  
Creating a Security Set................................................................... 3-11  
Create Security Group Dialog......................................................... 3-12  
Creating a Security Group.............................................................. 3-13  
Create Security Group Member Dialog........................................... 3-14  
Creating a Security Group Member................................................ 3-15  
Editing the Security Configuration on a Switch............................... 3-16  
Viewing Properties of a Security Set, Group, or Member............... 3-17  
Using the Security Config Dialog.................................................... 3-17  
Archiving a Security Configuration to a File.................................... 3-18  
Activating a Security Set................................................................. 3-18  
Deactivating a Security Set ............................................................ 3-18  
Configured Security Data Window.................................................. 3-19  
Active Security Data Window.......................................................... 3-19  
Fabric Services........................................................................................ 3-19  
Enabling SNMP Configuration........................................................ 3-19  
Enabling In-band Management ...................................................... 3-20  
Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions............................................ 3-20  
Saving a Version Snapshot ..................................................................... 3-20  
Viewing and Comparing Version Snapshots............................................ 3-21  
Exporting Version Snapshots to a File..................................................... 3-21  
Managing the Fabric Database ........................................................................ 3-22  
Adding a Fabric ....................................................................................... 3-22  
Removing a Fabric .................................................................................. 3-23  
Opening a Fabric View File ..................................................................... 3-23  
Saving a Fabric View File........................................................................ 3-24  
Rediscovering a Fabric............................................................................ 3-24  
Adding a New Switch to a Fabric............................................................. 3-24  
Replacing a Failed Switch ....................................................................... 3-25  
Deleting Switches and Links.................................................................... 3-26  
3.2.1  
3.2.2  
3.2.3  
3.2.4  
3.2.4.1  
3.2.4.2  
3.2.4.3  
3.2.4.4  
3.2.4.5  
3.2.4.6  
3.2.4.7  
3.2.4.8  
3.2.4.9  
3.2.4.10  
3.2.4.11  
3.2.4.12  
3.2.4.13  
3.2.4.14  
3.2.5  
3.2.5.1  
3.2.5.2  
3.3  
3.3.1  
3.3.2  
3.3.3  
3.4  
3.4.1  
3.4.2  
3.4.3  
3.4.4  
3.4.5  
3.4.6  
3.4.7  
3.4.8  
59022-11 A  
Page v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
3.5  
Displaying Fabric Information........................................................................... 3-26  
Fabric Status............................................................................................ 3-27  
Displaying the Event Browser.................................................................. 3-28  
Filtering the Event Browser ............................................................ 3-30  
Sorting the Event Browser.............................................................. 3-31  
Saving the Event Browser to a File ................................................ 3-31  
Devices Data Window ............................................................................. 3-32  
Active Zone Set Data Window................................................................. 3-33  
Link Data Window.................................................................................... 3-34  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames............................................ 3-34  
Displaying Detailed Device Information................................................... 3-34  
Exporting Device Information to a File..................................................... 3-35  
Managing Device Port Nicknames .......................................................... 3-35  
Creating a Nickname...................................................................... 3-35  
Editing a Nickname......................................................................... 3-36  
Deleting a Nickname ...................................................................... 3-36  
Exporting Nicknames to a File........................................................ 3-36  
Importing a Nicknames File............................................................ 3-37  
3.5.1  
3.5.2  
3.5.2.1  
3.5.2.2  
3.5.2.3  
3.5.3  
3.5.4  
3.5.5  
3.6  
3.6.1  
3.6.2  
3.6.3  
3.6.3.1  
3.6.3.2  
3.6.3.3  
3.6.3.4  
3.6.3.5  
Page vi  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
3.7  
Zoning a Fabric ................................................................................................ 3-37  
Zoning Concepts ..................................................................................... 3-37  
Zones.............................................................................................. 3-38  
Aliases............................................................................................ 3-39  
Zone Sets ....................................................................................... 3-39  
Zoning Database ............................................................................ 3-40  
Using the Zoning Wizard ......................................................................... 3-41  
Managing the Zoning Database .............................................................. 3-41  
Editing the Zoning Database .......................................................... 3-42  
Configuring the Zoning Database................................................... 3-44  
Saving the Zoning Database to a File............................................. 3-45  
Restoring the Zoning Database from a File.................................... 3-46  
Restoring the Default Zoning Database.......................................... 3-46  
Removing All Zoning Definitions..................................................... 3-46  
Managing Zone Sets ............................................................................... 3-47  
Creating a Zone Set ....................................................................... 3-47  
Activating and Deactivating a Zone Set.......................................... 3-48  
Copying a Zone to a Zone Set........................................................ 3-48  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets.............. 3-49  
Removing a Zone Set..................................................................... 3-49  
Managing Zones...................................................................................... 3-50  
Creating a Zone in a Zone Set ....................................................... 3-50  
Adding Zone Members ................................................................... 3-51  
Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set .................................................... 3-52  
Removing a Zone Member ............................................................. 3-52  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set ................................................ 3-52  
Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets............................................. 3-53  
Changing Zone Types .................................................................... 3-53  
Managing Aliases .................................................................................... 3-53  
Creating an Alias ............................................................................ 3-54  
Adding a Member to an Alias ......................................................... 3-54  
Removing an Alias from All Zones ................................................. 3-55  
Merging Fabrics and Zoning.................................................................... 3-55  
Zone Merge Failure ........................................................................ 3-55  
Zone Merge Failure Recovery........................................................ 3-56  
3.7.1  
3.7.1.1  
3.7.1.2  
3.7.1.3  
3.7.1.4  
3.7.2  
3.7.3  
3.7.3.1  
3.7.3.2  
3.7.3.3  
3.7.3.4  
3.7.3.5  
3.7.3.6  
3.7.4  
3.7.4.1  
3.7.4.2  
3.7.4.3  
3.7.4.4  
3.7.4.5  
3.7.5  
3.7.5.1  
3.7.5.2  
3.7.5.3  
3.7.5.4  
3.7.5.5  
3.7.5.6  
3.7.5.7  
3.7.6  
3.7.6.1  
3.7.6.2  
3.7.6.3  
3.7.7  
3.7.7.1  
3.7.7.2  
59022-11 A  
Page vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
Section 4  
Managing Switches  
4.1  
Managing User Accounts ................................................................................... 4-2  
Creating User Accounts............................................................................. 4-3  
Removing a User Account......................................................................... 4-4  
Changing a User Account Password......................................................... 4-5  
Modifying a User Account.......................................................................... 4-6  
Displaying Switch Information ............................................................................ 4-7  
Devices Data Window ............................................................................... 4-8  
Switch Data Window.................................................................................. 4-8  
Port Statistics Data Window .................................................................... 4-12  
Port Information Data Window................................................................. 4-13  
Configured and Active Zonesets Data Window....................................... 4-14  
Configuring Port Threshold Alarms .................................................................. 4-15  
Paging a Switch................................................................................................ 4-16  
Setting the Date/Time and Enabling NTP Client .............................................. 4-17  
Resetting a Switch............................................................................................ 4-17  
Configuring a Switch ........................................................................................ 4-19  
Using the Configuration Wizard............................................................... 4-19  
Switch Properties..................................................................................... 4-20  
Symbolic Name .............................................................................. 4-21  
Switch Administrative States........................................................... 4-21  
Domain ID and Domain ID Lock..................................................... 4-22  
Fabric Device Management Interface............................................. 4-23  
Broadcast Support.......................................................................... 4-24  
In-band Management ..................................................................... 4-24  
Advanced Switch Properties.................................................................... 4-25  
Interop Mode for Zoning ................................................................. 4-25  
Legacy Port Address Format.......................................................... 4-26  
Timeout Values............................................................................... 4-26  
System Services Dialog........................................................................... 4-27  
Security Consistency Checklist Dialog .................................................... 4-28  
Network Properties.................................................................................. 4-29  
IP Configuration.............................................................................. 4-30  
Remote Logging ............................................................................. 4-31  
NTP Client ...................................................................................... 4-31  
SNMP Properties..................................................................................... 4-32  
SNMP Configuration....................................................................... 4-33  
SNMP Trap Configuration............................................................... 4-34  
Archiving a Switch............................................................................................ 4-35  
4.1.1  
4.1.2  
4.1.3  
4.1.4  
4.2  
4.2.1  
4.2.2  
4.2.3  
4.2.4  
4.2.5  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
4.7.1  
4.7.2  
4.7.2.1  
4.7.2.2  
4.7.2.3  
4.7.2.4  
4.7.2.5  
4.7.2.6  
4.7.3  
4.7.3.1  
4.7.3.2  
4.7.3.3  
4.7.4  
4.7.5  
4.7.6  
4.7.6.1  
4.7.6.2  
4.7.6.3  
4.7.7  
4.7.7.1  
4.7.7.2  
4.8  
Page viii  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
4.9  
Restoring a Switch ........................................................................................... 4-36  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration .................................................... 4-38  
Downloading a Support File ............................................................................. 4-39  
Installing Firmware ........................................................................................... 4-40  
Displaying Hardware Status ............................................................................. 4-41  
4.10  
4.11  
4.12  
4.13  
Section 5  
Managing Ports  
5.1  
Displaying Port Information ................................................................................ 5-1  
Monitoring Port Status ............................................................................... 5-2  
Displaying Port Types....................................................................... 5-2  
Displaying Port Operational States................................................... 5-3  
Displaying Port Speeds .................................................................... 5-3  
Displaying Transceiver Media Status................................................ 5-4  
Port Statistics Data Window ...................................................................... 5-4  
Port Information Data Window................................................................... 5-7  
Configuring Ports.............................................................................................. 5-10  
Changing Port Administrative States....................................................... 5-11  
Changing Port Speeds ............................................................................ 5-12  
Changing Port Types............................................................................... 5-13  
I/O Stream Guard .................................................................................... 5-13  
Device Scan ............................................................................................ 5-14  
Changing Port Symbolic Name ............................................................... 5-14  
Using the Extended Credits Wizard ................................................................. 5-14  
Resetting a Port................................................................................................ 5-16  
Testing Ports..................................................................................................... 5-16  
Graphing Port Performance ............................................................................. 5-18  
Starting SANsurfer Performance Viewer ................................................. 5-19  
Exiting SANsurfer Performance Viewer................................................... 5-20  
Saving and Opening Performance View Files......................................... 5-21  
Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key ................ 5-22  
Setting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Preferences.............................. 5-22  
Setting the Polling Frequency.................................................................. 5-23  
Displaying Graphs ................................................................................... 5-23  
Arranging Graphs in the Display..................................................... 5-24  
Customizing Graphs....................................................................... 5-24  
Setting Global Graph Type ............................................................. 5-26  
Rescaling a Selected Graph........................................................... 5-26  
Saving Graph Statistics to a File.............................................................. 5-26  
5.1.1  
5.1.1.1  
5.1.1.2  
5.1.1.3  
5.1.1.4  
5.1.2  
5.1.3  
5.2  
5.2.1  
5.2.2  
5.2.3  
5.2.4  
5.2.5  
5.2.6  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
5.6  
5.6.1  
5.6.2  
5.6.3  
5.6.4  
5.6.5  
5.6.6  
5.6.7  
5.6.7.1  
5.6.7.2  
5.6.7.3  
5.6.7.4  
5.6.8  
59022-11 A  
Page ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
Appendix A Command Line Interface  
A.1  
A.2  
A.3  
A.3.1  
A.3.2  
A.4  
Logging On to a Switch ......................................................................................A-1  
User Accounts....................................................................................................A-2  
Working with Switch Configurations...................................................................A-2  
Modifying a Configuration..........................................................................A-3  
Backing up and Restoring Switch Configurations......................................A-4  
Commands.........................................................................................................A-6  
Admin Command.......................................................................................A-8  
Alias Command .........................................................................................A-9  
CIM Command ........................................................................................A-11  
CIMListener Command............................................................................A-12  
CIMSubscription Command.....................................................................A-14  
Config Command.....................................................................................A-16  
Create Command ....................................................................................A-19  
Date Command .......................................................................................A-22  
Firmware Install Command......................................................................A-23  
Group Command.....................................................................................A-24  
Hardreset Command ...............................................................................A-32  
Help Command........................................................................................A-33  
History Command....................................................................................A-34  
Hotreset Command .................................................................................A-35  
Image Command.....................................................................................A-36  
Lip Command ..........................................................................................A-39  
Passwd Command ..................................................................................A-40  
Ping Command........................................................................................A-41  
Ps Command...........................................................................................A-42  
Quit Command ........................................................................................A-43  
Reset Command......................................................................................A-44  
Security Command..................................................................................A-52  
Securityset Command .............................................................................A-56  
Set Command..........................................................................................A-58  
Set Config Command ..............................................................................A-60  
Set Log Command...................................................................................A-71  
Set Port Command..................................................................................A-75  
Set Setup Command ...............................................................................A-77  
Show Command......................................................................................A-87  
Show Config Command.........................................................................A-103  
Show Log Command.............................................................................A-106  
Show Perf Command ............................................................................A-109  
Page x  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
Show Setup Command.......................................................................... A-111  
Shutdown Command.............................................................................A-115  
Test Command ......................................................................................A-116  
Uptime Command..................................................................................A-119  
User Command .....................................................................................A-120  
Whoami Command................................................................................A-123  
Zone Command.....................................................................................A-124  
Zoneset Command................................................................................A-128  
Zoning Command..................................................................................A-130  
Glossary  
Index  
59022-11 A  
Page xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
Figures  
Figure  
Page  
2-1  
2-2  
2-3  
2-4  
2-5  
2-6  
2-7  
2-8  
2-9  
Initial Startup Dialog..................................................................................................... 2-10  
SANsurfer Switch Manager Window............................................................................ 2-11  
Save Default Fabric View File Dialog........................................................................... 2-12  
Load Default Fabric File Dialog.................................................................................... 2-13  
Preferences Dialog – SANsurfer Switch Manager ....................................................... 2-17  
SANsurfer Switch Manager Display Elements............................................................. 2-19  
Topology Display Menu................................................................................................ 2-20  
Faceplate Display Menu............................................................................................... 2-21  
Fabric Tree................................................................................................................... 2-23  
2-10 Topology Display.......................................................................................................... 2-25  
2-11 Faceplate Display......................................................................................................... 2-28  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
3-4  
3-5  
3-6  
3-7  
3-8  
3-9  
Add Server ..................................................................................................................... 3-2  
Remove Server .............................................................................................................. 3-4  
Edit Radius Server Information ...................................................................................... 3-5  
Modify Authentication Order - Radius Server Information.............................................. 3-6  
Edit Security Dialog...................................................................................................... 3-10  
Create Security Group Dialog ...................................................................................... 3-12  
Create a Security Group Member Dialog..................................................................... 3-14  
Security Config Dialog.................................................................................................. 3-17  
Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis Dialog .................................................................... 3-21  
3-10 Add a New Fabric Dialog ............................................................................................. 3-22  
3-11 Events Browser............................................................................................................ 3-28  
3-12 Filter Events Dialog...................................................................................................... 3-30  
3-13 Active Zone Set Data Window ..................................................................................... 3-33  
3-14 Detailed Devices Display Dialog .................................................................................. 3-34  
3-15 Edit Zoning Dialog........................................................................................................ 3-42  
3-16 Zoning Config Dialog.................................................................................................... 3-44  
4-1  
4-2  
4-3  
4-4  
4-5  
4-6  
4-7  
4-8  
4-9  
User Account Administration Dialog – Add Account ...................................................... 4-3  
User Account Administration Dialog – Remove Account ............................................... 4-4  
User Account Administration Dialog– Change Password .............................................. 4-5  
User Account Administration Dialog – Modify Account.................................................. 4-6  
Faceplate Display...........................................................................................................4-7  
Faceplate Display - Port Information............................................................................ 4-13  
Configured Zonesets Data Window ............................................................................. 4-14  
Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Dialog.................................................................. 4-15  
Port Threshold Alarm Example .................................................................................... 4-16  
4-10 Switch Properties Dialog.............................................................................................. 4-20  
4-11 Advanced Switch Properties Dialog............................................................................. 4-25  
4-12 System Services Dialog ............................................................................................... 4-27  
4-13 Network Properties Dialog ........................................................................................... 4-29  
4-14 SNMP Properties Dialog .............................................................................................. 4-32  
4-15 Restore Dialogs – Full and Selective ........................................................................... 4-36  
4-16 Hardware Status LEDs................................................................................................. 4-41  
Page xii  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
5-1  
5-2  
5-3  
5-4  
5-5  
5-6  
5-7  
5-8  
5-9  
Faceplate Display - Port Information.............................................................................. 5-1  
Port Properties Dialog.................................................................................................. 5-10  
Designate Donor Ports................................................................................................. 5-15  
Port Loopback Test Dialog........................................................................................... 5-16  
Fabric View Graphs...................................................................................................... 5-18  
Save Default Performance View File Dialog ................................................................ 5-20  
Load Default Performance File Dialog ......................................................................... 5-21  
Preferences – SANsurfer Performance Viewer............................................................ 5-22  
Default Graph Options Dialog ...................................................................................... 5-24  
Tables  
Table  
Page  
2-1  
2-2  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
3-4  
4-1  
4-2  
4-3  
4-4  
4-5  
4-6  
4-7  
4-8  
4-9  
5-1  
5-2  
5-3  
5-4  
5-5  
5-6  
5-7  
5-8  
5-9  
A-1  
A-2  
A-3  
A-4  
A-5  
A-6  
A-7  
A-8  
A-9  
Workstation Requirements............................................................................................. 2-2  
Tool Bar Buttons .......................................................................................................... 2-22  
Topology Display Switch and Status Icons .................................................................. 3-27  
Severity Levels.............................................................................................................3-29  
Devices Data Window Entries...................................................................................... 3-32  
Edit Zoning Dialog Tool Bar Buttons and Icons ........................................................... 3-43  
Factory User Accounts................................................................................................... 4-2  
Switch Data Window Entries.......................................................................................... 4-8  
Switch Resets .............................................................................................................. 4-18  
Switch Administrative States........................................................................................ 4-21  
Timeout Values ............................................................................................................ 4-26  
IP Configuration Parameters........................................................................................ 4-30  
SNMP Configuration Parameters................................................................................. 4-33  
SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters ........................................................................ 4-34  
Factory Default Configuration Settings ........................................................................ 4-38  
Port Types...................................................................................................................... 5-2  
Port Operational States.................................................................................................. 5-3  
Port Speeds ................................................................................................................... 5-3  
Transceiver Media View................................................................................................. 5-4  
Port Statistics Data Window Entries............................................................................... 5-5  
Port Information Data Window Entries........................................................................... 5-7  
Port Administrative States............................................................................................ 5-11  
Port Speeds .................................................................................................................5-12  
Port Types.................................................................................................................... 5-13  
Command-Line Completion ...........................................................................................A-6  
Commands Listed by Authority Level.............................................................................A-7  
CIM Listener Configuration Parameters.......................................................................A-12  
CIM Subscription Configuration Parameters................................................................A-14  
ISL Group Member Attributes ......................................................................................A-25  
Port Group Member Attributes .....................................................................................A-26  
MS Group Member Attributes ......................................................................................A-27  
Group Member Attributes.............................................................................................A-28  
Switch Configuration Defaults......................................................................................A-46  
59022-11 A  
Page xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
A-10 Port Configuration Defaults..........................................................................................A-47  
A-11 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Defaults...............................................................A-48  
A-12 Zoning Configuration Defaults......................................................................................A-48  
A-13 SNMP Configuration Defaults ......................................................................................A-49  
A-14 RADIUS Configuration Defaults...................................................................................A-50  
A-15 Services Configuration Defaults...................................................................................A-50  
A-16 System Configuration Defaults.....................................................................................A-51  
A-17 Security Configuration Defaults....................................................................................A-51  
A-18 Set Config Port Parameters .........................................................................................A-60  
A-19 Security Configuration Parameters ..............................................................................A-63  
A-20 Set Config Switch Parameters .....................................................................................A-63  
A-21 Set Config Threshold Parameters................................................................................A-65  
A-22 Set Config Zoning Parameters.....................................................................................A-66  
A-23 RADIUS Service Settings.............................................................................................A-77  
A-24 Switch Services Settings..............................................................................................A-79  
A-25 SNMP Configuration Settings ......................................................................................A-81  
A-26 System Configuration Settings.....................................................................................A-82  
A-27 Show Port Parameters.................................................................................................A-90  
A-28 Switch Operational Parameters ...................................................................................A-93  
A-29 Zoning Database Limits .............................................................................................A-131  
Page xiv  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Introduction  
This manual describes the switch management tools which include the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager™ application (version 5.00) and the Command Line Interface  
(CLI) for the SANbox2 Fibre Channel switch (firmware version 5.0). The  
SANsurfer Switch Manager switch management application is the primary focus  
of this manual which is organized as follows:  
„
Section 1 describes the intended audience for this manual, related  
materials, and technical support.  
„
Section 2 describes how to use SANsurfer Switch Manager, its menus, and  
its displays.  
„
„
„
„
Section 3 describes fabric management tasks.  
Section 4 describes switch management tasks.  
Section 5 describes port and device management tasks.  
Appendix A describes the command line interface.  
A glossary of terms and an index are also provided.  
1.1  
Intended Audience  
This manual introduces the switch management products and explains their  
installation and use. It is intended for users responsible for installing and using  
switch management tools.  
1.2  
Related Materials  
Refer to the following manuals for information about switch hardware and  
installation.  
„
SANbox2-8c Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide, publication number  
59042-08 Rev. A.  
„
SANbox2-16 Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide, publication number  
59021-11 Rev. A.  
59022-11 A  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1 – Introduction  
JDOM License  
0
1.3  
JDOM License  
This product includes software developed by the JDOM Project  
(http://www.jdom.org/). Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Brett McLaughlin & Jason  
Hunter. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,  
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1.  
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this  
list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.  
2.  
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions, and the disclaimer that follows these conditions in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3.  
4.  
The name "JDOM" must not be used to endorse or promote products  
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written  
permission, please contact [email protected].  
Products derived from this software may not be called "JDOM", nor may  
"JDOM" appear in their name, without prior written permission from the  
JDOM Project Management ([email protected]).  
In addition, we request (but do not require) that you include in the end-user  
documentation provided with the redistribution and/or in the software itself an  
acknowledgement equivalent to the following: "This product includes software  
developed by the JDOM Project (http://www.jdom.org/)."  
Alternatively, the acknowledgment may be graphical using the logos available at  
http://www.jdom.org/images/logos.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE JDOM AUTHORS  
OR THE PROJECT CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY  
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF  
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGE.  
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on  
behalf of the JDOM Project and was originally created by Brett McLaughlin  
<[email protected]> and Jason Hunter <[email protected]>. For more information  
on the JDOM Project, please see <http://www.jdom.org/>.  
1-2  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 – Introduction  
Technical Support  
0
1.4  
Technical Support  
Customers should contact their authorized maintenance provider for technical  
support of their QLogic switch products. QLogic-direct customers may contact  
QLogic Technical Support; others will be redirected to their authorized  
maintenance provider.  
Visit the QLogic support Web site listed in Contact Information for the latest  
firmware and software updates.  
1.4.1  
Availability  
QLogic Technical Support is available from 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM Central Standard  
Time, Monday through Friday, excluding QLogic-observed holidays.  
1.4.2  
Training  
QLogic offers certification training for the technical professional for both the  
SANblade™ HBAs and the SANbox2™ switches. From the training link at  
www.qlogic.com, you may choose Electronic-Based Training or schedule an  
intensive "hands-on" Certification course.  
Technical Certification courses include installation, maintenance and  
troubleshooting QLogic SAN products. Upon demonstrating knowledge using live  
equipment, QLogic awards a certificate identifying the student as a Certified  
Professional. The training professionals at QLogic may be reached by email at  
[email protected]  
1.4.3  
Contact Information  
Telephone:  
Fax:  
+1 952-932-4040  
+1 952-932-4018  
Email:  
Technical Service  
[email protected]  
Technical Training  
[email protected]  
QLogic Web Site:  
www.qlogic.com  
Technical Support Web Site:  
support.qlogic.com  
59022-11 A  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1 – Introduction  
Technical Support  
0
Notes  
1-4  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
This section describes how to use the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and  
its menus. The following topics are covered:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Workstation Requirements  
Installing the Management Application  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Exiting SANsurfer Management Suite  
Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File  
Saving and Opening Fabric View Files  
Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences  
Using Online Help  
Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
Using the Topology Display  
Using the Faceplate Display  
59022-11 A  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Workstation Requirements  
0
2.1  
Workstation Requirements  
The requirements for fabric management workstations running SANsurfer Switch  
Manager are described in Table 2-1:  
Table 2-1. Workstation Requirements  
„ Windows® 2000, 2003, and XP  
„ Solaris™ 8, 9, and 10  
Operating System  
„ Linux® Red Hat® EL 3.x  
„ S.u.S.E® Linux 9.0 Enterprise  
„ Mac OS X® 10.3  
Memory  
256 MB or more  
Disk Space  
Processor  
150 MB per installation  
500 MHz or faster  
Hardware  
CD-ROM drive, RJ-45 Ethernet port, RS-232 serial port (optional)  
Internet Browser  
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 5.0 and later  
Netscape® Navigator® 4.72 and later  
Mozilla™ 1.02 and later  
Safari®  
Java 2 Run Time Environment to support the web applet  
Telnet workstations require an RJ-45 Ethernet port or an RS-232 serial port and  
an operating system with a Telnet client.  
2.2  
Installing the Management Application  
You can manage the switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone  
application or as a part of SANsurfer Management Suite™. SANsurfer  
Management Suite is QLogic’s integrated fabric management application,  
managing both HBAs and switches.  
„
If your switch was shipped with a SANsurfer Switch Manager Disk, refer to  
”SANsurfer Switch Manager” on page 2-3 for instructions on how to install  
SANsurfer Switch Manager.  
„
If your switch was shipped with a SANsurfer Management Suite Disk, refer  
to ”SANsurfer Management Suite” on page 2-4 for instructions on how to  
install and upgrade SANsurfer Management Suite.  
2-2  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
0
2.2.1  
SANsurfer Switch Manager  
You can install SANsurfer Switch Manager on a Windows, Linux, Solaris, or  
Mac OS X workstation. To install the SANsurfer Switch Manager application from  
the SANsurfer Switch Manager Installation Disk, do the following:  
For a Windows platform:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANsurfer Switch  
Manager Installation Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
In the upper left corner of the product introduction screen, click  
Management Software.  
Locate your platform in the table and click Install.  
If the product introduction screen does not open in step 2, open the CD with  
Windows Explorer and run the installation program with the following path:  
data\files\Management_Software\Windows\Windows_5.00.xx.xx.exe  
For a Linux platform:  
Open the CD and run the installation program with the following path:  
data/files/Management_Software/Linux/Linux_5.00.xx.xx.bin  
If there is no CD-ROM icon, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open an xterm or other terminal window.  
Mount the CD-ROM. From a shell prompt, enter the following:  
mount /mnt/cdrom  
3.  
4.  
Change directory to the location of the install program:  
cd /mnt/cdrom/data/files/Management_Software/Linux  
Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions.  
Linux_5.00.xx.xx.bin  
For a Solaris platform:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open a terminal window. If the disk isn’t already mounted, enter the  
following command:  
volcheck  
Enter following command to move to the directory on the CD that contains  
the executable:  
cd /cdrom/cdrom0/data/files/Management_Software/solaris  
Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions:  
Solaris_5.00.xx.xx.bin  
59022-11 A  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
0
For a Mac OS X platform:  
1.  
Open the CD and move to the following folder:  
data/files/Management_Software/MacOSX  
2.  
3.  
Double click the applicaton zip file (MacOSX_5.00.xx_xxxx.zip). This  
will place the install program on your desktop.  
Locate the Install program icon on your desktop, execute it, and follow  
the installation instructions.  
2.2.2  
SANsurfer Management Suite  
The following instructions describe how to install SANsurfer Management Suite  
and upgrade SANsurfer Switch Manager. You can install SANsurfer Management  
Suite (SMS) on a Windows, Linux, or Solaris workstation. Choose the instructions  
for your workstation:  
„
„
„
SMS Installation for Windows  
SMS Installation for Linux  
SMS Installation for Solaris  
2.2.2.1  
SMS Installation for Windows  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANsurfer Management Suite  
Installation Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
1.  
If the SANsurfer Management Suite start page does not open in your default  
browser, do the following:  
a.  
Using Windows Explorer, double-click the drive letter which contains  
the SANsurfer Management Suite Disk.  
b.  
Locate and double-click the Start_Here.htm file to open the SANsurfer  
Management Suite start page in your default browser.  
2.  
3.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, click the SANbox Switch  
Software button.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox2-8c/16 Series  
area.  
4.  
5.  
In the Operating System column, click the Win NT/2000 link.  
Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the File Download  
dialog.  
2-4  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
0
6.  
You can run the installation file from the CD-ROM or download the  
installation file to your hard drive. Choose one of the following:  
„
Open the installation file from the CD-ROM and follow the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager installation instructions.  
„
Specify a location in which to save the  
sansurfer_windows_install.exe file, and click the Save button.  
Double-click the saved sansurfer_windows_install.exe file and  
follow the installation instructions.  
7.  
8.  
When the installation is complete, start SANsurfer Management Suite using  
the SANsurfer file from the SANsurfer Management Suite installation  
directory. You can also start SANsurfer Management Suite by clicking the  
SANsurfer icon (if installed) on the desktop or from the Start menu. In SMS,  
Click the Switch tab in the left pane. From the Help menu, select About ...  
and make note of the version number. Close SANsurfer Management Suite.  
To ensure you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch  
Manager, visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers, Software and  
Manuals.  
a.  
Select your switch model from the pull-down menu. Locate the  
description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Windows under  
"Management Software".  
b.  
If the release version number (5.00.xx) is greater than what is currently  
installed, download the new version and proceed to step 9. Otherwise,  
no upgrade is needed and the SMS installation is complete.  
9.  
To start the installer, open the zip file and run the  
SANsurferSwitchMgr_Windows_5.00.xx.exe file.  
10. When prompted for an installation directory, click the Choose button and  
select the same folder as the SANsurfer Management Suite installation in  
step 6. The default SMS installation directory is C:\Program Files\QLogic  
Corporation\SANsurfer. Click the Next button.  
11. When prompted for the location in which to create the program icons, click  
the In an Existing Group radio button, then specify the same group that  
was used for the SMS installation. The default SMS group is "QLogic  
Management Suite". Click the Next button.  
12. Click the Install button to the start the installation. When the installation is  
complete, click the Done button.  
13. In the SMS install directory, enter the following command to execute the  
chglax.bat file. If prompted to overwrite an existing file, enter Yto do so.  
chglax.bat  
14. Restart SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as  
you did in step 7 and confirm that the new version is running.  
59022-11 A  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
0
2.2.2.2  
SMS Installation for Linux  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANsurfer Management Suite  
Installation Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
1.  
If a file browser dialog opens showing icons for the contents of the CD-ROM,  
double-click the Start_Here.htm file to open the SANsurfer Management  
Suite start page. If a file browser does not open, double-click the CD-ROM  
icon to open the browser. If there is no CD-ROM icon, do the following:  
a.  
b.  
Open an xterm or other terminal window.  
Mount the CD-ROM. From a shell prompt, enter the following  
command:  
mount /mnt/cdrom  
c.  
Execute your web browser to view the Start_Here.htm document  
using one of the following commands:  
mozilla file:/mnt/cdrom/Start_Here.htm  
or  
netscape file:/mnt/cdrom/Start_Here.htm  
The SANsurfer Management Suite start page opens in your browser.  
d.  
2.  
3.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, click the SANbox Switch  
Software button.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox2-8c/16 Series  
area.  
4.  
5.  
In the Operating System column, click the Linux link.  
Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the File Download  
dialog.  
6.  
7.  
Enter a path name to save the sansurfer_linux_install.bin file, and click  
the Save button.  
Open a terminal window for the directory in which the  
sansurfer_linux_install.bin file was saved, and make the file executable.  
chmod +x sansurfer_linux_install.bin  
Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions  
./sansurfer_linux_install.bin  
8.  
9.  
When the installation is complete, start SANsurfer Management Suite using  
the SANsurfer file in the installation directory. Click the Switch tab from the  
left pane to open SANsurfer Switch Manager. From the Help menu, select  
About ... and make note of the release version number. Close SANsurfer  
Management Suite.  
2-6  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
0
10. To ensure that you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch  
Manager, visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers, Software and  
Manuals.  
a.  
Select your switch model from the pull-down menu. Locate the  
description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Linux under  
"Management Software".  
b.  
If the release version number (5.00.xx) is greater than what is currently  
installed on your workstation, down load the new version and proceed  
to step 11. Otherwise, no upgrade is needed and the SMS installation  
is complete.  
11. From the tar.gz file, extract the SANsurferSwitchMgr_Linux_5.00.xx.bin  
file and make the file executable.  
chmod +x sansurferswitchmgr_linux_5.02.xx.bin  
12. Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions.  
./sansurferswitchmgr_linux_5.02.xx.bin  
13. When prompted for an installation directory, click the Choose button and  
select the same folder as the SANsurfer Management Suite installation in  
step 9. The default SMS installation directory is  
/opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer.  
14. Enter the following script command from the installation directory:  
./chglax  
15. Start SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as you  
did in step 9 and confirm that the new version is running.  
2.2.2.3  
SMS Installation for Solaris  
To install the SANsurfer Switch Manager application on Solaris from the  
SANsurfer Management Suite CD-ROM, do the following:  
1.  
Insert the SANsurfer Management Suite Disk into the management  
workstation CD-ROM drive. If the SANsurfer Management Suite start page  
does not open in your default browser, do the following:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
Right-click the Workspace Menu.  
Select File, then select File Manager.  
In File Manager, double-click the CD-ROM folder, and then  
double-click the Sansurfer folder.  
d.  
In the Sansurfer folder, double-click the Start_Here.htm file to open  
the SANsurfer Management Suite start page in your default browser.  
2.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, click the SANbox Switch  
Software button.  
59022-11 A  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
0
3.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox2-8c/16 Series  
area.  
4.  
5.  
In the Operating System column, click the Solaris SPARC link.  
Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the Save As  
dialog.  
6.  
7.  
Enter a path name to save the sansurfer_solaris_install.bin file and click  
the Save button.  
Open a terminal window for the directory in which the  
sansurfer_solaris_install.bin file was saved, and enter the following:  
chmod +x sansurfer_solaris_install.bin  
Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions:  
./sansurfer_solaris_install.bin  
8.  
9.  
When the installation is complete, start SANsurfer Management Suite using  
the SANsurfer file in the installation directory. Click the Switch tab from the  
left pane to open SANsurfer Switch Manager. From the Help menu, select  
About ... and make note of the release version number. Close SANsurfer  
Management Suite.  
10. To ensure that you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch  
Manager, visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers, Software and  
Manuals.  
a.  
Select your switch model from the pull-down menu. Locate the  
description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Linux under  
"Management Software".  
b.  
If the release version number (5.00.xx) is greater than what is currently  
installed on your workstation, down load the new version. Otherwise,  
no upgrade is needed.  
11. Open the tar file and save the  
SANsurferSwitchMgr_QLGCsol_5.00.xx.bin file in a folder and make the  
file executable.  
# chmod +x sansurferswitchmgr_QLGCsol_5.00.xx  
12. Install the new SANsurfer Switch Manager package:  
# pkgadd -d sansurferswitchmgr_QLGCsol_5.00.xx  
13. Change directories to the package location:  
# cd /usr/opt/QLGCsol/bin  
14. Locate and execute the file sbm_over_sms.sh:  
# ./sbm_over_sms.sh  
2-8  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
0
15. When prompted for the SMS installation directory, enter d if SMS was  
installed in it’s default directory (/opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer).  
Otherwise, enter the path name for the SMS installation directory. The script  
will copy the necessary files to the specified installation directory.  
16. Restart SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as  
you did in step 9 and confirm that the new version is running.  
2.3  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
You can start SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone application or from  
SANsurfer Management Suite.  
Note:  
After the switch is operational, you can also open the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager web applet, by entering the switch IP address in an  
internet browser. If your workstation does not have the Java 2 Run  
Time Environment program, you will be prompted to download it.  
„
To start SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone application, do the  
following.  
1.  
Start the SANsurfer Switch Manager using one of the following  
methods:  
‰
For Windows, double-click the SANsurfer Switch Manager  
shortcut, or select SANsurfer Switch Manager from Start menu,  
depending on how you installed the SANsurfer Switch Manager  
application. From a command line, you can enter the  
SANsurfer_Switch_Manager command:  
<install_directory>SANsurfer_Switch_Manager.exe  
‰
For Linux, Solaris, or Mac OS X, enter the  
SANsurfer_Switch_Manager command:  
<install_directory>./SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
2.  
In the Initial Start dialog, click the Open Configuration Wizard button.  
When you power up the switch, the Configuration Wizard will  
recognize the switch and lead you through the configuration process.  
59022-11 A  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
0
„
To start SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management Suite, do  
the following.  
1.  
Start the SANsurfer Management Suite application using one of the  
following methods:  
‰
For Windows, double-click the SANsurfer shortcut, or select  
SANsurfer from Start menu, depending on how you installed the  
SANsurfer application. From a command line, enter the following  
command:  
<install_directory>\SANsurfer.exe  
For Linux or Solaris enter the SANsurfer command:  
<install_directory>./SANsurfer  
‰
2.  
3.  
From the SANsurfer Management Suite home page, click the  
SANsurfer Switch Manager button.  
In the Initial Start dialog, click the Open Configuration Wizard button.  
When you power up the switch, the Configuration Wizard will  
recognize the switch and lead you through the configuration process.  
The application opens with the Initial Start dialog shown in Figure 2-1. If you prefer  
not to see this dialog, check the Don’t show this dialog again check box. This  
has the same effect as disabling the Display Initial Startup Dialog preference.  
Refer to ”Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences” on page 2-16 for  
information about setting preferences.  
Figure 2-1. Initial Startup Dialog  
„
Click the Open Existing Fabric radio button to open the Add a New Fabric  
dialog, which prompts you for a fabric name, IP address, account name, and  
password. Refer to ”Adding a Fabric” on page 3-22.  
2-10  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
0
„
Click the Open Existing Fabric View File radio button to open the Open  
View dialog which prompts you to specify a fabric view file that you saved  
earlier. Refer to ”Opening a Fabric View File” on page 3-23.  
„
„
Click the Start Application Without Specifying a Fabric radio button to  
open the SANsurfer Switch Manager window shown in Figure 2-2.  
Click the Open Configuration Wizard radio button to open the  
Configuration Wizard to configure a switch, add a new switch,  
replace/restore a switch, or recover or edit an IP configuration of an existing  
switch.  
Figure 2-2. SANsurfer Switch Manager Window  
59022-11 A  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Exiting SANsurfer Management Suite  
0
2.4  
Exiting SANsurfer Management Suite  
To exit a SANsurfer Switch Manager application session, open the File menu and  
select Exit. If you have not yet defined an encryption key, the Save Default Fabric  
View File dialog, shown in Figure 2-3, prompts you to save the current fabric view  
as the default fabric view file. Enter an encryption key in the Default Fabric File  
Encryption Key field. Re-enter the encryption key in the Re-enter Encryption Key  
to Confirm field. Click the OK button to save the current set of fabrics to the  
default fabric view file in the working directory.  
Figure 2-3. Save Default Fabric View File Dialog  
The encryption key is used to encrypt the sensitive data in the default fabric view  
file. Refer to ”Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File” on  
page 2-15 for information about changing this encryption key. If an encryption key  
has been defined and the View File Auto Save and Load preferences settings are  
set to Enable, the current fabric view is automatically saved to your default fabric  
view file upon exit future SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions.  
To prevent SANsurfer Switch Manager from prompting you to save the default  
fabric view file between SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions, set the View File  
Auto Save and Load preferences setting to Enable (default). Refer to ”Setting  
SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences” on page 2-16 for more information.  
2-12  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager  
0
In your next SANsurfer Switch Manager session, the Load Default Fabric File  
dialog shown in Figure 2-4 prompts you to load the default fabric view file and to  
specify its encryption key, if there is one. In the Default Fabric File Encryption Key  
field, enter the encryption key and click the Load View File button. If you do not  
want to load the default fabric view file, click the Continue Without Loading  
button to open the SANsurfer Switch Manager with no fabric displayed.  
Figure 2-4. Load Default Fabric File Dialog  
2.5  
Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager  
The method you use to uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager depends on how you  
installed it:  
„
„
If you installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as part of SANsurfer  
Management Suite, you must uninstall SANsurfer Management Suite. Refer  
to ”SMS Uninstall” on page 2-14.  
If you installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone program, you  
must uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager directly. Refer to ”Standalone  
Uninstall” on page 2-15.  
59022-11 A  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager  
0
2.5.1  
SMS Uninstall  
A program to uninstall SANsurfer Management Suite was included as part of the  
SANsurfer Management Suite installation process. Use this method only if you  
installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as part of SANsurfer Management Suite. The  
UninstallData folder in the installation directory contains the uninstall program,  
SANsurferUninstaller.  
The default installation directories are:  
„
„
„
For Windows: C:\Program Files\QLogic_Corporation\SANsurfer  
For Linux: /opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer  
For Solaris: /opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer  
To uninstall the SANsurfer Management Suite application, do the following:  
„
For Windows, browse for the uninstall program file or the shortcut/link that  
points to the uninstall program file. The uninstall program shortcut is in the  
same folder as the program shortcut (Start menu, program group, on  
desktop, or user specified) that is used to start the SANsurfer Management  
Suite application. Double-click the uninstall program file or shortcut/link, and  
follow the instructions.  
„
„
For Linux, execute the link to SANsurferUninstaller.  
<install_directory>/UninstallerData/SANsurferUninstaller  
For Solaris, enter the following command and follow the instructions:  
<install_directory>/UninstallData/SANsurferUninstaller  
2-14  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File  
0
2.5.2  
Standalone Uninstall  
A program to uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager was included as part of the  
installation process. Use this method only if you installed SANsurfer Switch  
Manager as a standalone program. The UninstallerData folder in the Install  
directory contains the uninstall program, Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager.  
Also, a shortcut/link to the uninstall program was installed in the installation  
directory during the SANsurfer Switch Manager installation process.  
The default installation directories are:  
„
For Windows:  
C:\Program Files\QLogic_Corporation\SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
„
„
„
For Linux: /opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
For Solaris: /usr/opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
For Mac OS X:  
Users/qlogic/Applications/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
To uninstall the SANsurfer Switch Manager application, do the following:  
„
For Windows, browse for the uninstall program file or the shortcut/link that  
points to the uninstall program file. The uninstall program shortcut is in the  
same folder as the program shortcut (Start menu, program group, on  
desktop, or user specified) that is used to start the SANsurfer Switch  
Manager application. Double-click the uninstall program file or shortcut/link,  
and follow the instructions to uninstall the SANsurfer Switch Manager  
application.  
„
For Linux, Solaris, or Mac OS X, execute the link to  
Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager. If no links were created during the  
installation, enter the Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager command from  
the following directory:  
UninstallerData/Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
2.6  
Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File  
To change the encryption key for the SANsurfer Switch Manager default fabric  
view file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Save Default Fabric View File to open the  
Save Default Fabric View File dialog. Enter an encryption key in the Default  
Fabric File Encryption Key field.  
2.  
3.  
Re-enter the same encryption key in the Re-enter Encryption Key to Confirm  
field.  
Click the OK button to save the current set of fabrics to the default fabric  
view file in the working directory.  
59022-11 A  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Saving and Opening Fabric View Files  
0
2.7  
Saving and Opening Fabric View Files  
A fabric view file is one or more fabrics saved to a file. In addition to the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager default fabric view file, you can save and open your own fabric  
view files. To save a set of fabrics to a file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Save View As to open the Save View dialog.  
Enter a name for the fabric view file or click the Browse button to select an  
existing file. Files are saved in the working directory.  
3.  
Enter a password. When you attempt to open this fabric view file, you will be  
prompted for this password. If you leave the File Password field blank, no  
password will be required when attempting to open this fabric view file.  
4.  
Click the OK button to save the view.  
To open a fabric view file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Open the File menu and select Open View File to open the Open View  
dialog.  
Enter a name for the fabric view file or click the Browse button to select an  
existing file.  
If the fabric view file was saved with a password, enter the password and  
click the OK button.  
Click the OK button to open the view.  
2.8  
Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences  
Using the preferences settings, you can:  
„
„
Change the location of the working directory in which to save files.  
Change the location of the browser used to view the online help. The  
Browser Location field is not supported/displayed for Macintosh OS X.  
„
„
Enable (default) or disable the view file auto save and load feature. Refer to  
”Exiting SANsurfer Management Suite” on page 2-12 for more information  
on the default fabric view file.  
Enable (default) or disable the use of the Initial Start Dialog at the beginning  
of a SANsurfer Switch Manager session. Refer to ”Starting SANsurfer  
Switch Manager” on page 2-9 for information about the Initial Start Dialog.  
After a default fabric view file is created, this setting has no effect.  
2-16  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences  
0
„
„
Enable (default) or disable the Event Browser. Refer to ”Displaying the  
Event Browser” on page 3-28. If the Event Browser is enabled using the  
Preferences dialog shown in Figure 2-5, the next time SANsurfer Switch  
Manager is started, all events will be displayed. If the Event Browser is  
disabled when SANsurfer Switch Manager is started and later enabled, only  
those events from the time the Event Browser was enabled and forward will  
be displayed.  
Choose the default port view when opening the faceplate display. You can  
set the faceplate to reflect the current port type (default), port speed, port  
operational state, or port transceiver media. Regardless of the default port  
view you choose, you can change the port view in the faceplate display by  
opening the View menu and selecting a different port view option. Refer to  
the corresponding subsection for more information:  
‰
‰
‰
‰
”Displaying Port Types” on page 5-2  
”Displaying Port Operational States” on page 5-3  
”Displaying Port Speeds” on page 5-3  
”Displaying Transceiver Media Status” on page 5-4  
Figure 2-5. Preferences Dialog – SANsurfer Switch Manager  
To set preferences for your SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu, and select Preferences to open the Preferences  
dialog.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Enter or browse for paths to the working directory and browser.  
In the Application-wide Options area, choose the preferences you want.  
Click the OK button to save the changes.  
59022-11 A  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using Online Help  
0
2.9  
Using Online Help  
Online help is available for the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and its  
functions. The two ways to open the online help file are: open the Help menu and  
select Help Topics, or click the Help button in the tool bar. You can also display  
context-sensitive help for all SANsurfer Switch Manager dialogs by clicking the  
Help button in the dialog.  
2.10  
Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information  
To view SANsurfer Switch Manager software version and copyright information,  
open the Help menu and select About....  
2-18  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
0
2.11  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
The SANsurfer Switch Manager application uses two basic displays to manage  
the fabric and individual switches: the topology display and the faceplate display.  
The topology display shows all switches that are able to communicate and all  
connections between switches. The faceplate display shows the front of a single  
switch and its ports. Both displays share some common elements as shown in  
Figure 2-6.  
Menu  
Bar  
Tool Bar  
Topology  
Display  
Graphic  
Window  
Fabric  
Tree  
Data  
Window  
Working Status  
Indicator  
Data Window  
Tabs  
Faceplate  
Display  
Figure 2-6. SANsurfer Switch Manager Display Elements  
59022-11 A  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
0
2.11.1  
Menu Bar  
The SANsurfer Switch Manager menus and the tasks offered in them vary  
depending on the display. For example, the Port menu and many of the Switch  
menu selections are only available in the faceplate display.  
2.11.1.1  
Topology Display Menu  
The menu options in the topology display are shown in Figure 2-7.  
Figure 2-7. Topology Display Menu  
2-20  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
0
2.11.1.2  
Faceplate Display Menu  
The menu options in the faceplate display are shown in Figure 2-8.  
Figure 2-8. Faceplate Display Menu  
The keyboard shortcut keys vary by display type: topology display and faceplate  
display. In addition to the menu bar, both the topology and faceplate displays have  
context sensitive menus that pop up when you right-click on the switches and links  
in the topology display, and on the switch image in the faceplate display. Refer to  
”Opening the Faceplate Display and Topology Popup Menus” on page 2-27 for  
more information about these popup menus.  
2.11.1.3  
Shortcut Keys  
Shortcut key combinations, available in both the topology and faceplate displays,  
provide an alternative method of accessing menu options. The shortcut key  
combinations are not case-sensitive. For example, to exit the application, press  
Alt+F, then press X.  
59022-11 A  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
0
2.11.2  
Tool Bar  
The tool bar consists of a row of graphical buttons that you can use to access  
SANsurfer Switch Manager functions as shown in Table 2-2. The tool bar buttons  
are an alternative method to using the menu bar. The tool bar can be relocated in  
the display by clicking and dragging the handle at the left edge of the tool bar.  
Table 2-2. Tool Bar Buttons  
Tool Bar Button  
Description  
Add Fabric button - adds a new fabric to the fabric view.  
Open View File button - opens an existing fabric view file.  
Save View As button - saves the current fabric view to a file.  
Refresh button - updates the topology or faceplate display with  
current information.  
Event Browser button - opens the events browser.  
Help Topics button - opens the online help file.  
Edit Zoning button - opens the Edit Zoning dialog (available only in  
faceplate display).  
Edit Security button - opens the Edit Security dialog (faceplate  
display only with SSL enabled)  
Help Topics button - opens the online help file.  
The QLogic logo opens a link to the QLogic web site.  
2-22  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
0
2.11.3  
Fabric Tree  
The fabric tree lists the managed fabrics and their switches as shown in  
Figure 2-9. The window width can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the  
moveable window border. An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree  
indicates that the entry can be expanded or collapsed. Click this handle or  
double-click the entry to expand or collapse a fabric tree entry. A fabric entry  
expands to show its member switches.  
Fabric  
Entry  
Entry Handle  
Moveable  
Window Border  
Switch  
Entries  
Figure 2-9. Fabric Tree  
Each fabric tree entry has a small icon next to it that uses color to indicate  
operational status.  
„
A green icon indicates normal operation.  
„
„
„
A yellow icon indicates that a switch is operational, but may require attention  
to maintain maximum performance.  
A red icon indicates a potential failure or non-operational state as when the  
switch is offline.  
A blue icon indicates that a switch is unknown, unreachable, or  
unmanageable.  
If the status of the fabric is not normal, the fabric icon in the fabric tree will indicate  
the reason for the abnormal status. The same message is provided when you rest  
the mouse over the fabric icon in the fabric tree.  
The fabric tree provides access to the topology and faceplate displays for any  
fabric or switch.  
„
„
To open the topology display from the fabric tree, click a fabric entry.  
To open the faceplate display from the fabric tree, click a switch entry.  
59022-11 A  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
0
2.11.4  
Graphic Window  
The graphic window, as shown in Figure 2-6, presents graphic information about  
fabrics and switches such as the fabric topology and the switch faceplate. The  
window height can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the window border that it  
shares with the data window.  
2.11.5  
Data Window and Tabs  
The data window presents a table of data and statistics associated with the  
selected tab. Use the scroll bar to browse through the data. The window length  
can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the border that it shares with the graphic  
window.  
Adjust the column width by moving the pointer over the column heading border  
shared by two columns until a right/left arrow graphic is displayed. Click and drag  
the arrow to the desired width.  
The data window tabs present options for the type of information to display in the  
data window. These options vary depending on the display.  
2.11.6  
Working Status Indicator  
The working status indicator, located in the lower right corner of the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager window, shows when the management workstation is exchanging  
information with the fabric. As conditions change, the fabric forwards this  
information to the management workstation where it is reflected in the various  
displays.  
2-24  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
0
2.12  
Using the Topology Display  
The topology display shown in Figure 2-10 receives information from the selected  
fabric and displays its topology. Switches and inter-switch links (ISLs) appear in  
the graphic window and use color to indicate status. Consider the following  
topology display features:  
„
„
„
Using the Topology Display  
Working with Switches and Links  
Topology Data Windows  
Figure 2-10. Topology Display  
2.12.1  
Switch and Link Status  
Switch icon shape and color provide information about the switch and its  
operational state. Lines represent links between switches. The topology display  
uses green to indicate normal operation, yellow to indicate operational with errors,  
red to indicate a potential failure or non-operational state, and blue to indicate  
unknown, unreachable, or unmanageable. Refer to ”Fabric Status” on page 3-27  
for more information about topology display icons.  
59022-11 A  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
0
2.12.2  
Working with Switches and Links  
Switch and link icons are selectable and moveable, and serve as access points for  
other displays and menus. You select switches and links to display information  
about them, modify their configuration, or delete them from the display.  
Context-sensitive popup menus are displayed when you right-click on a switch or  
link icon, or in the background of the topology display and graphic window.  
2.12.2.1  
Selecting Switches and Links  
Selected switch icons are highlighted in light blue. Selected ISLs are displayed as  
a heavier line. You can select switches and links in the following ways:  
„
„
„
To select a switch or a link, click the icon or link.  
To select multiple switches or links, hold down the Control key and select.  
To select all switches or links, right-click anywhere in the graphic window  
background. Select Select All Switches or Select All Links from the popup  
menu.  
To cancel a selection, press and hold the Control key, and select the item again.  
To cancel all selections, click in the graphic window background.  
2.12.2.2  
Arranging Switches in the Display  
You can arrange individual switch icons in the topology display or allow SANsurfer  
Switch Manager to arrange all switch icons for you:  
„
„
To move an individual switch icon, click and drag the icon to another location  
in the graphic window. Links stretch or contract to remain connected.  
To arrange all switch icons in the topology display automatically, open the  
View menu and select Layout Topology.  
By default, the Toggle Auto Layout box in the View menu is checked which  
causes SANsurfer Switch Manager to arrange the icons when you select Layout  
Topology.  
You can save a custom arrangement, or layout, and restore that layout during a  
SANsurfer Switch Manager session. Begin by arranging the icons, then open the  
View menu and select Remember Layout. To restore the saved layout, open the  
View menu, uncheck the Toggle Auto Layout box, and select Layout Topology.  
2-26  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
0
2.12.3  
Opening the Faceplate Display and Topology Popup Menus  
The faceplate display shows the front of a single switch and its ports. To open the  
faceplate display when viewing the topology display, click the switch entry/icon in  
the fabric tree, or double-click the switch graphic.  
The topology display also offers a fabric, switch, and a link popup menu:  
„
„
To open the fabric popup menu, right-click the graphic window background.  
The fabric popup menu presents selections to refresh the fabric, select all  
switches, select all links, or layout topology.  
To open the switch popup menu, right-click the switch icon in the graphic  
window. The switch popup menu presents selections to refresh the switch,  
delete the switch from the display, open the Switch Properties dialog, or  
open the Network Properties dialog.  
„
To open the link popup menu, right-click the link. The Link popup menu  
presents a selection to delete the link from the display.  
2.12.4  
Topology Data Windows  
The topology display provides the following data windows corresponding to the  
data window tabs:  
„
Devices – displays all devices logged with the name server and their  
addresses within the current fabric configuration, and displays information  
from the fabric and allows devices to register certain information with the  
fabric. Refer to ”Devices Data Window” on page 4-8 for more information.  
„
Active Zoneset – displays the active zone set for the fabric including zones  
and their member ports. Refer to ”Active Zone Set Data Window” on  
page 3-33 for more information about this data window. Refer to ”Zoning a  
Fabric” on page 3-37 for information about zone sets and zones.  
„
„
Switch – displays current network and switch configuration data for the  
selected switches. Refer to ”Switch Data Window” on page 4-8 for more  
information.  
Link – displays information about the inter-switch links. Refer to ”Link Data  
Window” on page 3-34 to for more information.  
59022-11 A  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
0
2.13  
Using the Faceplate Display  
The faceplate display shown in Figure 2-11 displays the switch name and  
operational state, and port status. Consider the following functional elements of  
the faceplate display:  
„
„
Port Views and Status  
Faceplate Data Windows  
Figure 2-11. Faceplate Display  
2.13.1  
Port Views and Status  
Port color and text provide information about the port and its operational state.  
Green indicates active; gray indicates inactive. The faceplate display provides the  
following views of port status corresponding to the View menu options in the  
faceplate display. Refer to ”Monitoring Port Status” on page 5-2 for more  
information about these displays.  
„
„
„
„
Port type  
Port state  
Port speed  
Port media  
2-28  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
0
2.13.2  
Working with Ports  
Ports are selectable and serve as access points for other displays and menus.  
You select ports to display information about them in the data window or to modify  
them. Context-sensitive popup menus and properties dialogs are displayed when  
you right-click the faceplate image or port icons in the faceplate display.  
2.13.2.1  
Selecting Ports  
You can select ports in the following ways. Selected ports are outlined in white.  
„
„
To select a port, click the port in the faceplate display.  
To select a range of consecutive ports, select a port, then press and hold the  
shift key and select another port. The application selects both end ports and  
all ports in between in port number sequence.  
„
„
To select several non-consecutive ports, hold the Control key while  
selecting.  
To select all ports, right-click the faceplate image in the graphic window.  
Select Select All Ports from the popup menu.  
To cancel a selection, press and hold the Control key and select it again.  
59022-11 A  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
0
2.13.2.2  
Opening the Faceplate Popup Menu  
To open the popup menu, right-click the faceplate image to present the following  
tasks.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Refresh the switch  
Select all ports  
Manage switch properties  
Manage network properties  
Manage SNMP properties  
Extended credits wizard  
Manage port properties  
Change the port symbolic name  
Run the port loopback tests  
Services  
Security Consistency Checklist  
If no ports are selected, the port-related tasks will be unavailable in the menu.  
Right-click a port to open the Port popup menu. Hold down the Shift or Control key  
to select more than one port. If multiple ports are selected, right-click one of the  
selected ports.  
2-30  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
0
2.13.3  
Faceplate Data Windows  
The faceplate display provides the following data windows corresponding to the  
data window tabs:  
„
Devices – displays information about devices (hosts and storage targets)  
connected to the switch.  
„
„
„
„
Switch – displays current switch configuration data.  
Port Statistics – displays performance data for the selected ports.  
Port Information – displays information for the selected ports.  
Configured Zonesets – displays all zone sets, zones, and zone membership  
in the zoning database.  
„
„
Configured Security – displays all security definitions currently saved in the  
database.  
Active Security – displays the active security set.  
59022-11 A  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
0
Notes  
2-32  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
Managing Fabrics  
This section describes the following tasks that manage fabrics:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
RADIUS Servers  
Securing a Fabric  
Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions  
Managing the Fabric Database  
Displaying Fabric Information  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
Zoning a Fabric  
3.1  
RADIUS Servers  
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) provides a method to  
centralize the management of authentication passwords in larger networks. It has  
a client/server model, where the server is the password repository and third party  
authentication point and the clients are all of the managed devices. RADIUS can  
be configured for devices and/or user accounts. The RADIUS server dialogs are  
available only on a secure fabric connection (SSL) and on the entry switch (out of  
band switch). Refer to ”Connection Security” on page 3-7 and ”System Services  
Dialog” on page 4-27 for more information.  
RADIUS is designed to authenticate users and devices using a  
challenge/response protocol. Basic implementations consist of a central RADIUS  
server containing a database of authorized users as well as authentication  
information. A RADIUS client wishing to verify the authenticity of a user issues a  
challenge to the user and collects the response to the challenge. This information  
is forwarded to the RADIUS server for authentication and the server responds  
with the results, either an accept or reject. The RADIUS client does not need to be  
configured with any user authentication information, this all resides on the  
RADIUS server and can be managed centrally and separately from the clients. In  
addition, no passwords are exchanged between the RADIUS server and its  
clients. Authentication of requests from a RADIUS client to the server and  
responses from the server to a client can also be authenticated. This requires  
sharing a secret between the server and client. The accounting RADIUS supports  
the auditing of the users and switch services such as Telnet, FTP, and switch  
management applications.  
59022-11 A  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
RADIUS Servers  
0
3.1.1  
Adding a RADIUS Server  
When you add a RADIUS server, you provide a method to centralize the  
management of authentication passwords over a network.  
Figure 3-1. Add Server  
To add a RADIUS server, do the following:  
1.  
Open the faceplate display, open the Switch menu, and select Radius  
Servers....  
2.  
In the Radius Server Information dialog, shown in Figure 3-1, click the Add  
Server tab.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Select the server type (Device, User, Account).  
In the IP Address field, enter the remote IP address of the server.  
In the UDP Port field, enter the remote UDP port number of the  
Authentication Radius Server. The Radius Accounting Server UDP port will  
always be the value of Device/User Authentication Server UDP Port + 1.  
6.  
In the Timeout field, enter the timeout value in seconds (minimum of 1  
second, maximum of 30 seconds). This is the number of seconds the  
RADIUS client will wait for a response from the RADIUS server before  
retrying, or giving up on a request.  
3-2  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
RADIUS Servers  
0
7.  
8.  
In the Retries field, enter the the number of retries. This is the maximum  
number of times the RADIUS client will retry a request sent to the primary  
RADIUS server.  
Select the Sign Packet check box to enable the switch to include a digital  
signature (Message-Authenticator) in all RADIUS access request packets  
sent to the RADIUS server. A valid Message-Authenticator attribute will be  
required in all RADIUS server responses.  
9.  
In the Secret field, enter the server secret. A secret is required for all  
RADIUS servers. The secret is used when generating and checking the  
Message-Authenticator attribute.  
10. Click the Add Server button to add the server, and click the Close button to  
exit the dialog.  
11. Click the Modify Authentication Order tab, and verify that Device  
Authentication Order and User Authentication Order options are set to either  
Radius or Radius Local for Radius Authentication to be implemented.  
59022-11 A  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 – Managing Fabrics  
RADIUS Servers  
0
3.1.2  
Removing a RADIUS Server  
When you remove a RADIUS server, you disable the management of  
authentication usernames and passwords over the network for that server.  
Figure 3-2. Remove Server  
To remove a RADIUS server, do the following:  
1.  
Open the faceplate display, open the Switch menu, and select Radius  
Servers....  
2.  
In the Radius Server Information dialog, shown in Figure 3-2, click the  
Remove Server tab.  
3.  
4.  
In server list at the top of the dialog, select the server to be removed.  
Click the Remove Server button to remove the server, and click the Close  
button to exit the dialog.  
3-4  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
RADIUS Servers  
0
3.1.3  
Editing RADIUS Server Information  
Editing information of a RADIUS server involves changing the configuration of a  
RADIUS server.  
Figure 3-3. Edit Radius Server Information  
To edit information of a RADIUS server, do the following:  
1.  
Open the faceplate display, open the Switch menu, and select Radius  
Servers....  
2.  
In the Radius Server Information dialog, shown in Figure 3-3, click the Edit  
Server tab.  
3.  
4.  
In server list at the top of the dialog, select the server to be edited.  
Make changes to the IP Address, UDP Port, Timeout, Retries, and Secret  
fields.  
5.  
6.  
Select or unselect the server type (Device, User, Account) and Sign Packet  
check boxes.  
Click the Edit Server button to save the changes, and click the Close button  
to exit the dialog.  
59022-11 A  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
RADIUS Servers  
0
3.1.4  
Modifying Authentication Order RADIUS Server Information  
Editing information of a RADIUS server involves changing the configuration of a  
RADIUS server.  
Figure 3-4. Modify Authentication Order - Radius Server Information  
To modify the authentication order information of a RADIUS server, do the  
following:  
1.  
Open the faceplate display, open the Switch menu, and select Radius  
Servers....  
2.  
In the Radius Server Information dialog, shown in Figure 3-4, click the  
Modify Authentication Order tab.  
3.  
4.  
In server list at the top of the dialog, select the server to be modified.  
Make changes to the Device Authentication Order or User Authentication  
Order pull-down menus. Select Local, Radius, or Radius Local.  
5.  
Click the Modify Order button to save the changes, and click the Close  
button to exit the dialog.  
3-6  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2  
Securing a Fabric  
Fabric security consists of the following:  
„
„
„
„
„
Connection Security  
User Account Security  
Security Consistency Checklist  
Device Security  
Fabric Services  
3.2.1  
Connection Security  
Connection security provides an encrypted data path for switch management  
methods. The switch supports the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol for the command  
line interface and the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol for management  
applications such as SANsurfer Switch Manager and Common Information  
Module (CIM).  
The SSL handshake process between the workstation and the switch involves the  
exchanging of certificates. These certificates contain the public and private keys  
that define the encryption. The switch certificate is valid for one year beginning  
with its creation date and time. The workstation validates the switch certificate by  
comparing the workstation date and time to the switch certificate creation date and  
time. For this reason, it is important to snychronize the workstation and switch with  
the same date, time, and time zone. If a certificate has not been created by the  
user, the switch will automatically create one.  
Consider your requirements for connection security: for the command line  
interface (SSH), management applications such as SANsurfer Switch Manager  
(SSL), or both. If SSL connection security is required, also consider using the  
Network Time Protocol (NTP) to synchronize workstations and switches.  
59022-11 A  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.2  
User Account Security  
User account security is the process by which your user account and password  
are authenticated with the list of valid user accounts and passwords. The switch  
validates your account and password when you attempt to add a fabric using  
SANsurfer Switch Manager or log in to a switch through Telnet. Your system  
administrator defines accounts, passwords, and authority levels that are stored on  
the switch. Refer to ”Managing User Accounts” on page 4-2 for more information.  
The Admin account possesses Admin authority which grants full access to all  
tasks of the SANsurfer Switch Manager menu system. The switch validates your  
user account and SANsurfer Switch Manager grants access to its menus  
according to your authority level. If you do not have Admin authority, you are  
limited to monitoring tasks.  
Note:  
If a user is logged into a switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager or  
CLI, and an administrator changes user access rights and passwords,  
existing logins will not be affected by the new settings. Login access  
and privileges are only checked for a new login request.  
3.2.3  
Security Consistency Checklist  
The Security Consistency Checklist dialog enables you to compare  
security-related features on switches to check for inconsistencies. Any changes  
must be made through the appropriate dialog, such as Network Properties dialog,  
Switch Properties dialog, or SNMP Properties dialog. To open the Security  
Consistency Checklist dialog, open the Switch menu and select Security  
Consistency Checklist.  
3-8  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.4  
Device Security  
Device security provides for the authorization and authentication of devices that  
you attach to a switch. You can configure a switch with a group of devices against  
which the switch authorizes new attachments by devices, other switches, or  
devices issuing management server commands. Device security is configured  
through the use of security sets and groups. A group is a list of device worldwide  
names that are authorized to attach to a switch. There are three types of groups:  
one for other switches (ISL), another for devices (port), and a third for devices  
issuing management server commands (MS). A security set is a set of up to three  
groups with no more than one of each group type. The security configuration is  
made up of all security sets on the switch.  
In addition to authorization, the switch can be configured to require authentication  
to validate the identity of the connecting switch, device, or host. Authentication  
can be performed locally using the switch security database, or remotely using a  
Remote Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server. With a RADIUS server, the  
security database for the entire fabric resides on the server. In this way, the  
security database can be managed centrally, rather than on each switch. You can  
configure up to five RADIUS servers to provide failover.  
You can configure the RADIUS server to authenticate just the switch or both the  
switch and the initiator device if the device supports authentication. When using a  
RADIUS server, every switch in the fabric must have a network connection. A  
RADIUS server can also be configured to authenticate user accounts.  
Consider the devices, switches, and management agents and evaluate the need  
for authorization and authentication. Also consider whether the security database  
is to distributed on the switches or centralized on a RADIUS server and how many  
servers to configure.  
Managing device security involves the following tasks:  
„
„
„
„
„
Creating security sets, groups, and members  
Editing a security configuration on a switch  
Viewing properties of a security set, group, or member  
Archiving a security configuration on a switch to a file  
Activating and deactivating a security set  
The security database is made up of all security sets on the switch. The security  
database has the following limits:  
„
„
„
„
Maximum number of security sets is 4.  
Maximum number of groups is 1000.  
Maximum number of members in a group is 1000.  
Maximum total number of group members is 1000.  
59022-11 A  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.4.1  
Edit Security Dialog  
The Edit Security dialog, shown in Figure 3-5 opens after clicking the Security  
button on the toolbar or selecting Edit Security from the Security menu. The  
Security dialogs are available only on a secure (SSL) fabric and on the entry  
switch (out of band switch). The primary use of the Edit Security dialog is to edit  
the security configuration on the switch. You can also open and edit a security  
configuration saved to a file. Editing security files consists of renaming and  
removing security sets, groups, and members.  
Use the Edit menu options or popup menu options to access Edit Security dialog  
options. Select a security item in the graphic window and select an option in the  
Edit menu, or right-click on a security item in the graphic window, and select an  
option from the popup menus.  
The orphan security set contains the security groups and members that don't  
belong to a user-defined security set. Excluding the orphan security set, you can  
only have 1 group type in a security set. The three types of security groups are:  
„
„
„
ISL - default (E_Port authentication)  
MS (Management Server CT authentication)  
Port (F_Port authentication)  
Figure 3-5. Edit Security Dialog  
3-10  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
Use the File menu to:  
„
„
„
Edit the security configuration on the switch.  
Open or edit security files.  
Save or rename security files  
Use the Edit menu to:  
„
„
Create security sets, security groups, and security group members  
Rename or remove a security group from a security set or a member from a  
security group  
„
„
„
Remove a group from all security sets  
Remove all security sets, groups, or members  
View properties for the selected security set, group, or group  
memberCreating a Security SetCreating a Security Set  
3.2.4.2  
Creating a Security Set  
There is a maximum of 4 security sets. To add a security set, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
On the faceplate display, click the Security button on the toolbar, or open  
the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog.  
Choose one of the following methods to open the Create a Security Set  
dialog:  
„
„
Click the Security Set button in the toolbar.  
Right-click in the graphic window, and select New Security Set from  
the popup menu.  
3.  
4.  
Enter a security set name. The naming conventions for security sets are:  
„
„
„
Must start with a letter  
All alphanumeric chars [aA- zZ] [0-9]  
The symbols $ _ - and ^ are the only symbols allowed  
Click the OK button to save the change.  
59022-11 A  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.4.3  
Create Security Group Dialog  
Use the Create Security Group dialog, shown in Figure 3-6, to add a security  
group to a security set. The Create Security Group dialog is displayed after  
clicking the Security Group button on the toolbar, or after you right-click on a  
security set in the graphic window and select Create a Security Group from the  
popup menu.  
Figure 3-6. Create Security Group Dialog  
The naming conventions for all security groups are listed below.  
„
„
„
Must start with a letter  
All alphanumeric chars [aA- zZ] [0-9]  
The symbols $ _ - and ^ are the only symbols allowed  
3-12  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.4.4  
Creating a Security Group  
An empty (no members) security group in the active security set will prevent all  
connections for that security group type. For example, an empty ISL security  
group will cause the switch to refuse all logins from other switches. To add a  
security group to a security set, do the following:  
1.  
On the faceplate display, click the Security button on the toolbar, or open  
the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog.  
2.  
Choose one of the following methods to open the Create a Security Group  
dialog:  
„
In the graphic window, click a security set and click the Security  
Group button in the toolbar.  
„
Right-click on a security set and select Create a Security Group from  
the popup menu.  
3.  
4.  
Enter a security group name and select a security group type (ISL, Port, or  
MS). Remember, only one security group type (1 ISL, 1 Port, 1 MS) in each  
security set is allowed. The naming conventions for security groups are:  
„
„
„
Must start with a letter  
All alphanumeric chars [aA- zZ] [0-9]  
The symbols $ _ - and ^ are the only symbols allowed  
Click the OK button to save the change.  
59022-11 A  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.4.5  
Create Security Group Member Dialog  
Use the Create Security Group Member dialog, shown in Figure 3-7, to add a  
member to a security group. Choose options from the Group Member (or  
manually type in a hex value) and Authentication pull-down menus, and enter  
values in the Secret and Binding (ISL groups only) fields.  
Figure 3-7. Create a Security Group Member Dialog  
The conventions for ISL security group members are listed below:  
„
You can enter member world-wide name (WWN), which must be 16 hex  
characters, or 23 characters with valid WWN format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
„
„
The authentication choices are None and Chap.  
The Secret field is disabled if authentication is set to None. If authentication  
is Chap, the Secret field is enabled.  
„
„
The Generate button is only enabled when authentication is set to Chap.  
Valid binding entries are between 0 to 239.  
The conventions for Port security group members are listed below:  
„
You can enter member world-wide name (WWN), which must be 16 hex  
characters, or 23 characters with valid WWN format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
„
„
The authentication choices are None and Chap.  
The Secret field is disabled if authentication is set to None. If authentication  
is Chap, the Secret field is enabled.  
„
The Generate button is only enabled when authentication is set to Chap.  
3-14  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
The conventions for MS security group members are listed below:  
„
„
„
You can enter member world-wide name (WWN), which must be 16 hex  
characters, or 23 characters with valid WWN format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
The CT (common transport) authentication choices are None, MD5, and  
SHA-1.  
The Secret field is disabled if authentication is set to None, otherwise the  
Secret field enabled.  
„
„
The Generate button is only enabled when authentication is Chap.  
Secret is 16 byte length for MD5 authentication, and 20 bytes if  
authentication is SHA-1.  
3.2.4.6  
Creating a Security Group Member  
To add a member to a security group, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
On the faceplate display, click the Security button on the toolbar, or open  
the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog.  
Choose one of the following methods to open the Create a Security Group  
Member dialog:  
„
In the graphic window, click a security group and click the Security  
Member button in the toolbar.  
„
Right-click on a security group and select Create Members from the  
popup menu.  
3.  
4.  
Open the Group Member pull-down menu and select a Node World-Wide  
Name. The switch must be a member of any group in which authentication is  
used. You can also type in a hex value.  
Open the Authentication pull-down menu, and select a type of protocol to be  
used for the authentication process for that member.  
„
„
ISL authentication options are None (0 bytes), Chap (16 bytes)  
MS (CT - Common Transport) authentication options are None (0  
bytes), MD5 (16 bytes), SHA (20 bytes)  
„
Port authentication options are None (0 bytes), Chap (16 bytes)  
5.  
6.  
In the Secret area, enter an authentication "password" to be assigned that  
member. Or, you can click the Generate Secret button to randomly  
generate a secret.  
In the Binding field (ISL groups only), enter the domain ID (1-239) for the  
switch for the ISL group member. The WWN of the switch must be at the  
entered domain ID when attempting to enter the fabric, otherwise it will  
become isolated.  
7.  
Click the OK button to save the changes.  
59022-11 A  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.4.7  
Editing the Security Configuration on a Switch  
To edit a security configuration on the switch, do the following:  
1.  
On the faceplate display, click the Security button on the toolbar, or open  
the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog.  
By default, the security configuration on the switch is displayed in the Edit  
Security dialog. To edit a security configuration saved to a file, open the File  
menu and select Open File, or press Ctrl+o (letter o) to open the Open  
dialog. Browse for and select the security file, and click the Open button to  
display the security file in the Edit Security dialog.  
2.  
Select the security item to edit in the graphic window, and choose one of the  
following:  
„
Rename a Security Set, or Group. Open the Edit menu and select a  
Rename option. In the Rename dialog, enter a new name and click the  
OK button to save the changes.  
„
Edit Security Group Member. Open the Edit menu and select a Edit  
Security Group Member option. In the Edit Security Group Member  
dialog, enter a new Group Member (WWN), choose an option in the  
Authentication pull-down menu, and click the OK button to save the  
changes.  
„
„
Remove a Security Set, Group, or Member. Select the item to  
remove, open the Edit menu and select a Remove option. In the  
Remove dialog, click the OK button to remove that item from the  
security file and save the changes.  
Clear Security. Select the Security Sets directory name, open the Edit  
menu and select Clear Security. In the Remove dialog, click the OK  
button to remove all security sets and save the changes. You can also  
right-click on the Security Sets (top level) directory name, and select  
Clear Security from the popup menu, and click the OK button to  
remove all security sets.  
3.  
4.  
Click the Apply button to save the changes and keep the Edit Security  
dialog open. To save changes and close the Edit Security dialog in one step,  
click the OK button.  
Click the OK button to close the Edit Security dialog.  
3-16  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.4.8  
Viewing Properties of a Security Set, Group, or Member  
To view the properties of a security set, group, or member, do the following:  
1.  
On the faceplate display and click the Security button on the toolbar, or  
open the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security  
dialog.  
2.  
Choose one of the following:  
„
Select a security set, group, or member, open the Edit menu and select  
Properties.  
„
In the graphic window, right-click on the security item, and select  
Properties from the popup menu.  
3.  
View the security information for the selected item in the Properties dialog.  
3.2.4.9  
Using the Security Config Dialog  
Use the Security Config dialog, shown in Figure 3-8, to save the active security  
configuration on the switch to non-volatile or to temporary memory, and to require  
the domain ID of a switch be validated before attaching to the fabric.  
Figure 3-8. Security Config Dialog  
To configure security on the switch, do the following:  
1.  
On the faceplate display, open the Security menu and select Edit Security  
Config to open the Security Config dialog.  
2.  
Check the Auto Save check box to enable (default) or disable Auto Save  
mode. If enabled, the security configuration is saved to non-volatile memory  
on the switch. If disabled, the security file is saved only to temporary  
memory. The Auto Save feature is used when Fabric Binding is enabled.  
When Auto Save is disabled, any updates from remote switches will not be  
saved locally. If the local switch is reset, it may isolate.  
3.  
Check the Fabric Binding Enabled check box to require the expected  
domain ID of a switch is verified before being allowed to attach to the fabric.  
59022-11 A  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
Note:  
The fabric binding feature must be enabled on all switches in the  
fabric. When enabling this feature, it is best to set the switch state to  
offline, enable the fabric binding feature on all switches, and then set  
the switch state to online.  
4.  
5.  
Click the Apply button to save the settings.  
Click the OK button to close the Security Config dialog.  
3.2.4.10  
Archiving a Security Configuration to a File  
To archive (save) a security configuration to a file, do the following:  
1.  
On the faceplate display, click the Security button on the toolbar, or open  
the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Configure the security settings as desired.  
Open the File menu and select Save As.  
In the Save dialog, enter a name and location for the security file (.xml  
extension).  
5.  
Click the Save button to save the security file.  
3.2.4.11  
Activating a Security Set  
Only one security set can be active at one time. To activate a security set, do the  
following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
On the faceplate display, open the Security menu and select Activate  
Security Set to open the Activate Security Set dialog.  
In the Activate Security Set dialog, select a security set from the pull-down  
menu.  
Click the Activate button to activate the security set.  
3.2.4.12  
Deactivating a Security Set  
Only one security set can be active at one time. To deactivate an active security  
set, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, open the Security menu and select Deactivate  
Security Set.  
In the Deactivate dialog, click the Yes button to confirm that you want to  
deactivate the active security set.  
3-18  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Securing a Fabric  
0
3.2.4.13  
Configured Security Data Window  
The Configured Security data window displays a graphical representation of all  
security sets, groups, and members in the database. To open the Configured  
Security data window, click the Configured Security tab below the data window  
in the faceplate display.  
3.2.4.14  
Active Security Data Window  
The Active Security data window displays a graphical representation of the active  
security set, its groups, and members in the database. To open the Active Security  
data window, click the Active Security tab below the data window in the faceplate  
display.  
3.2.5  
Fabric Services  
Fabric services security includes SNMP and in-band management. Simple  
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the protocol governing network  
management and monitoring of network devices. SNMP security consists of a  
read community string and a write community string, that are basically the  
passwords that control read and write access to the switch. The read community  
string ("public") and write community string ("private") are set at the factory to  
these well-known defaults and should be changed if SNMP is enabled using the  
System Servieces or SNMP Properties dialogs. If SNMP is enabled (default) and  
the read and write community strings have not been changed from their defaults,  
you risk unwanted access to the switch. Refer to ”Enabling SNMP Configuration”  
on page 3-19 for more information. SNMP is enabled by default.  
In-band management is the ability to manage switches across inter-switch links  
using SANsurfer Switch Manager, SNMP, management server, or the application  
programming interface. The switch comes from the factory with in-band  
management enabled. If you disable in-band management on a particular switch,  
you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct  
Ethernet or serial connection. Refer to ”Enabling In-band Management” on  
page 3-20 for more information.  
3.2.5.1  
Enabling SNMP Configuration  
To enable SNMP configuration, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
On the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select SNMP  
Properties to open the SNMP Properties dialog.  
In the SNMP Configuration area, place a check mark in the SNMP Enabled  
check box.  
Click the OK button to save the change to the database.  
59022-11 A  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions  
0
3.2.5.2  
Enabling In-band Management  
To enable In-band Management, do the following:  
1.  
On the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Switch  
Properties to open the Switch Properties dialog.  
2.  
3.  
Click the In-band Management Enable button.  
Click the OK button to save the change to the database.  
3.3  
Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions  
The Fabric Tracker option enables you to generate a snapshot or baseline of  
current system version information, which can be viewed, analyzed and compared  
to other snapshot files, and exported to a file. Information includes date and time,  
switch manager version, switch active firmware version, device hardware, drivers,  
and firmware version from FDMI.  
The Snapshot Analyzer option enables you to:  
„
„
„
Compare two snapshots  
Detect mismatches of firmware and driver versions  
Detect devices that have been moved, added to or removed from the fabric.  
3.3.1  
Saving a Version Snapshot  
To save the current snapshot to an XML file, open the Fabric menu, select Fabric  
Tracker, and select Save Snapshot. To view and analyze system version  
information, open the Fabric menu, select Fabric Tracker, and select Analyze  
Snapshot. The Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis dialog, shown in Figure 3-9,  
opens with the Summary, Differences and Reports tab pages. Click the Browse  
buttons to open and view the snapshot files in the corresponding tab pages. Click  
the Close button to exit the Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis dialog. The color  
key below the scrollable area defines the meanings of the colors used.  
The Summary tab page shows a brief description of the changes that have  
occurred between the older snapshot and the newer one. Use the Summary tab  
page quickly view what has changed.  
3-20  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions  
0
3.3.2  
Viewing and Comparing Version Snapshots  
The Differences tab page shows a side-by-side comparison of two snapshots. The  
timestamp of each snapshot is displayed above the scroll area showing that  
snapshot. The background color of the older snapshot is darker than the  
background of the newer snapshot. The arrow icon between the snapshot  
selectors always points from the older snapshot to the newer one. If the two  
snapshots have the same timestamp, the arrow will not be displayed. The scroll  
bars are synchronized to view the same portion of each snapshot file  
simultaneously. Click and drag the separator bar between the two panes to resize  
each pane. At the top of the separator bar between the two panes, click the  
left/right arrows to close the corresponding pane. The left/right arrows move to  
one side.  
3.3.3  
Exporting Version Snapshots to a File  
The Reports tab page enables you to select one of several reports to save to a  
text file. The are two types of reports. The Summary report type shows the same  
format displayed on the Summary tab page without the color highlighting. The  
Detail report type shows a detailed breakdown of the differences. Use the Export  
button to save the selected report to a text file.  
Figure 3-9. Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis Dialog  
59022-11 A  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
0
3.4  
Managing the Fabric Database  
A fabric database contains the set of fabrics that you have added during a  
SANsurfer Switch Manager session. Initially, if you do not open an existing fabric  
or fabric view file, the SANsurfer Switch Manager application opens with an empty  
fabric database.  
3.4.1  
Adding a Fabric  
To add a fabric to the database, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Add Fabric to open the Add a New Fabric  
dialog shown in Figure 3-10.  
Figure 3-10. Add a New Fabric Dialog  
2.  
3.  
Enter a fabric name (optional) and the IP address of the switch through  
which to manage the fabric.  
Enter an account name and password. The factory login name and  
password are "admin" and "password". The password is for the switch and is  
stored in the switch firmware. Refer to ”Managing User Accounts” on  
page 4-2 or the ”User Command” on page A-120 for information about  
creating user accounts.  
3-22  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
0
Note:  
A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions  
reserved as follows:  
„ 4 logins or sessions for internal applications such as  
management server and SNMP  
„ 9 high priority Telnet sessions  
„ 6 logins or sessions for SANsurfer Switch Manager inband  
and out-of-band logins, Application Programming Interface  
(API) inband and out-of-band logins, and Telnet logins.  
Additional logins will be refused.  
4.  
Click the Add Fabric button.  
Note: If the entry switch has SSL (Secure Socket Layer) enabled, the  
switch will generate and display a Verify Certificate dialog that  
you must accept before gaining access to the fabric. Refer to  
”Connection Security” on page 3-7 and for more information on  
certificates and SSL.  
3.4.2  
Removing a Fabric  
To delete a fabric from the database, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select a fabric in the fabric tree.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Remove Fabric.  
3.4.3  
Opening a Fabric View File  
A fabric view file is one or more fabrics saved to a file. To open an existing view  
file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Open View File, or click the Open button. If  
the fabric you are currently viewing has changed, you will be prompted to  
save the changes to the fabric view file with the Save View dialog before  
opening a different view file.  
2.  
3.  
In the Open View dialog, enter the name of the file to open, and enter a file  
password, if a password was entered when this fabric view file was saved.  
Click the OK button.  
59022-11 A  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
0
3.4.4  
Saving a Fabric View File  
To save a fabric view file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Open the File menu, and select Save View As.  
In the Save View dialog, enter a new file name.  
Enter a file password, if necessary.  
Click the OK button.  
3.4.5  
Rediscovering a Fabric  
After making changes to or deleting switches from a fabric view, it may be helpful  
to again view the actual fabric configuration. The rediscover fabric option clears  
out the current fabric information being displayed, and rediscovers all switch  
information. To rediscover a fabric, open the Fabric menu, and select Rediscover  
Fabric. The rediscover function is more comprehensive than the refresh function.  
3.4.6  
Adding a New Switch to a Fabric  
If there are no special conditions to be configured for the new switch, simply plug  
in the switch and the switch becomes functional with the default fabric  
configuration. The default fabric configuration settings are:  
„
„
„
Fabric zoning is sent to the switch from the fabric.  
All ports will be GL_Ports.  
The default IP address 10.0.0.1 is assigned to the switch without a gateway  
or boot protocol configured (RARP, BOOTP, and DHCP).  
If you are adding a switch to a fabric and do not want to accept the default fabric  
configuration, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
If the switch is not new from the factory, reset the switch to the factory  
configuration before adding the switch to the fabric by selecting Restore  
Factory Defaults in the Switch menu from the faceplate display.  
If you want to manage the switch through the Ethernet port, you must first  
configure the IP address using the Network Properties dialog or the  
Configuration Wizard.  
Configure any special switch settings. Consider configuring the Default  
Visibility setting to None in the Zoning Config dialog to prevent devices from  
finding other devices on all switches in the fabric until the new switch is  
configured. To open the Zoning Config dialog, open the Zoning menu, and  
select Edit Zoning Config.  
4.  
Plug in the inter-switch links (ISL), but do not connect the devices.  
3-24  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
0
5.  
Configure the port types for the new switch using the Port Properties dialog.  
The ports can be G_Port, GL_Port, F_Port, FL_Port, or Donor.  
6.  
7.  
Connect the devices to the switch.  
Make any necessary zoning changes using the Edit Zoning dialog. To open  
the Edit Zoning dialog, open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning. If  
you changed the Default Visibility setting in the Zoning Config dialog from All  
to None, change that setting back to All. To open the Zoning Config dialog,  
open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning Config.  
3.4.7  
Replacing a Failed Switch  
The archive/restore works for all switches. However, the Restore menu item is not  
available for the in-band switches. You can only restore a switch out-of-band (the  
fabric management switch). There are certain parameters that are not archived,  
and these are not restored by SANsurfer Switch Manager. Refer to ”Archiving a  
Switch” on page 4-35 and ”Restoring a Switch” on page 4-36 for information about  
archive and restore. Use the following procedure to replace a failed switch for  
which an archive is available.  
1.  
At the failed switch:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
Turn off the power and disconnect the AC cords.  
Note port locations and remove the interconnection cables and SFPs.  
Remove the failed switch.  
2.  
At the replacement switch:  
a.  
b.  
Mount the switch in the location where the failed switch was removed.  
Install the SFPs using the same ports as were used on the failed  
switch.  
CAUTION!  
Do not reconnect inter-switch links, target devices, and  
initiator devices at this time. Doing so could invalidate  
the fabric zoning configuration.  
c.  
Attach the AC cords and power up the switch.  
3.  
Select the failed switch in the topology display. Open the Switch menu and  
select Delete.  
59022-11 A  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
0
4.  
Restore the configuration from the failed switch to the replacement switch:  
a.  
b.  
Open a new fabric through the replacement switch.  
Open the faceplate display for the replacement switch. Open the  
Switch menu and select Restore.  
c.  
d.  
In the Restore dialog, enter the archive file from the failed switch or  
browse for the file.  
Click the Restore button.  
5.  
6.  
Reset the replacement switch to activate the configuration formerly  
possessed by the failed switch including the domain ID and the zoning  
database. Open the Switch menu and select Reset Switch.  
Reconnect the inter-switch links, target devices, and initiator devices to the  
replacement switch using the same ports as were used on the failed switch.  
3.4.8  
Deleting Switches and Links  
The SANsurfer Switch Manager application does not automatically delete  
switches or links that have failed or have been physically removed from the fabric  
Fibre Channel network. In these cases, you can delete switches and links to bring  
the display up to date. If you delete a switch or a link that is still active, the  
SANsurfer Switch Manager application will restore it automatically. You can also  
refresh the display. To delete a switch from the topology display, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more switches in the topology display.  
Open the Switch menu and select Delete.  
To delete a link, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more links in the topology display.  
Open the Switch menu and select Delete.  
3.5  
Displaying Fabric Information  
The topology display is your primary tool for monitoring a fabric. The graphic  
window of the topology display provides status information for switches,  
inter-switch links, and the Ethernet connection to the management workstation.  
The data window tabs show name server, switch, and active zone set information.  
The Active Zoneset tab shows the zone definitions for the active zone set. Refer  
to ”Devices Data Window” on page 4-8 and ”Switch Data Window” on page 4-8 for  
information about the Name Server and Switch data windows.  
3-26  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
0
3.5.1  
Fabric Status  
The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in  
status to the management workstation as they occur. You can allow the fabric to  
update the display status, or you can refresh the display at any time. To refresh  
the topology display, do one of the following:  
„
„
„
„
Click the Refresh button.  
Open the View menu and select Refresh.  
Press the F5 key.  
Right-click anywhere in the background of the topology display and select  
Refresh Fabric from the popup menu.  
The topology display uses switch and status icons to provide status information  
about switches, inter-switch links, and the Ethernet connection. The switch status  
icons, displayed on the left side of a switch, vary in shape and color. Switches  
controlled by an Ethernet Internet Protocol have a colored Ethernet icon displayed  
on the right side of the switch. A green Ethernet icon indicates normal operation,  
yellow indicates a condition that may require attention to maintain maximum  
performance, and red indicates a potential failure. Table 3-1 shows the different  
switch icons and their meanings.  
Table 3-1. Topology Display Switch and Status Icons  
Switch Icon  
Description  
SANbox2-16 Switch  
„ Normal operation (Green)  
„ Warning–operational with errors (Yellow)  
„ Critical–potential failure (Red)  
„ Unknown–communication status unknown,  
unreachable, or unmanageable (Blue)  
Fabric Management Switch  
„ Ethernet connection normal (Green)  
„ Ethernet connection warning (Yellow)  
„ Ethernet connection critical (Red)  
SANbox2-8c Switch  
Switch is not manageable with this version of SANsurfer  
Switch Manager. Use the management application that  
was shipped with this switch.  
59022-11 A  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
0
3.5.2  
Displaying the Event Browser  
The Event Browser displays a list of events generated by the switches in the fabric  
and the SANsurfer Switch Manager application. Events that are generated by the  
SANsurfer Switch Manager application are not saved on the switch, but can be  
saved to a file during the SANsurfer Switch Manager session.  
Entries in the Event Browser shown in Figure 3-11, are formatted by severity, time  
stamp, source, type, and description. The maximum number of entries allowed in  
the Event Browser is 10,000. The maximum number of entries allowed on a switch  
is 1200. Once the maximum is reached, the event list wraps and the oldest events  
are discarded and replaced with the new events. Event entries from the switch,  
use the switch time stamp, while event entries generated by the application have  
a workstation time stamp. You can filter, sort, and export the contents of the Event  
Browser to a file. The Event Browser begins recording when enabled and  
SANsurfer Switch Manager is running.  
If the Event Browser is enabled using the Preferences dialog, the next time  
SANsurfer Switch Manager is started all events from the switch log will be  
displayed. If the Event Browser is disabled when SANsurfer Switch Manager is  
started and later enabled, only those events from the time the Event Browser was  
enabled and forward will be displayed.  
To display the Event Browser, open the Fabric menu and select Show Event  
Browser, or click the Events button on the tool bar. If the Show Event Browser  
selection or the Events button is grayed-out, you must first enable the Events  
Browser preference. Refer to ”Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences”  
on page 2-16.  
Column Sorting  
Buttons  
Severity  
Column  
Figure 3-11. Events Browser  
3-28  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
0
Severity is indicated in the severity column using icons as described in Table 3-2.  
Table 3-2. Severity Levels  
Severity  
Description  
Icon  
Alarm – An Alarm is a "serviceable event". This means that attention by  
the user or field service is required. Alarms are posted asynchronously  
to the screen and cannot be turned off. If the alarm denotes that a  
system error has occurred the customer and/or field representative will  
generally be directed to provide a "show support" capture of the switch.  
Critical event – An event that indicates a potential failure. Critical log  
messages are events that warrant notice by the user. By default, these  
log messages will be posted to the screen. Critical log messages do not  
have alarm status as they require no immediate attention from a user or  
service representative.  
Warning event – An event that indicates errors or other conditions that  
may require attention to maintain maximum performance. Warning  
messages will not be posted to the screen unless the log is configured  
to do so. Warning messages are not disruptive and, therefore, do not  
meet the criteria of Critical. The user need not be informed  
asynchronously  
No icon  
Informative – An unclassified event that provides supporting  
information.  
Note:  
„ Events (Alarms, Critical, Warning, and Informative) generated by  
the application are not saved on the switch. They are permanently  
discarded when you close a SANsurfer Switch Manager session,  
but you can save these events to a file on the workstation before  
you close SANsurfer Switch Manager and read it later with a text  
editor or browser.  
„ Events generated by the switch are stored on switch, and will be  
retrieved when the application is restarted. Some alarms are  
configurable. Refer to ”Configuring Port Threshold Alarms” on  
page 4-15.  
59022-11 A  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
0
3.5.2.1  
Filtering the Event Browser  
Filtering the Event Browser enables you to display only those events that are of  
interest based on the event severity, timestamp, source, type, and description. To  
filter the Event Browser, open the Filter menu and select Filter Entries. This  
opens the Filter Events dialog shown in Figure 3-12. The Event Browser displays  
those events that meet all of the criteria in the Filter Events dialog. If the filtering  
criteria is cleared or changed, then all the events that were previously hidden that  
satisfy the new criteria will be shown.  
You can filter the event browser in the following ways:  
„
Severity – Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes to display  
alarm events, critical events, warning events, or informative events.  
„
Date/Time – Check one or both of the From: and To: check boxes. Enter the  
bounding timestamps (MM/dd/yy hh:mm:ss aa) to display only those events  
that fall within those times. ("aa" indicates AM or PM.) The current year (yy)  
can be entered as either 2 or 4 digits. For example, 12/12/03 will be  
interpreted December 12, 2003.  
„
Text – Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes and enter a text  
string (case sensitive) for event source, type, and description. The Event  
Browser displays only those events that satisfy all of the search  
specifications for the Source, Type, and Description text.  
Figure 3-12. Filter Events Dialog  
3-30  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
0
3.5.2.2  
Sorting the Event Browser  
Sorting the Event Browser enables you to display the events in alphanumeric  
order based on the event severity, timestamp, source, type, or description. Initially,  
the Event Browser is sorted in ascending order by timestamp. To sort the Event  
Browser, click the Severity, Timestamp, Source, Type, or Description column  
buttons. You can also open the Sort menu and select By Severity, By  
Timestamp, By Source, By Type, or By Description. Successive sort  
operations of the same type alternate between ascending and descending order.  
3.5.2.3  
Saving the Event Browser to a File  
You can save the displayed Event Browser entries to a file. Filtering affects the  
save operation, because only displayed events are saved. To save the Event  
Browser to a file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Filter and sort the Event Browser to obtain the desired display.  
Open the File menu and select Save As.  
Select a folder and enter a file name in which to save the event log and click  
the Save button. The file can be saved in XML, CSV, or text format. XML  
files can be opened with an internet browser or text editor. CSV files can be  
opened with most spreadsheet applications.  
59022-11 A  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
0
3.5.3  
Devices Data Window  
The Devices data window displays information about the devices that are logged  
into the fabric. Click the Devices tab below the data window to display device  
information for all devices that are logged into the selected fabric. To narrow the  
display to devices that are logged into specific switches, select one or more  
switches in the fabric tree or the topology display. Table 3-3 describes the entries  
in the Devices data window. Refer to ”Exporting Device Information to a File” on  
page 3-35 for exporting device information.  
Table 3-3. Devices Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Port WWN  
Description  
Port world wide name  
Nickname  
Device port nickname. To create a new nickname or edit an  
existing nickname, double-click the cell and enter a nickname  
in the Edit Nickname dialog. Refer to ”Managing Device Port  
Nicknames” on page 3-35 for more information.  
Details  
Click the (i) to display additional detail about the device. Refer  
to ”Displaying Detailed Device Information” on page 3-34.  
FC Address  
Switch  
Fibre Channel address  
Switch name  
Port  
Switch port number  
Target/Initiator  
Vendor  
Device type: target or initiator  
Host Bus Adapter/Device Vendor  
Name of host  
Host Name  
Active Zones  
Row #  
The active zone to which the device belongs  
Number of port as displayed in the faceplate display  
3-32  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
0
3.5.4  
Active Zone Set Data Window  
The Active Zoneset data window displays the zone membership for the active  
zone set that resides on the fabric management switch. The active zone set is the  
same on all switches in the fabric – you can confirm this by adding a fabric  
through another switch and comparing Active Zone Set displays.  
To open the Active Zoneset data window, click the Active Zoneset tab below the  
data window in the topology display. Refer to ”Configured and Active Zonesets  
Data Window” on page 4-14 for information about the zone set definitions on a  
particular switch. Refer to ”Zoning a Fabric” on page 3-37 for more information  
about zone sets and zones.  
The Active Zoneset data window, shown in Figure 3-13, uses display conventions  
for expanding and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree. An entry  
handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be  
expanded. Click this handle or double-click the following entries:  
„
„
„
A zone set entry expands to show its member zones.  
A zone entry expands to show its member ports/devices.  
Ports/devices that are zoned by WWN or FC address, but no longer part of  
the fabric, are grayed-out.  
Active Zoneset  
Data Window  
Figure 3-13. Active Zone Set Data Window  
59022-11 A  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
0
3.5.5  
Link Data Window  
The Link data window displays information about all switch links in the fabric or  
selected links. This information includes the switch name, the port number at the  
end of each link, and the link status icon. To open the Link data window, click the  
Link tab below the data window in the topology display.  
3.6  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
SANsurfer Switch Manager enables you to do the following:  
„
„
„
Displaying Detailed Device Information  
Exporting Device Information to a File  
Managing Device Port Nicknames  
3.6.1  
Displaying Detailed Device Information  
In addition to the information that is available in the Devices data window, you can  
click the (i) in the Details column to display more information shown in  
Figure 3-14.  
Figure 3-14. Detailed Devices Display Dialog  
3-34  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
0
3.6.2  
Exporting Device Information to a File  
To save device information to a file, open the topology display and do the  
following:  
1.  
Select one or more switches. If no switches are selected, Devices  
information is gathered for all switches.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Switch menu and select Export Devices Information.  
In the Save dialog, enter a file name. Select the extension for the type of  
output file (CSV or text format) to be saved. CSV files can be opened with  
Microsoft Excel or most spreadsheet applications.  
4.  
Click the Save button.  
3.6.3  
Managing Device Port Nicknames  
You can assign a nickname to a device port World Wide Name. A nickname is a  
user-definable, meaningful name that can be used in place of the World Wide  
Name. Assigning a nickname makes it easier to recognize device ports when  
zoning your fabric or when viewing the Devices data window.  
SANsurfer Switch Manager maintains nicknames in Nicknames.xml, which is  
found in your working directory. In addition to creating, editing, and deleting  
nicknames, you can also export the nicknames to a file, which can then be  
imported into the Nicknames.xml file on other workstations.  
3.6.3.1  
Creating a Nickname  
To create a device port nickname, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog.  
Choose one of the following methods to enter a nickname. A nickname must  
start with a letter and can have up to 64 characters. Valid characters include  
alphanumeric characters [aA-zZ][0-9] and special symbols [$ _ - ^ ].  
„
Click on a device in the table. Open the Edit menu and select Create  
Nickname to open the Add Nickname dialog. In the Add Nickname  
dialog, enter a nickname and WWN and click the OK button.  
„
Double-click a cell in the Nicknames column, and enter a new  
nickname in the text field. Click the Save button to save the changes  
and exit the Nicknames dialog.  
You can also create a nickname by double clicking a cell in the Nickname column  
of the Devices data window. Refer to ”Devices Data Window” on page 3-32.  
59022-11 A  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
0
3.6.3.2  
Editing a Nickname  
A nickname must start with a letter and can have up to 64 characters. Valid  
characters include alphanumeric characters [aA-zZ][0-9] and special symbols [$ _  
- ^ ]. You can access the Edit Nicknames dialog two ways. Choose one of the  
following methods to edit a nickname. Click the OK button to save the changes.  
„
In the topology or faceplate display, open the File menu and select  
Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog. The device entries are listed in  
table format.  
‰
Click on a device entry in the table. Open the Edit menu and select  
Edit Nickname to open the Edit Nicknames dialog. Edit the nickname  
in the text field. Click the OK button to save the changes.  
‰
Double-click a cell in the Nicknames or WWN columns, and edit the  
nickname in the text field. Click the OK button to save the changes.  
„
In the topology or faceplate display, click the Devices tab to display the  
Devices data window. Double-click a cell in the Nickname column to open  
the Edit Nickname dialog. Edit the nickname in the text field. Refer to  
”Devices Data Window” on page 3-32.  
3.6.3.3  
Deleting a Nickname  
To delete a device port nickname, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog.  
Click a device in the table. Open the Edit menu and select Delete  
Nickname.  
3.6.3.4  
Exporting Nicknames to a File  
You can save nicknames to a file. This is useful for distributing nicknames to other  
management workstations. To save nicknames to an XML file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog.  
Open the File menu in the Nicknames dialog, and select Export.  
Enter a name for the XML nickname file in the Save dialog and click Save.  
3-36  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.6.3.5  
Importing a Nicknames File  
Importing a nicknames file copies its contents into and replaces the contents of  
the Nicknames.xml file which is used by SANsurfer Switch Manager. To import a  
nickname file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog.  
Open the File menu in the Nicknames dialog, and select Import.  
Select an XML nickname file in the Open dialog and click Open. When  
prompted to overwrite existing nicknames, click Yes.  
3.7  
Zoning a Fabric  
Zoning enables you to divide the ports and devices of the fabric into zones for  
more efficient and secure communication among functionally grouped nodes. This  
subsection addresses the following topics:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Zoning Concepts  
Using the Zoning Wizard  
Managing the Zoning Database  
Managing Zone Sets  
Managing Zones  
Managing Aliases  
Merging Fabrics and Zoning  
3.7.1  
Zoning Concepts  
The following zoning concepts provide some context for the zoning tasks  
described in this section:  
„
„
„
„
„
Zones  
Aliases  
Zone Sets  
Zoning Database  
Configuring the Zoning Database  
59022-11 A  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.1.1  
Zones  
A zone is a named group of ports or devices that can communicate with each  
other. Devices within a zone can only communicate with other devices in the same  
zone. A device may participate in more than one zone.  
Membership in a zone can be defined by switch domain ID and port number,  
device Fibre Channel address (FCID), or device World Wide Name (WWN).  
„
WWN entries define zone membership by the World Wide Name of the  
attached device. With this membership method, you can move WWN  
member devices to different switch ports in different zones without having to  
edit the member entry as you would with a domain ID/port number member.  
Furthermore, unlike FCID members, WWN zone members are not affected  
by changes in the fabric that could change the Fibre Channel address of an  
attached device.  
„
„
FCID entries define zone membership by the Fibre Channel address of the  
attached device. With this membership method you can replace a device on  
the same port without having to edit the member entry as you would with a  
WWN member.  
Domain ID/Port number entries define zone membership by switch domain  
ID and port number. All devices attached to the specified port become  
members of the zone. The specified port must be an F_Port or an FL_Port.  
Two types of zones are supported:  
„
„
Soft zone  
Hard zone - Access Control List (domain/port member only or it will revert  
back to a soft zone when activated)  
3.7.1.1.1  
Soft Zones  
Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery. Devices within  
the same soft zone automatically discover and communicate freely with all other  
members of the same zone. The soft zone boundary is not secure; traffic across  
soft zones can occur if addressed correctly. Soft zones that include members from  
multiple switches need not include the ports of the inter-switch links. Soft zone  
boundaries yield to ACL zone boundaries. Soft zones can overlap; that is, a  
device can participate in more than one soft zone. Zone membership can be  
defined by Fibre Channel address, domain ID and port number, World Wide  
Name, or a combination. Soft zoning supports all port types.  
3-38  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.1.1.2  
Access Control List Hard Zones  
Access Control List (ACL) zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling  
discovery and inbound traffic. ACL zoning is a type of hard zoning that is  
hardware enforced. This type of zoning is useful for controlling access to certain  
devices without totally isolating them from the fabric. Devices can communicate  
with each other and transmit outside the ACL zone, but cannot receive inbound  
traffic from outside the zone. The ACL zone boundary is secure against inbound  
traffic. ACL zones can overlap; that is, a port can be a member of more than one  
ACL zone. ACL zones that include members from multiple switches need not  
include the ports of the inter-switch links. ACL zone boundaries supersede soft  
zone boundaries. Membership can be defined only by domain ID and port  
number. ACL zoning supports all port types. You can have domain/port member in  
a configured ACL zone, but it will be converted to a soft zone when activated.  
3.7.1.2  
Aliases  
To make it easier to add a group of ports or devices to one or more zones, you can  
create an alias. An alias is a named set of ports or devices that are grouped  
together for convenience. Unlike zones, aliases impose no communication  
restrictions between its members. You can add an alias to one or more zones.  
However, you cannot add a zone to an alias, nor can an alias be a member of  
another alias.  
3.7.1.3  
Zone Sets  
A zone set is a named group of zones. A zone can be a member of more than one  
zone set. Each switch in the fabric maintains its own zoning database containing  
one or more zone sets. This zoning database resides in non-volatile or permanent  
memory and is therefore retained after a reset. Refer to ”Configured Zonesets  
Data Window” on page 4-14 for information about displaying the zoning database.  
The orphan zone set is created by the application automatically to hold the zones  
which are not in any set. The orphan zone set cannot be removed and is not  
saved on the switch.  
To apply zoning to a fabric, choose a zone set and activate it. When you activate a  
zone set, the switch distributes that zone set and its zones, excluding aliases, to  
every switch in the fabric. (However, the contents of the aliases are distributed.)  
This zone set is known as the active zone set. Refer to ”Active Zone Set Data  
Window” on page 3-33 for information about displaying the active zone set.  
59022-11 A  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.1.4  
Zoning Database  
Each switch has its own zoning database. The zoning database is made up of all  
aliases, zones, and zone sets that have been created on the switch or received  
from other switches. The switch maintains two copies of the inactive zoning  
database: one copy is maintained in temporary memory for editing purposes; the  
second copy is maintained in permanent memory. Zoning database edits are  
made on an individual switch basis and are not propagated to other switches in  
the fabric when saved.  
There are two configuration parameters that affect the zoning database: Interop  
Auto Save and Default Visibility. The Auto Save parameter determines whether  
changes to the active zone set that a switch receives from another switch in the  
fabric will be saved to permanent memory on that switch. The Default Visibility  
parameter permits or prohibits communication among ports/devices when there is  
no active zone set. Refer to ”Configuring the Zoning Database” on page 3-44 for  
information about zoning configuration.  
The following zoning limits will be enforced during the configuration of zoning and  
during a zoning database merge from the fabric:  
„
„
„
„
MaxZoneSets is 256. The maximum number of zone sets that can be  
configured on the switch.  
MaxZones is 2000. The maximum number of zones that can be configured  
on the switch.  
MaxAliases is 2500. The maximum number of aliases that can be  
configured on the switch.  
MaxTotalMembers is 10,000. The maximum number of total zone and alias  
members that can be configured on the switch. Aliases are considered zone  
members since they can be added to a zone just like a normal zone  
member.  
„
„
„
MaxZonesInZoneSets is 1000. The maximum number of zone linkages to  
zonesets that can be configured on the switch. Every time a zone is added  
to a zoneset this constitutes a linkage.  
MaxMembersPerZone is 2000. The maximum number of zone members  
that can be added to any zone on the switch. Aliases are considered zone  
members when added to a zone.  
MaxMembersPerAlias is 2000. The maximum number of zone members  
that can be added to any alias on the switch.  
3-40  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.2  
Using the Zoning Wizard  
The Zoning Wizard is a series of dialogs that leads you through the process of  
zoning a fabric. To open the Zoning Wizard, open the Wizards menu in the  
faceplate display, and select Zoning Wizard.  
The Zoning Wizard helps you zone the two most typical reasons for zoning:  
„
„
Zoning Windows servers storage  
Assign storage to servers.  
To solve these problems, there must be at least one target and at least one  
initiator in the name server. Windows servers do not share devices well, but  
sometimes they must share devices, such as a tape drive. The wizard helps you  
define which devices are sharable and which ones are not. Once a device is in a  
Windows group, it can no longer be in any other group.  
3.7.3  
Managing the Zoning Database  
Managing the zoning database consists of the following:  
Editing the Zoning Database  
Configuring the Zoning Database  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Saving the Zoning Database to a File  
Restoring the Zoning Database from a File  
Restoring the Default Zoning Database  
Removing All Zoning Definitions  
59022-11 A  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.3.1  
Editing the Zoning Database  
To edit the zoning database for a particular switch, open the Zoning menu from  
the faceplate display and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog  
shown in Figure 3-15. Changes can only be made to inactive zone sets, which are  
stored in flash (non-volatile) memory and retained after resetting a switch.  
Port/Device  
Tree  
Zone Sets  
Tree  
Figure 3-15. Edit Zoning Dialog  
To apply zoning to a fabric, choose a zone set and activate it. When you activate a  
zone set, the switch distributes that zone set and its zones, excluding aliases, to  
every switch in the fabric. This zone set is known as the active zone set.  
You can not edit an active zone set on a switch. You must configure an inactive  
zone set to your needs and then activate that updated zone set to apply the  
changes to the fabric. When you activate a zone set, the switch distributes that  
zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the fabric. However,  
in addition to the merged active zone set, each switch maintains its own original  
zone set in its zoning database. Only one zone set can be active at one time.  
Note:  
If the Interop Auto Save parameter is enabled on the Zoning  
Configuration dialog, then every time the active zone set changes, the  
switch will copy it into an inactive zone set stored on the switch. You  
can edit this copy of the active zone set stored on the switch, and  
activate the updated copy to conveniently apply the changes to the  
active zone set. The edited copy then becomes the active zone set.  
3-42  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
The Edit Zoning dialog has a Zone Sets tree on the left and a Port/Device (or  
members) tree on the right. Both trees use display conventions similar to the  
fabric tree for expanding and contracting zone sets, zones, and ports. An  
expanded port shows the port Fibre Channel address; an expanded address  
shows the port World Wide Name. You can select zone sets, zones, and ports in  
the following ways:  
„
„
Click a zone, zone set, or port icon.  
Right-click to select a zone set or zone, and open the corresponding popup  
menu.  
„
„
Hold down the Shift key while clicking several consecutive icons.  
Hold down the Control key while clicking several non-consecutive icons.  
Using tool bar buttons, popup menus, or a drag-and-drop method, you can create  
and manage zone sets and zones in the zoning database. Table 3-4 describes the  
zoning tool bar operations.  
Use the Edit Zoning dialog to define zoning changes, and click the Apply button  
to open the Error Check dialog. Click the Error Check button to have SANsurfer  
Switch Manager check for zoning conflicts, such as empty zones, aliases, or zone  
sets, and ACL zones with non-domain ID/port number membership. Click the  
Save Zoning button to implement the changes. Click the Close button to close  
the Error Check dialog. On the Edit Zoning dialog, click the Close button to close  
the Edit Zoning dialog.  
Table 3-4. Edit Zoning Dialog Tool Bar Buttons and Icons  
Tool Bar Button  
Description  
Create Zone Set button - create a new zone set  
Create Zone button - create a new zone  
Create Alias button - create another name for a set of objects  
Add Member button - adds selected port/device to a zone  
Remove Member button - delete the selected zone from a zone  
set, or delete the selected port/device from a zone  
59022-11 A  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
Table 3-4. Edit Zoning Dialog Tool Bar Buttons and Icons (Continued)  
Tool Bar Button  
Description  
Switch port icon – not logged in  
Switch port icon – logged in  
NL_Port (loop) device icon – logged in to fabric  
NL_Port (loop) device icon – not logged in to fabric  
N_Port device icon – logged in to fabric  
N_Port device icon – not logged in to fabric  
3.7.3.2  
Configuring the Zoning Database  
Use the Zoning Config dialog to change the Auto Save, Default Visibility, and  
Discard Inactive configuration parameters. In the faceplate display, open the  
Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning Config to open the Zoning Config dialog  
shown in Figure 3-16. After making changes, click the OK button to put the new  
values into effect.  
Figure 3-16. Zoning Config Dialog  
3-44  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.3.2.1  
Interop Auto Save  
The Interop Auto Save parameter determines whether changes to the active zone  
set that a switch receives from other switches in the fabric will be saved to the  
zoning database on that switch. Changes are saved when an updated zone set is  
activated. Zoning changes are always saved to temporary memory. However, if  
Interop Auto Save is enabled, the switch firmware saves changes to the active  
zone set in temporary memory and to the zoning database. If Interop Auto Save is  
disabled, changes to the active zone set are stored only in temporary memory  
which is cleared when the switch is reset.  
Note:  
Disabling the Interop Auto Save parameter can be useful to prevent  
the propagation of zoning information when experimenting with  
different zoning schemes. However, leaving the Interop Auto Save  
parameter disabled can disrupt device configurations should a switch  
have to be reset. For this reason, the Interop Auto Save parameter  
should be enabled in a production environment.  
3.7.3.2.2  
Default Visibility  
Default visibility determines the level of communication that is permitted among  
ports/devices when there is no active zone set. The default visibility parameter  
can be set differently on each switch. When default visibility is enabled (ALL) on a  
switch, all ports/devices on the switch can communicate with all ports/devices on  
switches that also have default visibility enabled. When Default Visibility is  
disabled (NONE), none of the ports/devices on that switch can communicate with  
any other port/device in the fabric.  
3.7.3.2.3  
Discard Inactive  
The Discard Inactive parameter automatically removes inactive zones and zone  
sets when a zoneset is activated or deactivated from a remote switch.  
3.7.3.3  
Saving the Zoning Database to a File  
You can save the zoning database to an XML file. You can later reload this zoning  
database on the same switch or another switch. To save a zoning database to a  
file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning.  
In the Edit Zoning dialog, open the File menu and select Save As.  
In the Save dialog, enter a file name for the database file.  
Click the Save button to save the zoning file.  
59022-11 A  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.3.4  
Restoring the Zoning Database from a File  
CAUTION!  
Restoring the zoning database from a file will replace the current  
zoning database on the switch.  
Do the following to restore the zoning database from a file to a switch:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to  
open the Edit Zoning window.  
Open the File menu and select Open File. A popup window will prompt you  
to select an XML zoning database file.  
Select a file and click Open.  
3.7.3.5  
Restoring the Default Zoning Database  
Restoring the default zoning clears the switch of all zoning definitions.  
CAUTION! This command will deactivate the active zone set.  
To restore the default zoning for a switch:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Restore Default  
Zoning.  
2.  
Click the OK button to confirm that you want to restore default zoning and  
save changes to the zoning database.  
3.7.3.6  
Removing All Zoning Definitions  
To clear all zone and zone set definitions from the zoning database, choose one of  
the following:  
„
„
Open the Edit menu and select Clear Zoning. In the Removes All dialog,  
click the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete all zones and zone  
sets.  
Right-click the Zone Sets heading at the top of the Zone Sets tree, and  
select Clear Zoning from the popup menu. Click the Yes button to confirm  
that you want to delete all zone sets and zones.  
3-46  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.4  
Managing Zone Sets  
Zoning a fabric involves creating a zone set, creating zones as zone set members,  
then adding devices as zone members. The zoning database supports multiple  
zone sets to serve the different security and access needs of your storage area  
network, but only one zone set can be active at one time. Managing zone sets  
consists of the following tasks:  
„
„
„
„
„
Creating a Zone Set  
Activating and Deactivating a Zone Set  
Copying a Zone to a Zone Set  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets  
Removing a Zone Set  
Note:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches.  
3.7.4.1  
Creating a Zone Set  
To create a zone set, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Create Zone Set to open the Create Zone  
Set dialog.  
Enter a name for the zone set, and click the OK button. The new zone set  
name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. A zone set name must begin with  
a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z,  
a-z, _, -, ^, and $.  
59022-11 A  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
4.  
To create new zones in a zone set, do one of the following:  
„
„
„
Right-click a zone set and select Create A Zone from the popup menu.  
In the Create a Zone dialog, enter a name for the new zone, and click  
the OK button. The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets  
dialog.  
Select a zone set in the zone sets tree, and click the Zone button in the  
Zoning toolbar. In the Create a Zone dialog, enter a name for the new  
zone, and click the OK button. The new zone name is displayed in the  
Zone Sets dialog.  
Copy an existing zone by dragging a zone into the new zone set. Refer  
to ”Copying a Zone to a Zone Set” on page 3-48.  
5.  
Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
3.7.4.2  
Activating and Deactivating a Zone Set  
You must activate a zone set to apply its zoning definitions to the fabric. Only one  
zone set can be active at one time. When you activate a zone set, the switch  
distributes that zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the  
fabric.  
The purpose of the deactivate function is to suspend all fabric zoning which  
results in free communication fabric wide or no communication depending on the  
default visibility setting. Refer to ”Default Visibility” on page 3-45 for more  
information. It is not necessary to deactivate the active zone set before activating  
a new one.  
„
To activate a zone set, open the Zoning menu and select Activate Zone Set  
to open the Activate Zone Set dialog. Select a zone set from the Select Zone  
Set pull-down menu, and click the Activate button.  
„
To deactivate the active zone set, open the Zoning menu, select Deactivate  
Zone Set. Acknowledge the warning about traffic disruption, and click the  
Yes button to confirm that you want to deactivate the active zone set.  
3.7.4.3  
Copying a Zone to a Zone Set  
To copy an existing zone and its membership from one zone set to another, select  
the zone and drag it to the chosen zone set. Click the Apply button to save  
changes to the zoning database.  
3-48  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.4.4  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets  
You can remove a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets in the database.  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to  
open the Edit Zoning dialog.  
2.  
3.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone(s) to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove to remove the zone from the zone  
set, or select Remove from All Zones to remove the zone from all zone  
sets.  
4.  
Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
Alternatively, you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone from a zone set or  
from all zone sets in the database.  
3.7.4.5  
Removing a Zone Set  
Removing a zone set from the database affects the member zones in the following  
ways.  
„
Member zones that are members of other zone sets are not affected.  
„
Member zones that are not members of other zone sets become members  
of the orphan zone set, which cannot be removed. The orphan zone set is  
not saved on the switch.  
To delete a zone set from the database, do the following:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to  
open the Edit Zoning dialog.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone set to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove to remove the zone set.  
Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
Alternatively, you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone set from the  
database.  
59022-11 A  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.5  
Managing Zones  
Managing zones involves the following:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Creating a Zone in a Zone Set  
Adding Zone Members  
Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set  
Removing a Zone Member  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set  
Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets  
Changing Zone Types  
Note:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches.  
3.7.5.1  
Creating a Zone in a Zone Set  
When a zone is created, its zone type is soft. To change the zone type to a hard  
zone, refer to ”Changing Zone Types” on page 3-53 for more information. Refer to  
”Zones” on page 3-38 for information on zone types (soft and hard). To create a  
zone in a zone set, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Select a zone set.  
Open the Edit menu and select Create a Zone.  
In the Create a Zone dialog, enter a name for the new zone, and click the  
OK button. The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. A zone  
name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid  
characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, ^, $, and -.  
Note:  
If you enter the name of a zone that already exists in the  
database, the SANsurfer Switch Manager application will ask if  
you would like to add that zone and its membership to the zone  
set.  
3-50  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
5.  
To add switch ports or attached devices to the zone, do one of the following:  
„
In the zone set tree, select the zone set. In the graphic window, select  
the port to add to the zone. Open the Edit menu and select Add  
Members.  
„
„
Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or World Wide  
Name in the Port/Device tree, and drag it into the zone.  
Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or World Wide  
Name in the Port/Device tree. Right-click the zone and select Add  
Zone Members from the popup menu.  
6.  
Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
3.7.5.2  
Adding Zone Members  
You can zone a port/device by switch domain ID and port number, device port  
Fibre Channel address, or the device port WWN. Adding a port/device to a zone  
affects every zone set in which that zone is a member. To add ports/devices to a  
zone, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
2.  
Choose one of the following methods to add the port/device:  
„
„
„
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree, and drag it into the zone.  
To select multiple ports/devices, press and hold the Control key while  
selecting.  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree. To select multiple  
ports/devices, press the Control key while selecting. Select a zone set  
in the left pane. Open the Edit menu and select Add Members.  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree. To select multiple  
ports/devices, press the Control key while selecting. Select a zone set  
in the left pane. Click the Insert button.  
If the port/device you want to add is not in the Port/Device tree, you can add  
it by doing the following:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Right click the selected zone.  
Open the Edit menu and select Create Members.  
Choose the WWN, Domain/Port, or First Port Address radio button.  
Enter the hexadecimal value for the port/device according to the radio  
button selection: 16 digits for a WWN member, 4 digits for a Domain/  
Port member (DDPP), or a 6-digit Fibre Channel Address for a First  
Port Address member (DDPPAA) where D=domain ID, P=port number,  
and A=ALPA.  
59022-11 A  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.  
Click the OK button to add the member and save the change.  
Note:  
Domain ID conflicts can result in automatic reassignment of switch  
domain IDs. These reassignments are not reflected in zones that use  
domain ID/port number pair to define their membership. Be sure to  
reconfigure zones that are affected by a domain ID change.  
3.7.5.3  
Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set  
To rename a zone, do the following:  
1.  
In the Zone Sets tree of the Edit Zoning dialog, click the zone/zone set to be  
renamed.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu and select Rename.  
In the Rename Zone/Rename Zone Set dialog, enter a new name for the  
zone/zone set.  
4.  
Click the OK button.  
3.7.5.4  
Removing a Zone Member  
Removing a zone member will affect every zone and zone set in which that zone  
is a member. To remove a member from a zone:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
In the Edit Zoning dialog, select the zone member to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove.  
Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog.  
3.7.5.5  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set  
Zones that are no longer members of any zone set are moved to the orphan zone  
set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch. To remove a zone from a zone  
set, do the following:  
1.  
In the Edit Zoning dialog, select the zone to be removed. The selected zone  
will be removed from that zone set only.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove.  
Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog.  
3-52  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.5.6  
Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets  
Zones that are no longer members of any zone set are moved to the orphan zone  
set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch. To remove a zone from all zone  
sets including the orphan zone set, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
In the Edit Zoning dialog, select the zone to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove Zone from All Sets.  
Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog.  
3.7.5.7  
Changing Zone Types  
To change a zone type, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the faceplate display, select the switch with the zone type to change.  
Click the Zoning button to open the Edit Zoning dialog.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone to change.  
Open the Edit menu and select Set Zone Type to open the Set Zone Type  
dialog.  
5.  
Open the Zone Type pull-down menu and select Soft or ACL.  
„
„
Soft zoning is the least restrictive type of zoning.  
ACL zoning is hard zoning and is enforced by hardware and defines  
access to a given port. ACL zones need not include inter-switch links.  
3.7.6  
Managing Aliases  
An alias is a collection of objects that can be zoned together. An alias is not a  
zone, and can not have a zone or another alias as a member.  
Note:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches. You will not see  
aliases in the active zone set.  
59022-11 A  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.6.1  
Creating an Alias  
To create an alias, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Create Alias to open the Create Alias  
dialog.  
Enter a name for the alias, and click the OK button. The alias name is  
displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. An alias name must begin with a letter  
and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -.  
4.  
Click the OK button to save the alias name to the zoning database.  
3.7.6.2  
Adding a Member to an Alias  
You can add a port/device to an alias by domain ID and port number, device port  
Fibre Channel address, or the device port WWN. To add ports/devices to an alias,  
do the following:  
1.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
2.  
Choose one of the following methods to add the port/device:  
„
„
„
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree, and drag it into the alias.  
To select multiple ports/devices, press and hold the Control key while  
selecting.  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree. Click an alias to select  
multiple ports/devices, press the Control key while selecting. Select an  
alias. Open the Edit menu and select Add Members.  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree. To select multiple  
ports/devices, press the Control key while selecting. Select an alias.  
Click the Insert button.  
3-54  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
If the port/device you want to add is not in the Port/Device tree, you can add  
it by doing the following:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Right click the selected alias.  
Open the Edit menu and select Create Members.  
Choose the WWN, Domain/Port, or First Port Address radio button.  
Enter the hexadecimal value for the port/device according to the radio  
button selection: 16 digits for a WWN member, 4 digits for a Domain/  
Port member (DDPP), or a 6-digit Fibre Channel Address for a First  
Port Address member (DDPPAA) where D=domain ID, P=port number,  
and A=ALPA.  
3.  
Click the OK button to add the member and save the change.  
3.7.6.3  
Removing an Alias from All Zones  
To remove an alias from all zones, do the following:  
1.  
In the Zone Sets tree in the Edit Zoning dialog, select the alias to be  
removed.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove Alias from All Zones.  
Click the Yes button in the Remove dialog.  
3.7.7  
Merging Fabrics and Zoning  
If you join two fabrics with an inter-switch link, the active zone sets from the two  
fabrics attempt to merge automatically. The fabrics may consist of a single switch  
or many switches already connected together. The switches in the two fabrics  
attempt to create a new active zone set containing the union of each fabric's  
active zone set. The propagation of zoning information only affects the active zone  
set, not the configured zone sets, unless Interop Auto Save is turned on.  
3.7.7.1  
Zone Merge Failure  
If a zone merge is unsuccessful, the inter-switch links between the fabrics will  
isolate due to a zone merge failure, which will generate an alarm. The reason for  
the E_Port isolation can also be determined by viewing the port information. Refer  
to ”Port Information Data Window” on page 5-7 and the ”Show Command” on  
page A-87 (Port keyword).  
A zone merge will fail if the two active zone sets have member zones with  
identical names that differ in membership or type. For example, consider Fabric A  
and Fabric B each with a soft zone named “ZN1” in its active zone set. Fabric A  
"ZN1" contains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and Port 1; Fabric B “ZN1”  
contains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and Port 2. In this case, the merge  
will fail because the two zones have the same name, but different membership.  
59022-11 A  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
0
3.7.7.2  
Zone Merge Failure Recovery  
When a zone merge failure occurs, the conflict that caused the failure must be  
resolved. You can correct a failure due to a zone conflict by deactivating one of  
the active zone sets or by editing the conflicting zones so that their membership is  
the same. You can deactivate the active zone set on one fabric if the active zone  
set on the other fabric accurately defines your zoning needs. If not, you must edit  
the zone memberships, and reactivate the zone sets. After correcting the zone  
membership, reset the isolated ports to allow the fabrics to join.  
Note:  
If you deactivate the active zone set in one fabric and the Interop Auto  
Save parameter is enabled, the active zone set from the second fabric  
will propagate to the first fabric and replace all zones with matching  
names in the configured zone sets.  
If the zone sets to merge have the same Zone A that only differ in the  
type of zone (soft vs. ACL), the zone sets will merge. If this is a 2  
switch fabric, Switch 1 will state that Zone A is soft and Switch 2 will  
state that Zone A is ACL.  
Refer to ”Managing Zones” on page 3-50 for information about adding and  
removing zone members. Refer to ”Resetting a Port” on page 5-16 for information  
about resetting a port.  
3-56  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 4  
Managing Switches  
This section describes the following tasks that manage switches in the fabric.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Managing User Accounts  
Displaying Switch Information  
Configuring Port Threshold Alarms  
Paging a Switch  
Setting the Date/Time and Enabling NTP Client  
Resetting a Switch  
Configuring a Switch  
Archiving a Switch  
Restoring a Switch  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  
Downloading a Support File  
Installing Firmware  
Displaying Hardware Status  
59022-11 A  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
0
4.1  
Managing User Accounts  
Only the Admin account can manage user accounts with the User Account  
Administration dialogs. However, any user can modify their own password. To  
open the User Account Administration dialogs, open the Switch menu in the  
faceplate display, and select User Accounts.... A user account consists of the  
following:  
„
„
„
„
Account name or login  
Password  
Authority level  
Expiration date  
Switches come from the factory with the following user accounts:  
Table 4-1. Factory User Accounts  
Account Name  
Password  
Admin Authority  
Expiration  
admin  
images  
admin  
images  
true  
false  
never expires  
never expires  
The Admin account is the only user that can manage all user accounts with the  
User Account Administration dialogs. The Admin account can create, remove, or  
modify user accounts, and change account passwords. The Admin account can  
also view and modify the switch and its configuration with SANsurfer Switch  
Manager. The Admin account can not be removed.  
Users with Admin authority can view and modify the switch and its configuration  
using SANsurfer Switch Manager. Users without Admin authority are limited to  
viewing switch status and configuration.  
The Images account is used to exchange files with the switch using FTP. The  
Images account can not be removed.  
Note:  
If the same user account exists on a switch and its RADIUS server,  
that user can login with either password, but the authority and account  
expiration will always come from the switch database.  
4-2  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
0
4.1.1  
Creating User Accounts  
To create a user account on a switch, open the Switch menu in the faceplate  
display and select User Accounts.... This displays the User Account  
Administration dialog shown in Figure 4-1. A switch can have a maximum of 15  
user accounts.  
Figure 4-1. User Account Administration Dialog – Add Account  
1.  
To open the User Account Administration dialogs, open the Switch menu in  
the faceplate display, and select User Accounts....  
2.  
3.  
Click the Add Account tab to open the Add Account tab page.  
Enter an account name in the New Account Login field. Account names are  
limited to 15 characters.  
4.  
5.  
If the account is to have the ability to modify switch configurations, check the  
Admin Authority Enabled box.  
Enter a password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Verify  
Password field. A password must have a minimum of 8 characters and no  
more than 20.  
6.  
7.  
If this account is to be permanent with no expiration date, click the  
Permanent Account radio button. Otherwise, click the Account Will  
Expire button and enter the number days in which the account will expire.  
Click the Add Account button to add the newly defined account.  
59022-11 A  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
0
4.1.2  
Removing a User Account  
To remove a user account on a switch, open the Switch menu in the faceplate  
display and select User Accounts.... Click the Remove Account tab in the dialog  
to present the display shown in Figure 4-2. Select the account name from the list  
of accounts at the top of the dialog and click the Remove Account button.  
Figure 4-2. User Account Administration Dialog – Remove Account  
4-4  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
0
4.1.3  
Changing a User Account Password  
To change the password for an account on a switch, open the Switch menu in the  
faceplate display and select User Accounts.... Click the Change Password tab  
in the dialog to present the display shown in Figure 4-3. Select the account name  
from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog, then enter the old password, the  
new password, and verify the new password in the corresponding fields. Click the  
Change Password button. Any user can change their password for their account,  
but only the Admin account name can change the password for another user’s  
account. If the administrator does not know the user’s original password, the  
administrator must remove the account and add the account.  
Figure 4-3. User Account Administration Dialog– Change Password  
59022-11 A  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
0
4.1.4  
Modifying a User Account  
To modify a user account on a switch, open the Switch menu in the faceplate  
display and select User Accounts.... This displays the User Account  
Administration dialog shown in Figure 4-4. Click the Modify Account tab. Select  
the account name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog. Click the Admin  
authority Enabled check box to grant admin authority to the account name. Click  
an Account Expiration Date radio button. If the account is not to be permanent,  
enter the number of days until the account expires. Click the Modify Account  
button to save the changes. Click the Close button to close the User Account  
Administration dialog.  
Figure 4-4. User Account Administration Dialog – Modify Account  
4-6  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
0
4.2  
Displaying Switch Information  
The faceplate display and data windows provide the following switch information:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Device and HBA information  
Switch specifications and addresses  
Configuration parameters  
Port performance statistics  
Port information  
Configured zone sets  
Figure 4-5 shows the faceplate display for the SANbox2-8c and SANbox2-16  
switches.  
Figure 4-5. Faceplate Display  
59022-11 A  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
0
The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in  
status to the management workstation as they occur. You can allow the fabric to  
update the switch status, or you can refresh the display at any time. To refresh  
switch status in the display, do one of the following:  
„
„
„
„
Click the Refresh button.  
Open the View menu and select Refresh.  
Press the F5 key.  
Right-click a switch in the topology display and select Refresh Switch from  
the popup menu.  
„
Right-click in the graphic window of the faceplate display, and select  
Refresh Switch from the popup menu.  
4.2.1  
Devices Data Window  
The Devices data window displays information about the devices that are logged  
into the fabric. Click the Devices tab below the data window to display name  
server information for all devices that are logged into the selected fabric. To  
narrow the display to devices that are logged into specific switches, select one or  
more switches in the fabric tree or the topology display. Refer to ”Devices Data  
Window” on page 3-32 for a description of the entries in the Devices data window.  
4.2.2  
Switch Data Window  
The Switch data window displays current network and switch information for the  
selected switches. Refer to ”Configuring a Switch” on page 4-19 for more  
information about the Switch data window. To open the Switch data window, select  
one or more switches in the topology display or open the faceplate display, and  
click the Switch tab below the window. Table 4-2 describes the Switch data  
window entries.  
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Description  
Switch Fibre Channel address  
First Port Address  
World Wide Name  
Serial Number  
Reason for Status  
User Name  
Switch World Wide Name  
Number assigned to each chassis.  
Additional status information  
Account name  
Login Level  
Authority level  
4-8  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
0
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Super User  
Description  
Super user privileges enabled/disabled  
UserAuthentication  
Enabled  
Enforcement of account names and authority (always  
True)  
Vendor  
Switch manufacturer  
Firmware Version  
Inactive Firmware Version  
Active firmware version  
This field does not apply to this switch  
Pending Firmware Version Firmware version that will be activated at the next reset  
PROM/Flasher Version  
MAC Address  
PROM firmware version  
Media Access Control address  
Internet Protocol address  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Mask that determines the IP address subnet  
Gateway address  
Gateway  
SNMP Enabled  
Negotiated Domain ID  
Configured Domain ID  
Domain ID Lock  
SNMP enabled or disabled.  
The domain ID currently being used by the fabric  
The domain ID defined by network administrator  
Domain ID lock status. Prevents (True) or permits (False)  
dynamic domain ID reassignment.  
Number of Ports  
Switch Type  
Number of ports activated on the switch  
Switch model  
Operational State  
Switch operational state: Online, Offline, Diagnostic,  
Down  
Administrative State  
Current switch administrative state  
Configured Admin State  
Switch administrative state that is stored in the switch  
configuration  
R_A_TOV  
E_D_TOV  
Resource allocation timeout value  
Error detect timeout value  
59022-11 A  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
0
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Interop Mode  
Zoning merge status. When a zone set is activated on an  
FC-SW-2 compliant switch, only the active zone set is  
propagated to all switches in the fabric. When a zone set  
is activated on a non-FC-SW-2 compliant switch, the  
active zone set and all inactive zone sets (the entire  
zoning database) are stored in permanent memory. The  
Interop Mode setting must be the same on all switches in  
the fabric, otherwise the inter-switch links will not connect.  
Legacy Address Format  
Legacy port addressing status. Enabled only for  
interoperability with non-FC-SW-2 compliant switches.  
Interop Auto Save  
Zoning auto save status. Saves zoning updates in  
temporary memory and the zoning database (True) or  
only in temporary memory (False).  
Zoning Default Visibility  
Security Auto Save  
Zoning visibility status. Permits (All) or prevents (None)  
communication between attached devices in the absence  
of an active zone set.  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
Security Fabric Binding  
Enable  
Temperature  
Internal switch temperature °C  
Fan 1 status  
Fan 1 Status  
Fan 2 Status  
Fan 2 status (SANbox2-16 only)  
Fan 3 status (SANbox2-64 only)  
Power supply 1 status  
Fan 3 Status  
Power Supply 1 Status  
Power Supply 2 Status  
Beacon Status  
Power supply 2 status (SANbox2-16 only)  
Beacon status. Switch LEDs are blinking (On) or not (off).  
Broadcast Support  
Broadcast support status. Broadcast support is enabled or  
disabled (default).  
In-band Enabled  
In-band management status. Permits (True) or prevents  
(False) a switch from being managed over an ISL.  
Temperature Failure Port  
Shutdown  
Non-configurable (always enabled for this switch). All  
ports are downed when the switch temperature exceeds  
the Failure Temperature.  
4-10  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
0
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Warning Temperature  
Non-configurable temperature threshold (65° Celsius)  
above which a warning condition alarm is generated.  
Failure Temperature  
NTP Client Enabled  
NTP Server Address  
FDMI Enable  
Non-configurable temperature threshold (70° Celsius)  
above which a failure condition alarm is generated.  
Enabled or disabled. Allows for switches to synchronize  
their time a centralized server.  
The IP address of the centralized NTP server. Ethernet  
connection to NTP server is required.  
Fabric Device Management Interface status. If enabled,  
device information can be obtained, managed, and saved  
through the fabric using Name Service Management  
Server functions. SANsurfer Switch Manager will report  
any and all FDMI information reported by the entry switch,  
if FDMI is enabled on the entry switch. Refer to  
”Displaying Detailed Device Information” on page 3-34 for  
information about displaying FDMI information.  
FDMI HBA Entry Limit  
Maximum number of HBAs that can be registered with a  
switch.  
Number of Donor Groups  
Total number of donor port groups. A donor group is a set  
of ports on a switch that can donate buffer credits to each  
other.  
Embedded GUI  
SANsurfer Switch Manager web applet status. Enables or  
disables the web applet on the switch.  
Inactivity Timeout  
Number of minutes the switch waits before terminating an  
idle command line interface session. Zero (0) disables the  
time out threshold.  
GUI Mgmt Enabled  
Switch management application status. If disabled, the  
switch cannot be managed using the application.  
Telnet Enabled  
SSH Enabled  
Telnet client status  
Secure Shell status. If enabled, an encrypted data path is  
provided for command line interface sessions.  
SSL Enabled  
Secure Sockets Layer status. If enabled, encryption for  
switch management application and CIM sessions is  
provided.  
59022-11 A  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
0
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
CIM Enabled  
Common Information Model status. The CIM agent is  
based on the SNIA Storage Management Initiative  
Specification (SMI-S), which is the standard for SAN  
management in a heterogeneous environment.  
FTP Enabled  
FTP status  
Management Server  
Enabled  
Management server status.  
4.2.3  
Port Statistics Data Window  
The Port Statistics data window displays port performance data for the selected  
ports. To open the Port Statistics data window, click the Port Stats tab below the  
data window in the faceplate display. Refer to Table 5-5 for a description of the  
Port Statistics data window entries.  
The Statistics pull-down menu is available on the Port Statistics data window, and  
provides different ways to view detailed port information. Click the down arrow to  
open the pull-down menu. Open the pull-down menu and select Absolute to view  
the total count of statistics since the last switch reset. Select Rate to view the  
number of statistics counted per second over the polling period. Select Baseline  
to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was set. Click  
the Clear Baseline button to set the current baseline.  
4-12  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
0
4.2.4  
Port Information Data Window  
The Port Information data window displays port detail information for the selected  
ports. To open the Port Statistics data window, click the Port Info tab below the  
data window in the faceplate display. Refer to Table 5-6 for a description of the  
Port Information data window entries.  
Figure 4-6. Faceplate Display - Port Information  
59022-11 A  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
0
4.2.5  
Configured and Active Zonesets Data Window  
The Configured Zonesets data window displays all zone sets, zones, aliases, and  
zone membership in the zoning database, as shown in Figure 4-7. To open the  
Configured Zonesets data window, click the Configured Zonesets tab below the  
data window in the faceplate display. To view the active zone sets in the Active  
Zonesets data window, open the topology display and click the Active Zonesets  
data window tab.  
The Configured Zonesets data window uses display conventions for expanding  
and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree. An entry handle located  
to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded. Click  
this handle or double-click the following entries to expand or collapse them:  
„
„
A zone set entry expands to show its member zones.  
A zone entry expands to show its members by domain ID and port number,  
device port World Wide Name, or device port Fibre Channel address.  
„
The alias entry expands to show its entries.  
Figure 4-7. Configured Zonesets Data Window  
4-14  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring Port Threshold Alarms  
0
4.3  
Configuring Port Threshold Alarms  
You can configure the switch to generate alarms for selected events. Configuring  
an alarm involves choosing an event type, rising and falling triggers, a sample  
window, and finally enabling or disabling the alarm. To configure port threshold  
alarms, do the following:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Port Threshold  
Alarm Configuration. The Port Threshold Alarm Configuration dialog  
shown in Figure 4-8 prompts you to enable or disable all alarms, select an  
event, set triggers, set a sample window and enable or disable an individual  
alarm.  
Figure 4-8. Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Dialog  
2.  
Check the Enable All Port Threshold Alarms check box to enable  
monitoring for all the individual alarm types that are enabled. The Enable All  
Port Threshold Alarms check box is the master control for the individual  
alarms. For example, the switch will monitor CRC errors only if both the  
CRC Error Enable box and the Enable All Port Threshold Alarms box are  
checked.  
3.  
Select an event type from the Port Threshold Alarm pull-down menu.  
Choose from the following options:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
CRC error monitoring  
Decode error monitoring  
ISL monitoring  
Login monitoring  
Logout monitoring  
Loss of signal monitoring  
4.  
Check the Enable box to make the alarm eligible for use.  
59022-11 A  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4 – Managing Switches  
Paging a Switch  
0
5.  
6.  
Enter a value for the rising trigger. A rising trigger alarm is generated when  
the event count per interval exceeds the rising trigger. The switch will not  
generate another rising trigger alarm for that event until the count descends  
below the falling trigger and rises again above the rising trigger. Consider  
the example in Figure 4-9.  
Enter a value for the falling trigger. A falling trigger alarm is generated when  
the event count per interval descends below the falling trigger.  
Note:  
The switch will down a port if a rising trigger alarm is not cleared  
after three consecutive sample windows.  
Generate rising  
trigger alarm;  
eligibility ends  
Generate rising  
trigger alarm;  
eligibility ends  
Rising  
Trigger  
Event  
Count  
Falling  
Trigger  
Generate falling  
trigger alarm;  
eligibility is reset  
Sample Window  
Figure 4-9. Port Threshold Alarm Example  
7.  
Enter a sample window in seconds. The sample window defines the period  
of time in which to count events.  
8.  
9.  
Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each alarm you want to configure or enable.  
Click the OK button to save all changes.  
4.4  
Paging a Switch  
You can use the beacon feature to page a switch. The beacon feature causes all  
Logged-In LEDs to flash, making it easier to recognize. To page a switch, open  
the Switch menu in the faceplate display and enable the Toggle Beacon  
selection. To cancel the beacon, reselect Toggle Beacon.  
4-16  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Setting the Date/Time and Enabling NTP Client  
0
4.5  
Setting the Date/Time and Enabling NTP Client  
The Date/Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) dialog enables you to manually  
set the date, time, and time zone on a switch, or to enable the NTP Client to  
synchronize the date and time on the switch with an NTP server. Enabling the  
NTP client ensures the consistency of date and time stamps in alarms and log  
entries. An Ethernet connection to an NTP server is required. When date/time is  
set or displayed in the firmware, it is always in Universal Time, However, when  
displayed in the Date/Time dialog, the value is always in local time. The difference  
between switch and workstation times must not exceed 24 hours, or the switch  
management application can not connect. To set the date and time on a switch, do  
the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Select a switch in the topology display, and open the faceplate display.  
Open the Switch menu, and select Set Date/Time....  
Choose one of the following:  
„
Enter the year, month, day, time, and time zone in the Switch  
Date/Time dialog, then click OK. The new date and time take effect  
immediately.  
„
Click the NTP Client Enabled checkbox to enable the switch to  
synchronize its time with an NTP server. Enter the IP address of the  
NTP server. Ethernet connection to NTP server is required. Click the  
OK button to save the settings.  
4.6  
Resetting a Switch  
Resetting a switch reboots the switch using configuration parameters in memory.  
Depending on the reset type, a switch reset may or may not include a power-on  
self test or it may or may not disrupt traffic. Table 4-3 describes the types of switch  
resets.  
During a hotreset operation, fabric services will be unavailable for a short period  
(30-75 seconds depending on switch model). Verify all administrative changes to  
the fabric (if any) are complete before performing an NDCLA. When upgrading  
firmware across a fabric using non-disruptive activation, upgrade one switch at a  
time and allow 75 seconds between switches.  
CAUTION!  
Changes to the fabric may disrupt the NDCLA process.  
59022-11 A  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 – Managing Switches  
Resetting a Switch  
0
Common administrative operations that change the fabric include:  
„
„
Zoning modifications.  
Adding, moving or removing devices attached to the switch fabric. This  
includes powering up or powering down attached devices.  
„
Adding, moving or removing ISLs or other connections.  
Management Interfaces:  
After an NDCLA operation is complete, management connections must be  
re-initiated:  
„
„
SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions will re-connect automatically.  
Telnet sessions must be restarted manually.  
Applicable Code Versions:  
„
„
„
NDCLA capability is available starting with version 2.0 of the switch code.  
Upgrading to version 2.0 from previous releases will be disruptive.  
Future switch code releases will be upgraded non-disruptively unless  
specifically indicated in its associated release notes.  
„
An NDCLA operation to previous switch code releases is not supported.  
Table 4-3. Switch Resets  
Type  
Hot Reset  
Description  
Resets a switch without a power-on self test. This reset activates  
the pending firmware, but does not disrupt switch traffic. If errors  
are detected on a port during a hot reset, the port is reset  
automatically.  
Reset without  
POST  
Resets a switch without a power-on self test. This reset activates  
the pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic.  
Hard Reset  
Resets a switch with a power-on self test. This reset activates the  
pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic.  
To reset a switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select the switch to be reset and open the faceplate display.  
Open the Switch menu and select the Reset Switch pull-down menu:  
„
„
„
Select Hot Reset to perform a hot reset.  
Select Reset to perform a standard reset.  
Select Hard Reset to perform a hard reset.  
4-18  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7  
Configuring a Switch  
Switch configuration is divided into three areas: chassis configuration, network  
configuration, and SNMP configuration. Chassis configuration specifies  
switch-wide Fibre Channel settings. Network configuration specifies IP settings,  
remote logging, and the NTP client. SNMP configuration specifies SNMP settings  
and traps.  
You can configure a switch explicitly or you can use the Configuration Wizard. The  
Configuration Wizard is a series of dialogs that guide you through the chassis,  
network, and SNMP configuration steps on new or replacement switches.  
4.7.1  
Using the Configuration Wizard  
The Configuration Wizard is a series of dialogs you can use to configure the IP  
address and other basic parameters on new or replacement switches. SANbox  
Manager will detect the first time use and present the Initial Start dialog, from  
which the Configuration Wizard can be launched. You can also launch the  
Configuration Wizard from the Wizards menu in either the topology display or the  
faceplate display. Open the Wizards menu and select Configuration Wizard. Use  
the Configuration Wizard to configure a new switch in a fabric.  
59022-11 A  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.2  
Switch Properties  
To open the Switch Properties dialog, either select a switch in the topology display  
or open the faceplate display for the switch you be configuring, and then open the  
Switch menu and select Switch Properties. You may also right-click a switch  
graphic in the topology display or faceplate display, and select Switch Properties  
from the popup menu.  
Use the Switch Properties dialog to change the following switch configuration  
parameters:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Symbolic Name  
Switch Administrative States  
Domain ID and Domain ID Lock  
Fabric Device Management Interface  
Broadcast Support  
In-band Management  
Figure 4-10. Switch Properties Dialog  
4-20  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.2.1  
Symbolic Name  
The symbolic name is a user-defined name of up to 32 characters that identifies  
the switch. The symbolic name is used in the topology and faceplate displays, as  
well as many data windows to more easily identify switches. The illegal characters  
are the pound sign (#), semi-colon (;), and comma (,).  
4.7.2.2  
Switch Administrative States  
The switch administrative state determines the operational state of the switch. The  
switch administrative state exists in two forms: the configured administrative state  
and the current administrative state.  
„
„
The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch  
configuration and is preserved across switch resets. SANsurfer Switch  
Manager always makes changes to the configured administrative state. The  
configured administrative state is displayed in the Switch Properties dialog.  
The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the switch for  
temporary purposes and is not retained across switch resets. The current  
administrative state is set using the Set Switch command. Refer to the ”Set  
Command” on page A-58.  
Table 4-4 describes the administrative state values.  
Table 4-4. Switch Administrative States  
Parameter  
Online  
Description  
The switch is available.  
Offline  
The switch is unavailable.  
Diagnostics  
The switch is in diagnostics mode, is unavailable, and tests can  
then be run on all ports of the switch.  
59022-11 A  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.2.3  
Domain ID and Domain ID Lock  
The domain ID is a unique Fibre Channel identifier for the switch. The Fibre  
Channel address consists of the domain ID, port ID, and the Arbitrated Loop  
Physical Address (ALPA). The maximum number of switches within a fabric is 239  
with each switch having a unique domain ID.  
Switches come from the factory with the domain IDs unlocked. This means that if  
there is a domain ID conflict in the fabric, the switch with the highest principal  
priority, or the principal switch, will reassign any domain ID conflicts and establish  
the fabric. If you lock the domain ID on a switch and a domain ID conflict occurs,  
one of the switches will isolate as a separate fabric and the Logged-In LEDs on  
both switches will flash to show the affected ports. Refer to the ”Set Config  
Command” on page A-60 for information about the Switch keyword and the  
Domain ID Lock and Principal Priority parameters.  
If you connect a new switch to an existing fabric with its domain ID unlocked, and  
a domain conflict occurs, the new switch will isolate as a separate fabric.  
However, you can remedy this by resetting the new switch or taking it offline then  
back online. The principal switch will reassign the domain ID and the switch will  
join the fabric.  
Note:  
Domain ID reassignment is not reflected in zoning that is defined by  
domain ID and port number pair. You must reconfigure zones that are  
affected by domain ID reassignment.  
4-22  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.2.4  
Fabric Device Management Interface  
Fabric Device Management Interface (FDMI) provides a means to gather and  
display device information from the fabric, and allows FDMI capable devices to  
register certain information with the fabric, if FDMI is enabled. SANsurfer Switch  
Manager will report any and all FDMI information reported by the entry switch, if  
FDMI is enabled on the entry switch. To view FDMI data, FDMI must be enabled  
on the entry switch and on all other switches in the fabric which are to report FDMI  
data.  
FDMI is comprised of the fabric-to-device interface and the application-to-fabric  
interface. The fabric-to-device interface enables a device’s management  
information to be registered. The application-to-fabric interface provides the  
framework by which an application obtains device information from the fabric. Use  
the FDMI HBA Entry Limit field on the Switch Properties dialog to configure the  
maximum number of HBAs that can be registered with a switch. If the number of  
HBAs exceeds the maximum number, the FDMI information for those HBAs can  
not be registered.  
Use the FDMI Enabled radio button on the Switch Properties dialog to enable or  
disable FDMI. If FDMI is enabled on an HBA, the HBA forwards information about  
itself to the switch when the HBA logs into the switch. If FDMI is enabled on a  
switch, the switch stores the HBA information in its FDMI database. Disabling  
FDMI on a switch clears the FDMI database. If you disable FDMI on a switch, then  
re-enable it, you must reset the ports to cause the HBAs to log in again, and thus  
forward HBA information to the switch.  
To view detailed FDMI information for a device, open the topology display, click  
the Devices tab, and click the Information (i) button in the Details column of the  
Devices data window. The Detailed Details Display dialog displays the specific  
information for that device. Refer to ”Devices Data Window” on page 4-8 and  
”Displaying Detailed Device Information” on page 3-34 for more information.  
59022-11 A  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.2.5  
Broadcast Support  
Broadcast is supported on the switch which allows for TCP/IP support. Broadcast  
is implemented using the proposed standard specified in Multi-Switch Broadcast  
for FC-SW-3, T11 Presentation Number T11/02-031v0. Fabric Shortest Path First  
(FSPF) is used to set up a fabric spanning tree used in transmission of broadcast  
frames. Broadcast frames are retransmitted on all ISLs indicated in the spanning  
tree and all online N_Ports and NL_Ports. Broadcast zoning is supported with  
Access Control List (ACL) hard zones. When a broadcast frame is received, these  
hard zones are enforced at the N_Ports and NL_Ports. If the originator of the  
broadcast is in a hard zone, the frame is retransmitted on all online N_Ports and  
NL_Ports within the hard zone. If the originator of the broadcast frame is not in a  
hard zone, the frame is retransmitted on online N_Ports and NL_Ports that are not  
in a hard zone. The default setting is disabled.  
4.7.2.6  
In-band Management  
In-band management is the ability to manage switches across inter-switch links  
using SANsurfer Switch Manager, SNMP, management server, or the application  
programming interface. The switch comes from the factory with in-band  
management enabled. If you disable in-band management on a particular switch,  
you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct  
Ethernet or serial connection.  
4-24  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.3  
Advanced Switch Properties  
The Advanced Switch Properties dialog enables you to set the timeout values,  
Interop Mode, and Legacy Address Format settings. The Advanced Switch  
Properties dialog is available for only the entry switch, because an in-band switch  
can not be taken offline. The switch will automatically be taken offline temporarily  
and will be restored to its original state after the changes are completed. To open  
the Advanced Switch Properties dialog, open the Switch menu and select  
Advanced Switch Properties. After making changes, click the OK button to put  
the new values into effect.  
Use the Advanced Switch Properties dialog to change the following switch  
configuration parameters:  
„
„
„
Interop Mode for Zoning  
Legacy Port Address Format  
Timeout Values  
Figure 4-11. Advanced Switch Properties Dialog  
4.7.3.1  
Interop Mode for Zoning  
When a zone set is activated on an FC-SW-2 compliant switch, only the active  
zone set is propagated to all switches in the fabric. When a zone set is activated  
on a non-FC-SW-2 compliant switch, the active zone set and all inactive zone sets  
(the entire zoning database stored in permanent memory) are propagated to all  
switches in the fabric. Use the Standard option for FC-SW-2 compliant switches to  
propagate only the active zone set to all switches in the fabric. Use the Interop_1  
parameter for non-FC-SW-2 compliant switches to propagate the active zone set  
and all inactive zone sets to all switches in the fabric.  
59022-11 A  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.3.2  
Legacy Port Address Format  
Legacy Address Format should be enabled only to permit interoperation with  
certain older non-FC-SW-2 compliant switches. Enabling this setting under other  
circumstances will disable zoning that is defined by domain ID and port number.  
This Legacy Address Format option is available only when the Interop_1 setting is  
enabled on the Advanced Switch Properties dialog. Contact your authorized  
maintenance provider for assistance in using this feature. Refer to the QLogic  
Switch Interoperability Guide on the QLogic Web site for a complete discussion of  
configuring for operation with non-Qlogic Switches.  
Note:  
The Legacy Address Format setting must be the same on all switches  
in the fabric, otherwise the inter-switch links will not connect.  
4.7.3.3  
Timeout Values  
The switch timeout values determine the timeout values for all ports on the switch.  
Table 4-5 describes the switch timeout parameters. The timeout values must be  
the same for all switches in the fabric.  
Note:  
Mismatched timeout values will disrupt the fabric. These should not be  
changed unless absolutely necessary. The switch must be offline to  
change these values. Use the Switch Properties dialog to take the  
switch offline.  
Table 4-5. Timeout Values  
Parameter  
Description  
R_A_TOV  
E_D_TOV  
Resource Allocation Timeout: The maximum time a frame could be  
delayed and still be delivered. The default is 10000 milliseconds.  
Error Detect Timeout: The maximum round trip time that an operation  
between two N_Ports could require. The default is 2000 milliseconds.  
4-26  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.4  
System Services Dialog  
The System Services dialog provides a central location for you to enable or  
disable any of the external user services such as Simple Network Management  
Protocol (SNMP), Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), Secure SHell (SSH), embedded  
switch management application, command line interface, Network Time Protocol  
(NTP), and Common Information Model (CIM). To display the System Services  
dialog, open the Switch menu and select Services.  
Figure 4-12. System Services Dialog  
Use caution when disabling the Embedded GUI, GUI Mgmt, Telnet, SSL, and  
SSH, as it is possible to disable all access to the switch except through a serial  
connection.  
„
Embedded GUI - Embedded Graphical User Interface. Allows users to point  
a browser at the switch and run the embedded switch management  
application on that switch as an applet.  
„
GUI Mgmt - Allows out-of-band management of the switch from the switch  
management application (GUI). If disabled, the switch can not be specified  
as the entry switch for a fabric in the GUI, but can still be managed through  
an in-band connection.  
59022-11 A  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
„
SSL - Secure Sockets Layer. Provides secure encrypted communications  
between the switch management application (GUI) and the switch. SSL  
must be enabled for configuration of security and RADIUS servers with the  
switch management application (GUI). SSL certificates are generated on the  
switch with the switch date/time and validated with the workstation’s  
date/time. If the Switch and workstation date/time are not in sync, invalid  
certificates will be generated and prevent an SSL connection from being  
established between the switch and switch management application (GUI).  
To disable SSL when using a user authentication RADIUS server, the  
RADIUS authentication order must first be set to Local.  
„
„
Telnet - Command line interface. Allows users to manage the switch through  
a Telnet command line interface session. Disabling Telnet access to the  
switch is not recommended.  
SSH - Secure SHell. Provides secure encrypted Telnet command line  
interface sessions with the switch. Note that you will have to have an SSH  
client running on your workstation in order to manage your switch with Telnet  
command line interface when SSH is enabled.  
„
„
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol. Allows management of the  
switch through third-party applications that use SNMP.  
NTP - Network Time Protocol. Allows the switch to obtain its time and date  
settings from an NTP server. Configuring all of your switches and your  
workstations to utilize NTP will keep their date/time settings in sync and will  
prevent difficulties with SSL certificates and event logs.  
„
„
CIM - Common Information Model. Allows management of the switch  
through third-party applications that use CIM.  
FTP - File Transfer Protocol. Allows file transfers to the switch via FTP. FTP  
is required for out-of-band firmware uploads which will complete faster than  
in-band Firmware uploads.  
„
Management Server - Allows management of the switch through third-party  
applications that use GS-3 Management Server.  
4.7.5  
Security Consistency Checklist Dialog  
The Security Consistency Checklist dialog enables you to compare  
security-related features on switches in order to check for inconsistencies. Any  
changes must be made through the appropriate dialog, such as Network  
Properties dialog, Switch Properties dialog, or SNMP Properties dialog. To open  
the Security Consistency Checklist dialog, open the faceplate display, open the  
Switch menu and select Security Consistency Checklist.  
4-28  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.6  
Network Properties  
Use the Network Properties dialog shown in Figure 4-13 to change IP  
configuration parameters and enable remote logging. After making changes, click  
the OK button to put the new values into effect. To open the Network Properties  
dialog, select a switch in the topology display or open the faceplate display, open  
the Switch menu and select Network Properties.  
Figure 4-13. Network Properties Dialog  
59022-11 A  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.6.1  
IP Configuration  
The IP configuration identifies the switch on the Ethernet network and determines  
which network discovery method to use. Table 4-6 describes the IP configuration  
parameters.  
Table 4-6. IP Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Network  
Description  
Choose one of the following methods by which to assign the IP  
address:  
Discovery  
„ Static - Uses the IP configuration parameters entered in the  
Switch Properties dialog.  
„ BootP - Acquires the IP configuration from a BootP server.  
„ RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) - Acquires the IP  
address from an RARP server. An RARP request is broadcast  
with up to three retries, each at 5 second intervals. If no IP  
address is obtained, the switch reverts to the previously  
configured IP address.  
„ DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - Acquires the IP  
configuration from a DHCP server. If no satisfactory lease is  
obtained, the DHCP client attempts to use the previously  
configured lease. If the previous lease cannot be used, no IP  
address will be assigned to this switch in order to avoid an IP  
address conflict. The DHCP server must then be made available.  
If a BootP, RARP, or DHCP server is not available, the switch will  
attempt to use a previously assigned valid lease. If no lease was  
ever assigned, the switch will attempt to use the previously assigned  
static IP address.  
IP Address  
Subnet mask  
Gateway  
Internet Protocol (IP) address for the Ethernet port. The default value  
is 10.0.0.1.  
Subnet mask address for the Ethernet port. The default value is  
255.0.0.0.  
IP gateway address. The default value is 10.0.0.254.  
4-30  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.6.2  
Remote Logging  
The Remote Logging (syslog) feature enables saving of the log information to a  
remote host that supports the syslog protocol. When enabled, the log entries are  
sent to the syslog host at the IP address that you specify in the Logging Host IP  
Address field. Log entries are saved in the internal switch log whether this feature  
is enabled or not.  
To save log information to a remote host, you must edit the syslog.conf file  
(located on the remote host) and then restart the syslog daemon. Consult your  
operating system documentation for information on how to configure Remote  
Logging. The syslog.conf file on the remote host must contain an entry that  
specifies the name of the log file in which to save error messages. Add the  
following line to the syslog.conf file. A <tab> separates the selector field  
(local0.info) and action field which contains the log file path name  
(/var/adm/messages/messages.name).  
local0.info <tab> /var/adm/messages.name  
4.7.6.3  
NTP Client  
The NTP Client feature allows switches to synchronize their date and time with a  
centralized server. NTP client ensures the consistency of date and time stamps in  
alarms and log entries. An Ethernet connection to NTP server is required. Refer to  
”Setting the Date/Time and Enabling NTP Client” on page 4-17 for more  
information.  
59022-11 A  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.7  
SNMP Properties  
Use the SNMP Properties dialog shown in Figure 4-14 to change SNMP  
configuration parameters. After making changes, click the OK button to put the  
new values into effect. To open the SNMP Properties dialog, select a switch in the  
topology display or open the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select  
SNMP Properties.  
Note:  
Since Read Community, Trap Community, and Write Community  
settings are like passwords and are write-only fields, the current  
settings are displayed as asterisks.  
Figure 4-14. SNMP Properties Dialog  
4-32  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.7.1  
SNMP Configuration  
The SNMP configuration defines how authentication traps are managed.Table 4-7  
describes the SNMP configuration parameters. The illegal characters for the  
user-defined fields are the pound sign (#), semi-colon (;), and comma (,).  
Table 4-7. SNMP Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
SNMP Enabled Enables or disables SNMP communication with other switches in the  
fabric.  
Contact  
Specifies the name (up to 64 characters) of the person who is to be  
contacted to respond to trap events. The default is “undefined”.  
Read  
Community  
Read community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to read information from the switch. This is a write-only  
field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server  
must be the same. The default is “public”.  
Trap Community Trap community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to receive traps. This is a write-only field. The value on  
the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same.  
The default is “public”.  
SNMP Proxy  
If enabled, you can use SNMP to monitor and configure any switch in  
the fabric.  
Location  
Specifies the name (up to 64 characters) for the switch location. The  
default is “undefined”.  
Authentication  
Trap  
Enables or disables the reporting of SNMP authentication failures. If  
enabled, a notification trap is sent when incorrect community string  
values are used. The default value is False.  
Write  
Community  
Write community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to write information to the switch. This is a write-only  
field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server  
must be the same. The default is “private”.  
59022-11 A  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
0
4.7.7.2  
SNMP Trap Configuration  
The SNMP trap configuration defines how traps are set. Choose from the tabs  
Trap1 – Trap 5 to configure each trap. Table 4-8 describes the SNMP  
configuration parameters.  
Table 4-8. SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Trap Version  
Specifies the SNMP version (1 or 2) with which to format traps.  
Enables or disables the trap. If disabled, traps are not configurable.  
Trap 1 Enabled  
Trap Address1  
Specifies the IP address to which SNMP traps are sent. A maximum  
of 5 trap addresses are supported. The default address for trap 1 is  
10.0.0.254. The default address for traps 2–5 is 0.0.0.0.  
Trap Port1  
The port number on which the trap is sent. The default is 162.  
Trap Severity  
Specifies a severity level to assign to the trap. Open the pull-down  
menu and choose a level. The Trap 1 Enabled check box on the  
Network Properties dialog must be enabled to access this pull-down  
menu. Trap severity levels include Unknown, Emergency, Alert,  
Critical, Error, Warning, Notify, Info, Debug, and Mark  
1Trap address (other than 0.0.0.0) and trap port combinations must be unique. For example, if trap 1  
and trap 2 have the same address, then they must have different port values. Similarly, if trap 1 and  
2 have the same port value, they must have different addresses.  
4-34  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Archiving a Switch  
0
4.8  
Archiving a Switch  
You can create an .XML archive file containing the configuration parameters.  
Basically any data received by SANsurfer Switch Manager is archived. However,  
passwords are not archived with the user account information. Archived  
parameters include the following:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Switch properties and statistics  
IP configuration  
SNMP configuration  
Port properties and statistics  
Alarm configuration  
Zoning configuration  
Configured security  
RADIUS Server information  
This archive file can be used to restore the configuration on the same switch or on  
a replacement switch. You can also use the archive file as a template for  
configuring new switches to add to a fabric. Security settings and user account  
information are not archived. The archive can be used later to restore the switch.  
Refer to ”Restoring a Switch” on page 4-36 for more information.  
To archive a switch, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select Archive.  
In the Save dialog, enter a file name.  
Click the Save button.  
59022-11 A  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring a Switch  
0
4.9  
Restoring a Switch  
Restoring a switch loads the archived switch configuration parameters to the  
switch. The switch configuration must be archived before it can be restored. The  
switch archive must be compatible with the switch to be restored; that is, you can  
restore a SANbox2-8c switch only with an archive from a SANbox2-8c switch.  
Refer to ”Archiving a Switch” on page 4-35 for more information.  
CAUTION!  
The switch being restored should be physically disconnected  
from the fabric. Restoring a switch in a fabric can severely  
disrupt the fabric. After the restore process is complete, the  
switch can be reconnected to the fabric.  
To restore a switch, do the following:  
1.  
Log in to the fabric through the switch you want to restore. You cannot  
restore a switch over an ISL.  
2.  
Open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select Restore to display  
the Restore dialog shown in Figure 4-15. The Restore dialog offers a Full  
Restore and a Selective Restore tab.  
Figure 4-15. Restore Dialogs – Full and Selective  
4-36  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring a Switch  
0
3.  
4.  
Enter the archive file name or browse for the file. This archive file must be  
one that was produced by the SANsurfer Switch Manager Archive function.  
Configuration backup files created with the Config Backup command are not  
compatible with the SANsurfer Switch Manager Restore function.  
To restore all configuration settings, click the Full Restore tab, then click the  
Restore button. To restore selected configuration settings, click the  
Selective Restore tab and check one or more of the following boxes, then  
click the Restore button:  
„
Network Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Network  
properties dialog except the IP address. Refer to ”Network Properties”  
on page 4-29.  
„
„
IP Address: Restores switch IP address in addition to the other  
network properties.  
Switch Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Switch  
properties dialog except the domain ID. Refer to ”Switch Properties” on  
page 4-20.  
„
„
„
„
„
Domain ID: Restores switch domain ID in addition to the other switch  
properties.  
Port Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Port properties  
dialog. Refer to ”Configuring Ports” on page 5-10.  
Configured Zoning: Restores all configured zone sets, zones, and  
aliases in the switch’s zoning database excluding the active zone set.  
Configured Security: Restores all security sets in the switch  
database.  
Radius Server: Restores all RADIUS Server information defined in the  
switch database.  
5.  
6.  
If you select the Configured Zoning or Full Restore option and the file  
contains zone sets, a dialog prompts you to activate one of those zone sets.  
Click the Yes button, and select a zone set from the drop-down menu in the  
Select Zone Set to be Activated dialog.  
Click the OK button and view the results in the top pane of the Restore  
dialog.  
59022-11 A  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  
0
4.10  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  
You can restore the switch and port configuration settings to the factory default  
values. To restore the factory configuration on a switch, open the Switch menu  
and select Restore Factory Defaults. Table 4-9 lists the factory default switch  
configuration settings.  
Restoring the switch to the factory default configuration does not restore the  
account name and password settings. To restore user accounts, you must select  
the Reset Password File option in the maintenance menu. Refer to “Recovering  
a Switch” in the Installation Guide for your switch for information about  
maintenance mode and the maintenance menu.  
Table 4-9. Factory Default Configuration Settings  
Setting  
Value  
Symbolic name  
SANbox2  
Online  
1
Administrative state  
Domain ID  
Domain ID Lock  
False  
True  
In-band Management  
Broadcast Support  
Resource Allocation Timeout (RA TOV)  
Interop Mode  
Enable  
10000 milliseconds  
True  
I/O Stream Guard  
Device Scan Enabled  
Error Detect Timeout (ED TOV)  
SNMP Enabled  
Disabled  
True  
2000 milliseconds  
True  
SNMP Proxy  
True  
IP address  
10.0.0.1  
True  
FDMI Enabled  
FDMI HBA Entry Level  
Subnet mask address  
Gateway address  
Network Discovery  
1000  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.254  
Static  
4-38  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Downloading a Support File  
0
Table 4-9. Factory Default Configuration Settings (Continued)  
Setting  
Value  
Remote Logging  
False  
Remote Logging host IP address  
Contact  
10.0.0.254  
Undefined  
False  
NTP Client Enabled  
NTP Server IP Address  
Location  
10.0.0.254  
Undefined  
False  
Trap enabled  
Trap Port  
162  
Trap Address  
Trap 1: 10.0.0.254; Traps 2-5: 0.0.0.0  
Trap Community  
Read Community  
Write community  
Port State  
Public  
Public  
Private  
Online  
Auto-detect  
GL  
Port Speed  
Port Type  
4.11  
Downloading a Support File  
The Download Support File menu option assembles all log files and switch  
memory data into a core dump file (dump_support.tgz). This file can be sent to  
technical support personnel for troubleshooting switch problems. The menu option  
is not accessible (displayed) for switches that don't support the download support  
file function. To create a support file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
On the faceplate display, open the Switch menu, and select Download  
Support File.  
In the Download Support File dialog, click the Browse button to define a  
location for the support file or type the path in the text field.  
Click the Start button to begin the process of creating and downloading the  
support file to your workstation. Observe the status in the Status area.  
After the support file is saved to your workstation, click the Close button to  
close the Download Support File dialog.  
59022-11 A  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Installing Firmware  
0
4.12  
Installing Firmware  
Installing firmware involves loading, unpacking, and activating the firmware image  
on the switch. SANsurfer Switch Manager does this in one operation. To provide  
consistent performance throughout the fabric, ensure that all switches are running  
the same version of firmware.  
The pending firmware version will only differ from the active version during the  
brief period while the switch is resetting to activate the firmware. Firmware  
management tools enable you to install and activate new firmware.  
During a hotreset operation, fabric services will be unavailable for a short period  
(30-75 seconds depending on switch model). To ensure that an NDCLA operation  
is successful, verify that all administrative changes to the fabric (if any) are  
complete. When you need to do NDCLA/hotreset to multiple switches, only  
perform the NDCLA/hotreset on one switch at a time, and allow a 75 second wait  
before performing the NDCLA/hotreset operation on the next switch.  
CAUTION!  
Changes to the fabric may disrupt the NDCLA process.  
Common administrative operations that change the fabric include:  
„
„
Zoning modifications  
Adding, moving or removing devices attached to the switch fabric. This  
includes powering up or powering down attached devices.  
„
Adding, moving or removing ISLs or other connections.  
Management Interfaces:  
After an NDCLA operation is complete, management connections must be  
re-initiated:  
„
„
SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions will re-connect automatically  
Telnet sessions must be restarted manually.  
Applicable Code Versions:  
„
Future switch code releases will be upgraded non-disruptively unless  
specifically indicated in its associated release notes  
„
An NDCLA operation to previous switch code releases is not supported.  
To install firmware, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Load Firmware.  
In the Firmware Upload dialog, click the Browse button to browse and select  
the firmware file to be uploaded.  
4-40  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Hardware Status  
0
3.  
4.  
Click the Start button to begin the firmware load process. You will be shown  
a message warning you that the switch will be reset in order to activate the  
firmware.  
Click the OK button to continue firmware installation or click the Cancel  
button to cancel the firmware installation.  
4.13  
Displaying Hardware Status  
A switch is equipped with the following chassis LEDs that provide hardware status  
information:  
„
Chassis Over Temperature LED - indicates the temperature status of the  
switch.  
„
„
Fan Fail LED - indicates operational status of both fans.  
Heartbeat LED - indicates the status of the internal switch processor and the  
results of the power-on self test (POST).  
„
Input Power LED - indicates the voltage status of the switch.  
In the SANbox2-8c and SANbox2-16 faceplate displays, you can display a  
summary of this status information by placing the cursor on the chassis LED  
cluster as shown in Figure 4-16. Refer to the installation guide for your switch for  
more information about the chassis LEDs.  
Figure 4-16. Hardware Status LEDs  
59022-11 A  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Hardware Status  
0
Notes  
4-42  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Managing Ports  
This section describes the following tasks that manage ports and devices:  
„
„
„
„
Displaying Port Information  
Configuring Ports  
Testing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
5.1  
Displaying Port Information  
Port information is available primarily in the faceplate display shown in Figure 5-1.  
The faceplate display data windows provide information and statistics for switches  
and ports. Use the topology display to view status information on fabrics,  
switches, and links between switches.  
Figure 5-1. Faceplate Display - Port Information  
59022-11 A  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
0
5.1.1  
Monitoring Port Status  
The faceplate display provides the following port related information:  
Port type  
Port operational state  
„
„
„
„
Port speed  
Port media  
To display port number and status information for a port, position the cursor over a  
port on the faceplate display. The status information changes depending on the  
View menu option selected.  
5.1.1.1  
Displaying Port Types  
To display port type status, from the faceplate display, open the View menu, and  
select View Port Types. Table 5-1 lists the possible port types and their  
meanings.  
Table 5-1. Port Types  
Type  
F_Port  
Description  
Fabric port - Supports a single public device (N_Port).  
FL_Port  
Fabric loop port - Self discovers a single device (N_Port) or a loop of up  
to 126 public devices (NL_Port).  
G_Port  
Generic port - Self discovers as an F_Port or an E_Port.  
GL_Port  
Generic loop port - Self discovers as an F_Port, FL_Port, or an E_Port.  
GL_Port is the default port type. A single device on a public loop will  
attempt to configure as an F_Port first, then if that fails, as an FL_Port.  
Donor  
Donor port - Allows buffer credits to be used by another port.  
5-2  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
0
5.1.1.2  
Displaying Port Operational States  
To display the operational state on each port in the faceplate display, open the  
View menu and select View Port States. Table 5-2 lists the possible operational  
states and their meanings. The port operational state refers to actual port state  
and not the administrative state you may have assigned.  
Table 5-2. Port Operational States  
State  
Description  
On  
Ia  
Online – port is active and ready to send data.  
Inactive – port operational state is offline, but administrative state is  
online.  
Iso  
Off  
Isolated – E_Port has lost its connection. Refer to ”Port Information  
Data Window” on page 5-7 for information about why the E_Port has  
isolated.  
Offline – port is active, can receive signal, but cannot accept a device  
login.  
Dia  
Dn  
Diagnostics – port is in diagnostics mode in preparation for testing  
Down – the port is disabled, power is removed from the lasers, and  
can’t be logged in.  
5.1.1.3  
Displaying Port Speeds  
To display the speed of each port in the faceplate display, open the View menu  
and select View Port Speeds. Table 5-3 lists the possible port speeds.  
Table 5-3. Port Speeds  
Speed  
Description  
Au  
1G  
2G  
Auto-detect  
1-Gbps transmission speed  
2-Gbps transmission speed  
59022-11 A  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
0
5.1.1.4  
Displaying Transceiver Media Status  
To display transceiver media status, open the View menu and select View Port  
Media. Table 5-4 lists the port media states and their meanings.  
Table 5-4. Transceiver Media View  
Media Icon  
Description  
Optical SFP (Green), logged-in, active, and ready to send data.  
Optical SFP (Gray), not logged-in, active, can receive signal, but  
cannot accept a device login  
Copper SFP, Offline (Gray)  
Copper SFP, Online (Green)  
None  
Empty port, no transceiver installed  
5.1.2  
Port Statistics Data Window  
The Port Statistics data window displays statistics about port performance. To  
open the Port Statistics window, select one or more ports in the faceplate display  
and click the Port Stats tab below the data window. Table 5-5 describes the Port  
Statistics data window entries.  
The Statistics pull-down menu is available on the Port Statistics data window, and  
provides different ways to view detailed port information. Click the down arrow to  
open the pull-down menu. Open the pull-down menu and select Absolute to view  
the total count of statistics since the last switch or port reset. Select Rate to view  
the number of statistics counted per second over the polling period. Select  
Baseline to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was  
set. When viewing baseline statistics, click the Clear Baseline button to set the  
current baseline. The baseline will also be set when the switch status changes  
from unreachable to reachable.  
5-4  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
0
Table 5-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Start Time  
Description  
The beginning of the period over which the statistics apply. The  
start time for the Absolute view is not applicable. The start time  
for the Rate view is the beginning of polling interval. The start  
time for the Baseline view is the last time the baseline was set.  
End Time  
Total Time  
Al Init  
The last time the statistics were updated on the display.  
Total time period from start time to end time.  
Number of times the port entered the initialization state.  
AL Init Error  
Number of times the port entered initialization and the  
initialization failed. Increments count when port has a sync  
loss.  
Bad Frames  
Number of frames that were truncated due to a loss of sync or  
the frame didn't end with an EOF.  
Class 2 Frames In  
Class 2 Frames Out  
Class 2 Words In  
Class 2 Words Out  
Class 3 Frames In  
Class 3 Frames Out  
Class 3 Toss  
Number of class 2 frames received by this port.  
Number of class 2 frames transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 2 words received by this port.  
Number of class 2 words transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 3 frames received by this port.  
Number of class 3 frames transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 3 frames that were discarded by this port. A  
frame can be discarded because of detection of a missing  
frame (based on SEQ_CNT), detection of an E_D_TOV  
timeout, receiving a reject frame, or receiving a frame on an  
offline port.  
Class 3 Words In  
Class 3 Words Out  
Decode Errors  
Number of class 3 words received by this port.  
Number of class 3 words transmitted by this port.  
Number of invalid transmission words detected during  
decoding. Decoding is from the 10-bit characters and special K  
characters.  
Ep Connects  
FBusy  
Number of E_Port logins.  
Number of class 2 and class 3 fabric busy (F_BSY) frames  
generated by this port in response to incoming frames. This  
usually indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N_port that  
is preventing delivery of this frame.  
59022-11 A  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
0
Table 5-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Flow Errors  
Number of times a frame is received and all the switch ports  
receive buffers are full. The normal Fabric Login exchange of  
flow control credit should prevent this from occurring. The  
frame will be discarded.  
FReject  
Number of frames, from devices, that have been rejected.  
Frames can be rejected for any of a large number of reasons.  
Invalid CRC  
Number of invalid Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) frames  
detected.  
Invalid Destination  
Address  
Number of address identifier (S_ID, D_ID) errors. AL_PA  
equals non-zero AL_PA found on F_Port.  
Link Failures  
Number of optical link failures detected by this port. A link  
failure is a loss of synchronization or by loss of signal while not  
in the offline state. A loss of signal causes the switch to  
attempt to re-establish the link. If the link is not re-established,  
a link failure is counted. A link reset is performed after a link  
failure.  
LIP (AL_PD,AL_PS)  
LIP(f7,AL_PS)  
Number of F7, AL_PS LIPs, or AL_PD (vendor specific) resets,  
performed.  
This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop. An L_port, identified by  
AL_PS, may have noticed a performance degradation and is  
trying to restore the loop.  
LIP(f7,f7)  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire an AL_PA.  
LIP(f8,AL_PS)  
This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L_port  
identified by AL_PS.  
Login Count  
Number of device logins that have occurred on the switch.  
Number of device logouts that have occurred on the switch.  
Number of loop timeouts.  
Logout Count  
Loop Timeouts  
Loss Of Sync  
Number of synchronization losses (>100 ms) detected by this  
port. A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an  
invalid transmission word.  
Primitive Sequence  
Errors  
Number of bad primitives received by the port.  
Rx Link Resets  
Number of link reset primitives received from an attached  
device.  
Rx Offline Sequences Number of offline sequence primitives received by the port.  
5-6  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
0
Table 5-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Total Errors  
Description  
Total number of primitive and non-primitive port link errors.  
Number of link-reset primitives the transmitted by the port.  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames received.  
Total Link Resets  
Total LIPs Received  
Total LIPs Transmitted Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted.  
Tx Offline Sequences Number of offline primitives transmitted by the port.  
Total Rx Frames  
Total Rx Words  
Total Tx Frames  
Total Tx Words  
Tx Link Resets  
Total number of frames received by the port.  
Total number of words received by the port.  
Total number of frames transmitted by the port.  
Total number of words transmitted by the port.  
Number of link reset primitives sent from this port to an  
attached port.  
Total Offline  
Sequences  
Total number of offline sequences transmitted and received by  
the port.  
5.1.3  
Port Information Data Window  
The Port Information data window displays detail information for the selected port.  
To open the Port Information data window, click the Port Info tab below the data  
window in the faceplate display.  
Table 5-6. Port Information Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Description  
Port Address  
Port Fibre Channel address.  
Administrative Port Type  
The administrative port type (G, GL, F, FL,  
or Donor). This value is persistent; it will  
be maintained during a switch reset.  
During port auto-configuration, it will be  
used to determine which operational port  
states are allowed.  
Operational Port Type  
The port type that is currently active. This  
will be set during port auto-configuration  
based on the administrative port type.  
59022-11 A  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
0
Table 5-6. Port Information Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Administrative Port State  
The port state (Online, Offline,  
Diagnostics, or Down) which has been set  
by the user. This state may be different  
from the configured administrative state if  
the user has not saved it in the switch  
configuration. This state is used at the time  
it is set to try to set the port operational  
state. This value is not persistent and will  
be lost on a switch reset.  
Operational Port State  
The port state that is currently active. This  
value may be different from the  
administrative port state, for example due  
to an error condition.  
Configured Administrative Port State  
The port state (Online, Offline,  
Diagnostics, or Down) which is saved in  
the switch configuration, either by the user  
or at the factory. This value is persistent; it  
will be maintained during a switch reset,  
and will be used after a reset to set the  
port operational state.  
Logged In  
Indicates whether logged in or not.  
E Port Connection Status  
E_Port connection status. Status can be  
None, Connecting, Connected or Isolated.  
E Port Isolation Reason  
MFS Mode  
Why E_Port is isolated.  
Multiple Frame Sequence bundling status.  
I/O Stream Guard  
RSCN message suppression status.  
Status can be enabled, disabled, or  
automatically determined by the switch.  
Administrative Port Speed  
Operational Port Speed  
Max Credits  
The speed requested by the user.  
The speed actually being used by the port.  
The maximum number of credits granted  
to a port that can be used when extending  
port credits.  
Device Scan  
Device scan status. Enabled means the  
switch queries the connected device  
during login for FC-4 descriptor  
information.  
5-8  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
0
Table 5-6. Port Information Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Port symbolic name  
Symbolic Name  
Ext Credits Requested  
Whether extended credits have been  
requested for ports.  
Credits to Donate  
Donor Group  
Number of requested credits.  
The donor group of the selected port.  
Valid Donor Groups  
The number of separate groups within  
which extended credits may be donated  
and assigned.  
Media Speed  
Media Type  
The maximum transceiver speed  
The transceiver fibre type, such as single  
mode, multi-mode, copper.  
Media Transmitter  
Media Distance  
The transceiver transmitter type, such as  
longwave, shortwave, electrical.  
The maximum transceiver transmission  
distance  
Media Vendor  
The company that manufactured the SFP  
The IEEE registered company ID  
The part number assigned to the SFP  
Transceiver hardware version  
Media Vendor ID  
Media Part Number  
Media Revision  
59022-11 A  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
0
5.2  
Configuring Ports  
The port settings or characteristics are configured using the Port Properties dialog  
shown in Figure 5-2. To open the Port Properties dialog, select one or more ports,  
open the Port menu and select Port Properties.  
Figure 5-2. Port Properties Dialog  
The Port Properties dialog displays the switch name and the selected ports. Use  
the Port Properties dialog to change the following parameters:  
„
„
„
„
„
Port state  
Port speed  
Port type  
I/O Stream Guard (RSCN Suppression)  
Device scan  
5-10  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
0
5.2.1  
Changing Port Administrative States  
The port administrative state determines the operational state of a port. The port  
administrative state exists in two forms: the configured administrative state and  
the current administrative state.  
„
The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch  
configuration and is preserved across switch resets. SANsurfer Switch  
Manager always makes changes to the configured administrative state.  
„
The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the port for  
temporary purposes and is not preserved across switch resets. The current  
administrative state is set using the Set Port command. Refer to the ”Set  
Port Command” on page A-75.  
Table 5-7 describes the port administrative states. To change port administrative  
state, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties to open the Port Properties  
dialog.  
3.  
4.  
Click the Port States radio button that corresponds to the port state you  
want.  
Click the OK button to write the new port state to the switch.  
Table 5-7. Port Administrative States  
State  
Online  
Description  
Activates and prepares port to send data.  
Offline  
Prevents port from receiving signal and accepting a device login.  
Diagnostics  
Prepares port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a  
device login.  
Down  
Disables the port.  
59022-11 A  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
0
5.2.2  
Changing Port Speeds  
Ports are capable of transmitting and receiving at 1-Gbps or 2-Gbps. The ports  
can be configured for either transmission speed or to sense the transmission  
speed of the device to which it is connected. Table 5-8 describes the port speeds.  
To change the port speed, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties.  
Click the radio button that corresponds to the port speed you want.  
Click the OK button to write the new port speed to the switch.  
Table 5-8. Port Speeds  
State  
Description  
Auto-Detect  
Matches the transmission speed of the connected device. This is the  
default.  
1Gb  
2Gb  
Sets the transmission speed to 1-Gbps.  
Sets the transmission speed to 2-Gbps.  
5-12  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
0
5.2.3  
Changing Port Types  
The ports can be configured to self-discover the proper type to match the device  
or switch to which it is connected. Table 5-9 describes the port types. To change  
the port type, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties to open the Port Properties  
dialog.  
3.  
4.  
Click the Port Type radio button for the port type you want.  
Click the OK button to write the new port type to the switch.  
Table 5-9. Port Types  
State  
F_Port  
Description  
Fabric port - Supports a single public device (N_Port).  
FL_Port  
Fabric loop port - Self discovers a single device (N_Port) or a loop of up  
to 126 public devices (NL_Port).  
G_Port  
Generic port - Self discovers as an F_Port or an E_Port.  
GL_Port  
Generic loop port - Self discovers as an F_Port, FL_Port, or an E_Port.  
GL_Port is the default port type. A single device on a public loop will  
attempt to configure as an F_Port first, then if that fails, as an FL_Port.  
Donor  
Donor port - Allows buffer credits to be used by another port.  
5.2.4  
I/O Stream Guard  
The I/O Stream Guard feature suppresses the Registered State Change  
Notification (RSCN) messages on a port basis. I/O Stream Guard should be  
enabled only on ports connected to initiator devices. To configure the I/O Stream  
Guard option using the Port Properties dialog, open the Port menu, and select  
Port Properties. Click the radio button that corresponds to one of the following  
options:  
„
Enable: Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages from other ports for  
which I/O Stream Guard is enabled.  
„
„
Disable: Allows free transmission and reception of RSCN messages.  
Auto: Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages when the port is  
connected to an initiator device with a QLogic HBA. For older QLogic HBAs,  
such as the QLA2200, Device Scan must be enabled. The default is Auto.  
59022-11 A  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
5 – Managing Ports  
Using the Extended Credits Wizard  
0
5.2.5  
Device Scan  
The Device Scan feature queries the connected device during login for FC-4  
descriptor information. Disable this parameter only if the scan creates a conflict  
with the connected device.  
5.2.6  
Changing Port Symbolic Name  
To change the symbolic name of a port from the faceplate display, do the  
following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the faceplate display and select a port.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Symbolic Name.  
In the Port Symbolic Name dialog, choose one of the following:  
„
„
Enter a new name for the port in the Set Port Symbolic Name field.  
Check the Restore Default Port Symbolic Name check box to restore  
the default name.  
4.  
Click the OK button.  
5.3  
Using the Extended Credits Wizard  
Each port is supported by a data-buffer with a 12-credit capacity; that is, 12  
maximum sized frames. For fiber optic cables, this enables full bandwidth service  
over a distance of 20 kilometers at 1-Gbps (0.6 credits per Km), or 10 kilometers  
at 2-Gbps (1.2 credits per Km). Longer distances can be spanned at full  
bandwidth by borrowing credits from designated donor ports thus pooling the  
buffer capacities. This is called credit extension. For example, one donor port  
contributes 11 credits to the pool from which a recipient draws 11 for a total of 23  
credits (12+11). This provides approximately 38 Km at 1-Gbps (23÷0.6) or 19 Km  
at 2-Gbps (23÷1.2).  
To extend credits, open the Wizards menu and select Ext Credit Wizard. The  
Extended Credit Wizard leads you through the following process to extend credits  
based on transmission distance requirements:  
1.  
Extended Distance: Explains the concepts and principles of extending port  
credits. Click the Next button.  
2.  
Extended Distance Requirements: Specify speed and distance requirements  
for each port then click the Next button.  
5-14  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 – Managing Ports  
Using the Extended Credits Wizard  
0
3.  
Designate Donor Ports: Select available ports and click >> to move the port  
into the Selected Donor Port column shown in Figure 5-3. Match the number  
of ports needed with the number of designated donor ports. Click the Next  
button.  
Figure 5-3. Designate Donor Ports  
4.  
Verify Requested Changes: Review the extended distance requests and the  
selected donor ports. Click the Finish button to apply the changes, and  
redistribute the credits.  
Note:  
As credits are used, the Logged-In LEDs on the corresponding donor  
ports illuminate continuously. In addition, donor port Activity LEDs will  
reflect the same traffic as the recipient port. Donor ports whose credits  
are being used are unavailable to devices that are connected to them.  
59022-11 A  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 – Managing Ports  
Resetting a Port  
0
5.4  
Resetting a Port  
The Reset Port option reinitializes the port using the saved configuration. To reset  
a port, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, select the ports to be reset.  
Open the Port menu and select Reset Port.  
5.5  
Testing Ports  
The port loopback tests verify correct port operation by sending a frame out  
through the loop, and then verifying that the frame received matches the frame  
that was sent. Only one port can be tested at a time for each type of test. The Port  
Loopback Test dialog shown in Figure 5-4 presents the following loopback tests:  
Figure 5-4. Port Loopback Test Dialog  
„
SerDes level (Internal) - The SerDes level test verifies port circuitry. The  
SerDes level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip  
and back to the ASIC for the selected ports. The port passes the test if the  
frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received.  
This test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode, and therefore,  
disrupts communication.  
5-16  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5 – Managing Ports  
Testing Ports  
0
„
„
SFP level (External) - The SFP level test verifies port circuitry. The SFP  
level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip,  
through the SFP transceiver fitted with an external loopback plug, and back  
to the ASIC for the selected ports. The port passes the test if the test frame  
that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received. This  
test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode, and therefore, disrupts  
communication.  
Node-to-Node (Online) - The Node-to-Node test verifies communications  
between the port and its device node or device loop. The port being tested  
must be online and connected to a remote device. The port passes the test if  
the frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the frame that was received.  
This test does not disrupt communication on the selected port. This test  
requires that the port be online, and therefore, does not disrupt  
communication.  
To run the internal, external, or online port loopback test on a port, do the  
following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, select the port to be tested.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Loopback Test to open the Port  
Loopback Test dialog.  
3.  
4.  
In the Test Selection area, click the radio button for the type of loopback test  
to be run (Internal, External, or Online). If you choose the internal or external  
test, SANsurfer Switch Manager will prompt you to confirm that the port state  
needs to be changed to the diagnostic state. Click the OK button and  
SANsurfer Switch Manager will change the port state.  
Enter the frame count, frame size, and click a test pattern radio button. You  
may use the default pattern or enter an 8-digit pattern (hex). For online test,  
you can check the Terminate Test Upon Error check box if you want the  
test to stop should it encounter an error.  
5.  
6.  
Click the Start Test button to begin the test. The Test Results area displays  
the test status, number of frames sent, and number of errors found.  
To test another port, open the Select Port pull-down menu and select  
another port (number) and test type (Internal, External, or Online) in the Test  
Selection area.  
7.  
Click the Start Test button to begin the next test. Observe the results in the  
Test Results area.  
59022-11 A  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
5.6  
Graphing Port Performance  
SANsurfer Performance Viewer application displays port performance using  
graphs. SANsurfer Performance Viewer plots data communication rates and total  
errors for selected ports as shown in Figure 5-5. When graphing data  
communication rates, you can choose either frames/second or KB/second.  
On Solaris platforms, if you launch the SANsurfer Performance Viewer application  
from the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and SANsurfer Performance  
Viewer can not connect to the fabric, (for example, if you have reached the  
maximum number of SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions on the entry switch),  
then SANsurfer Performance Viewer opens with a blue fabric icon displayed in the  
fabric tree.  
Fabric status is displayed in text format after the fabric name in the fabric tree. The  
color of the icon indicates the current connection status as normal (green),  
warning (yellow), critical (red), or unmanageable (blue).  
Figure 5-5. Fabric View Graphs  
5-18  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
This section describes how to do the following:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Starting SANsurfer Performance Viewer  
Exiting SANsurfer Performance Viewer  
Saving and Opening Performance View Files  
Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key  
Setting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Preferences  
Setting the Polling Frequency  
Displaying Graphs  
Saving Graph Statistics to a File  
5.6.1  
Starting SANsurfer Performance Viewer  
To start SANsurfer Performance Viewer from within SANsurfer Switch Manager,  
open the topology display and select Start Fabric View from the Fabric menu.  
When starting the SANsurfer Performance Viewer application from the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager application on Linux and Solaris platforms, the fabric currently  
displayed in the SANsurfer Switch Manager topology display opens automatically  
in the SANsurfer Performance Viewer topology display. On the Windows platform,  
you will need to manually open the fabric in the SANsurfer Performance Viewer  
topology display.  
Note:  
On the Solaris platform, if you launch the SANsurfer Performance  
Viewer application from the SANsurfer Switch Manager application  
and SANsurfer Performance Viewer can not connect to the fabric, (for  
example, if you have reached the maximum number of SANsurfer  
Switch Manager sessions on the entry switch), then SANsurfer  
Performance Viewer opens with a blue fabric icon displayed in the  
fabric tree. The reason for status displayed after the fabric name in the  
fabric tree will indicate the reason for failure to connect.  
59022-11 A  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
5.6.2  
Exiting SANsurfer Performance Viewer  
To exit a SANsurfer Performance Viewer session, open the File menu and select  
Exit. The current fabric view is automatically saved to your default performance  
view file upon exit, if you have defined an encryption key. The key is encrypted  
and saved with your default performance view file. A performance view file  
contains the set of fabrics that have been added and the graphs that have been  
opened during a SANsurfer Performance Viewer session. If you have not yet  
defined an encryption key, the Save Default Performance View File dialog, shown  
in Figure 5-6, prompts you to save the current view file as the default performance  
view file. Refer to ”Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key”  
on page 5-22 for information about defining and changing this encryption key.  
In the Save Default Performance File dialog, enter an encryption key in the  
Default File Encryption Key field. Re-enter the encryption key in the Re-enter  
Encryption Key to Confirm field. Click the OK button to save the current set of  
fabrics to the default performance view file in the working directory.  
To prevent SANsurfer Performance Viewer from prompting you to save the default  
performance view file between sessions, set the Auto Load and Save Graphing  
Environment setting to Enable (default). Refer to ”Setting SANsurfer Performance  
Viewer Preferences” on page 5-22 for more information.  
Figure 5-6. Save Default Performance View File Dialog  
5-20  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
In your next SANsurfer Performance Viewer session, the Load Default View File  
dialog shown in Figure 5-7 prompts you to load the default performance view file  
and to specify its encryption key, if there is one. In the Default File Encryption Key  
field, enter the encryption key and click the Load View File button. If you do not  
want to load the default performance view file, click the Continue Without  
Loading button to open the SANsurfer Performance Viewer with no fabric  
displayed.  
Figure 5-7. Load Default Performance File Dialog  
5.6.3  
Saving and Opening Performance View Files  
In addition to the SANsurfer Performance Viewer default performance file, you  
can save and open your own performance view files. The performance view file  
contains the set of fabrics, graphs, and graphing options. To save a performance  
view file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Save View As to open the Save View dialog.  
Enter a name for the performance view file or click the Browse button to  
select an existing file. Files are saved in the working directory.  
3.  
Enter a password. When you attempt to open this performance view file, you  
will be prompted for this password. If you leave the File Password field  
blank, no password is required.  
To open a performance view file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Open View File to open the Open View  
dialog.  
2.  
Enter a name for the performance view file or click the Browse button to  
select an existing file.  
59022-11 A  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
5.6.4  
Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key  
To change the encryption key for the default performance view file, do the  
following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Save Default Performance View File to  
open the Save Default Performance View File dialog.  
2.  
3.  
Enter the new encryption key in the Default File Encryption Key field.  
Re-enter the same encryption key in the Re-enter Encryption Key to Confirm  
field.  
4.  
Click the OK button to save the changes.  
5.6.5  
Setting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Preferences  
To set preferences, open the File menu and select Preferences to open the  
Preferences dialog shown in Figure 5-8. Set the following preferences and click  
the OK button to save the changes:  
„
„
„
Change the location of the working directory in which to save files  
Change the location of the browser used to view the online help.  
Enable or disable the Auto Load and Auto Save Graphing Options  
preference. When enabled, SANsurfer Performance Viewer prompts you to  
save and load the default fabric file between sessions. Refer to ”Exiting  
SANsurfer Performance Viewer” on page 5-20 for more information on the  
default performance view file.  
„
Enable or disable the Display Dialog When Making Non-secure Connections  
checkbox. If enabled, the Non-secure Connections Check dialog is  
displayed when you attempt to open a non-secure fabric. You then have the  
option of opening a non-secure fabric. If disabled, you cannot open a fabric  
with a non-secure connection ).  
Figure 5-8. Preferences – SANsurfer Performance Viewer  
5-22  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
5.6.6  
Setting the Polling Frequency  
SANsurfer Performance Viewer updates the graphs once per second by default.  
To change this polling frequency, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Graph menu, and select Set Polling Frequency to open the Set  
Graph Polling Frequency dialog.  
2.  
Enter the new polling interval in seconds [1–60]. SANsurfer Performance  
Viewer will update the graphs once during the interval. For example, setting  
the polling frequency to 5 seconds will return 1 second’s worth of data every  
5 seconds.  
3.  
Click the OK button to save the changes.  
5.6.7  
Displaying Graphs  
To display graphs, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Add Fabric or click the Add button. Enter  
a fabric name and an IP address in the Add a New Fabric dialog. Include an  
account name and a password if required.  
2.  
Set the graphing options and polling frequency. By default, SANsurfer  
Performance Viewer plots total bytes transmitted and received at a polling  
frequency of once per second. Refer to ”Customizing Graphs” on page 5-24  
for information about changing what is plotted and how it is plotted.  
3.  
4.  
You can display graphs in the following ways:  
„
„
Click on a switch entry handle and select one or more ports.  
Right click on a switch icon in the fabric tree and select Open Graph  
for All Ports on Switch or Open Graph for All Logged-In Ports on  
Switch from the pull-down menu.  
You can move graphs around individually by clicking and dragging, or you  
can arrange them as a group. Refer to ”Arranging Graphs in the Display” on  
page 5-24 for more information.  
To remove a graph, click the graph Remove button. To remove all graphs, open  
the Window menu and select Close All.  
To remove a fabric and its graphs, select the fabric in the fabric tree, then select  
Remove Fabric from the Fabric menu. You can also right click on a fabric and  
select Remove Fabric for the popup menu.  
Right clicking on a graph opens a popup menu from which you can change graph  
options, print a graph, or save the graph statistics to a file.  
59022-11 A  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
5.6.7.1  
Arranging Graphs in the Display  
To arrange and size graphs in the display, open the Window menu and select  
Cascade, Tile, or Close All.  
„
„
„
Cascade overlaps the graphs so that all graphs are at least partially visible.  
Tile arranges the graphs in non-overlapping rows and columns.  
Close All closes all graphs.  
You can also click a graph on the Window menu to bring that graph to the front.  
5.6.7.2  
Customizing Graphs  
You can customize the graph polling frequency, what is plotted in the graphs, and  
the graph color scheme. To set the polling frequency for all graphs, open the  
Graph menu and select Set Polling Frequency.... Enter an interval in seconds  
(0–60) in the dialog box and click the OK button.  
To choose what is to be plotted, open the Graph menu and select Modify Graph  
Options.... You can also right click on a graph and select Change Graph  
Options. This opens the Default Graph Options dialog shown in Figure 5-9.  
Figure 5-9. Default Graph Options Dialog  
5-24  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
To modify the graph options, do the following:  
1.  
Choose the units for the graph:  
„
Select the Show Bytes Data on Graph check box to plot data in  
KBytes/second  
„
Select the Show Frames Data on Graph check box to plot data in  
frames/second.  
2.  
Choose what data type to plot. For example, if you selected Show Frames  
Data on Graph in step 1., you can plot one or all of the following:  
„
„
„
Total frames transmitted and received (Total Frames)  
Total frames transmitted (Total Tx Frames)  
Total frames received (Total Rx Frames)  
In addition to these, you can also plot total errors by selecting the Total  
Errors check box.  
3.  
4.  
Display or hide the unit grid. Select the Display Grid on Graph check box to  
display the unit grid.  
Choose the color scheme for the graph. Click a Select Color button to open  
its corresponding Select Color dialog, which allows you to select a new color  
scheme. You can select the color for each data type, the unit grid, and the  
background by clicking the corresponding color field or button. In each case,  
you can choose a color using the Swatches, Red-Green-Blue (RGB), or  
Hue-Saturation-Brightness (HSB) method.  
Note:  
Clicking the Reset button in the Swatches, HSB, and RGB tab  
pages of the Select Color dialogs will reset the colors in the  
Preview area to the last saved color scheme. At this point you  
are only selecting a new color scheme to be saved.  
„
„
Swatches – Click the Swatches tab. Select a swatch from the palette.  
HSB – Click the HSB tab. Select a color using any of the following:  
‰
Click in the color palette.  
‰
‰
Select the H, S, or B button and use the slide to vary the value.  
Enter values in the H, S, or B input fields.  
„
RGB – Click the RGB tab. Select a color by moving the slides to adjust  
the values for red, blue, and green; or enter values in the input fields.  
5.  
6.  
In the Default Graph Options dialog, click the corresponding radio button to  
apply changes to all graphs, the currently selected graph, or all new graphs.  
In the Default Graph Options dialog, click the OK button to save the color  
scheme changes and close the dialog.  
59022-11 A  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
0
5.6.7.3  
Setting Global Graph Type  
The Set Global Graph Type option enables you to view port activity using two  
types of graphs:  
„
„
Line Graph - plots continuous port activity in horizontal line format.  
Bar Graph - the last polling value received by the application in bar graph  
format.  
To set the global graph type, open the Graph menu and select Line Bar or Bar  
Graph.  
5.6.7.4  
Rescaling a Selected Graph  
The Rescale Selected Graph option auto-scales downward and re-positions the  
data within a graphic window to display all new data captured by the graph. To  
rescale a selected graph, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select a displayed graph.  
Open the Graph menu and select Rescale Selected Graph, or right-click on  
the graph and select Rescale from the popup menu.  
3.  
4.  
View the data in the graph window.  
Click the Save button.  
5.6.7.4.1  
Printing Graphs  
To print a graph, select a graph, then open the File menu and select Print Graph  
Window. You can also right click on a graph and select Print Graph Window  
from the popup menu.  
5.6.8  
Saving Graph Statistics to a File  
Statistics for one or all graphs can be saved to a file that can be opened with a  
spreadsheet application. To save a graph statistics file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select a graph.  
Open the File menu, and select Save Current Graph Statistics to a File to  
save the selected graph or select Save All Graph Statistics to a File. You  
can also right click on a graph and select Save Statistics to File.  
3.  
4.  
In the Save dialog, enter a path name for the file. By default, the file is saved  
in the working directory.  
Click the Save button.  
5-26  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix A  
Command Line Interface  
The command line interface (CLI) enables you to perform a variety of fabric and  
switch management tasks through an Ethernet or a serial port connection. This  
section describes the following:  
„
„
„
„
Logging On to a Switch  
User Accounts  
Working with Switch Configurations  
Commands  
A.1  
Logging On to a Switch  
To log on to a switch using Telnet, open a command line window on the  
workstation and enter the Telnet command followed by the switch IP address:  
# telnet ip_address  
A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login. Enter an account name and  
password.  
To log on to a switch through the serial port, configure the workstation port with the  
following settings:  
„
„
„
„
9600 baud  
8-bit character  
1 stop bit  
No parity  
Enter an account name and password when prompted.  
59022-11 A  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
User Accounts  
0
A.2  
User Accounts  
Switches come from the factory with the following user account already defined:  
Account name: admin  
Password: password  
Authority: Admin  
This user account provides full access to the switch and its configuration. After  
planning your fabric management needs and creating your own user accounts,  
consider changing the password for this account.  
„
„
Refer to ”Commands” on page A-6 for information about authority levels.  
Refer to the ”User Command” on page A-120 for information about creating  
user accounts.  
„
Refer to ”Passwd Command” on page A-40 for information about changing  
passwords.  
Note:  
A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions  
reserved as follows:  
„ 4 logins or sessions for internal applications such as management  
server and SNMP  
„ 9 high priority Telnet sessions  
„ 6 logins or sessions for SANsurfer Switch Manager inband and  
out-of-band logins, Application Programming Interface (API)  
inband and out-of-band logins, and Telnet logins. Additional logins  
will be refused.  
A.3  
Working with Switch Configurations  
Successful management of switches and fabrics with the command line interface  
depends on the effective use of switch configurations. Modifying configurations,  
backing up configurations, and restoring configurations are key switch  
management tasks.  
A-2  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Working with Switch Configurations  
0
A.3.1  
Modifying a Configuration  
A switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration.  
Each switch configuration contains switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning  
configuration components. The Show Switch command displays the name of the  
active configuration. A configuration name can have up to 31 characters excluding  
the pound symbol (#), semicolon (;), and comma (,). By editing the latest  
configuration and saving the results under a new name, you can create a history  
of configuration changes. Use the Config List command to display the  
configurations stored on the switch  
SANbox2 #> config list  
Current list of configurations  
------------------------------  
default  
config_10132003  
To modify a switch configuration you must open an Admin session with the Admin  
Start command. An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes  
at the same time either through Telnet or SANsurfer Switch Manager. You must  
also open a Config Edit session with the Config Edit command and indicate which  
configuration you want to modify. If you do not specify a configuration name the  
active configuration is assumed. The Config Edit session provides access to the  
Set Config commands with which you make modifications to the port, switch, port  
threshold alarm, or zoning configuration components as shown:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit default  
The config named default is being edited.  
SANbox2 (admin-config)#> set config port . . .  
SANbox2 (admin-config)#> set config switch . . .  
SANbox2 (admin-config)#> set config threshold . . .  
SANbox2 (admin-config)#> set config zoning . . .  
The Config Save command saves the changes you made during the Config Edit  
session. In this case, changes to the configuration named Default are being saved  
to a new configuration named config_10132003. However, the new configuration  
does not take effect until you activate it with the Config Activate command:  
SANbox2 (admin-config)#> config save config_10132003  
SANbox2 (admin)#> config activate config_10132003  
SANbox2 (admin)#> admin end  
The Admin End command releases the Admin session for other administrators  
when you are done making changes to the switch.  
59022-11 A  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Working with Switch Configurations  
0
A.3.2  
Backing up and Restoring Switch Configurations  
Backing up and restoring a configuration is useful to protect your work or for use  
as a template in configuring other switches. The Config Backup command creates  
a file on the switch, named configdata. This file can be used to restore a switch  
configuration only from the command line interface; it cannot be used to restore a  
switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager.  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config backup  
The configdata file contains all of the switch configuration information including  
the following:  
„
All named switch configurations including the default configuration. This  
includes port, switch, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration  
components.  
„
„
All SNMP and network information defined with the Set Setup command.  
The zoning database included all zone sets, zones, and aliases  
You use FTP to download the configdata file to your workstation for safe keeping  
and to upload the file back to the switch for the restore function. To download the  
configdata file, open an FTP session on the switch and login with the account  
name images and password images. Transfer the file in binary mode with the Get  
command as shown:  
>ftp ip_address  
user:images  
password: images  
ftp>bin  
ftp>get configdata  
xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs.  
ftp>quit  
You should rename the configdata file on your workstation with the switch name  
and date, config_switch_169_10112003, for example.  
A-4  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Working with Switch Configurations  
0
The restore operation begins with FTP to upload the configuration file from the  
workstation to the switch, then finishes with a Telnet session and the Config  
Restore command. To upload the configuration file, config_switch_169_10112003  
in this case, open and FTP session with account name images and password  
images. Transfer the file in binary mode with the Put command as shown:  
ftp ip_address  
user:images  
password: images  
ftp> bin  
ftp> put config_switch_169_10112003 configdata  
Local file config_switch_169_10112003  
Remote file configdata  
ftp>quit  
The restore process replaces all configuration information on the switch and  
afterwards the switch is automatically reset. If the restore process changes the IP  
address, all management sessions are terminated. Use the Set Setup System  
command to return the IP configuration to the values you want. Refer to the ”Set  
Setup Command” on page A-77. To restore the switch, open a Telnet session,  
then enter the Config Restore command from within an Admin session as shown:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config restore  
The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration.  
Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
59022-11 A  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Commands  
0
A.4  
Commands  
The command syntax is as follows:  
command  
keyword  
keyword [value]  
keyword [value1] [value2]  
The Command is followed by one or more keywords. Consider the following rules  
and conventions:  
„
„
Commands and keywords are case insensitive.  
Required keyword values appear in standard font: [value]. Optional values  
are shown in italics: [value].  
„
Underlined portions of the keyword in the command format indicate the  
abbreviated form that can be used. For example the Delete keyword can be  
abbreviated Del.  
The command-line completion feature makes entering and repeating commands  
easier. Table A-1 describes the command-line completion keystrokes.  
Table A-1. Command-Line Completion  
Keystroke  
Tab  
Effect  
Completes the command line. Enter at least one character and press  
the tab key to complete the command line. If more than one possibility  
exists, press the Tab key again to display all possibilities.  
Up Arrow  
Down Arrow  
Control-A  
Control-E  
Scrolls backward through the list of previously entered commands.  
Scrolls forward through the list of previously entered commands.  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line  
Moves the cursor to the end of the command line.  
A-6  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Commands  
0
The command set performs monitoring and configuration tasks. Commands  
related to monitoring tasks are available to all account names. Commands related  
to configuration tasks are available only within an admin session. An account  
must have Admin authority to enter the Admin Start command, which opens an  
admin session. Refer to the ”Admin Command” on page A-8.  
The commands and their page numbers are listed in Table A-2.  
Table A-2. Commands Listed by Authority Level  
Monitoring Commands  
Configuration Command  
Help  
History  
Ping  
Ps  
Quit  
Show  
Show Config  
Show Log  
Show Perf  
Show Setup  
Uptime  
(A-33)  
(A-34)  
(A-41)  
(A-42)  
(A-43)  
(A-87)  
(A-103)  
(A-106)  
(A-109)  
(A-111)  
(A-119)  
(A-123)  
Admin  
(A-8)  
Admin Session Commands  
Alias1  
CIM1  
CIMListener  
CIMSubscription  
Config1  
Create  
Date1  
Firmware Install  
Group1  
Hardreset  
Hotreset  
Image  
Lip  
Passwd  
Reset  
Security  
Securityset1  
Set1  
Set Config  
Set Log  
Set Port1  
Set Setup  
Shutdown  
Test  
(A-9)  
(A-11)  
(A-12)  
(A-14)  
(A-16)  
(A-19)  
(A-22)  
(A-23)  
(A-24)  
(A-32)  
(A-35)  
(A-36)  
(A-39)  
(A-40)  
(A-44)  
(A-52)  
(A-56)  
(A-58)  
(A-60)  
(A-71)  
(A-75)  
(A-77)  
(A-115)  
(A-116)  
(A-120)  
(A-124)  
(A-128)  
(A-130)  
Whoami  
2
User1  
Zone1  
Zoneset1  
Zoning1  
1Some keywords do not require an Admin session.  
2 Some keywords can be executed only by the Admin account name.  
59022-11 A  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Admin Command  
0
Admin Command  
Opens and closes an Admin session. The Admin session provides commands  
that change the fabric and switch configurations. Only one Admin session can be  
open on the switch at any time. An inactive Admin session will time out after a  
period of time which can be changed using the Set Setup System command.  
Refer to the ”Set Setup Command” on page A-77.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
admin  
start (or begin)  
end (or stop)  
cancel  
Keywords start (or begin)  
Opens the admin session.  
end (or stop)  
Closes the admin session. The Hardreset, Hotreset, Logout, Shutdown, and  
Reset Switch commands will also end an admin session.  
cancel  
Terminates an Admin session opened by another user. Use this keyword with care  
because it terminates the Admin session without warning the other user and  
without saving pending changes.  
Notes  
Closing a Telnet window during an admin session does not release the session. In  
this case, you must either wait for the admin session to time out, or use the Admin  
Cancel command.  
Examples The following example shows how to open and close an Admin session:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #>  
.
.
.
SANbox2 (admin) #> admin end  
SANbox2 #>  
A-8  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Alias Command  
0
Alias Command  
Creates a named set of ports/devices. Aliases make it easier to assign a set of  
ports/devices to many zones. An alias can not have a zone or another alias as a  
member.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session for all keywords except List and Members  
alias  
add [alias] [member_list]  
copy [alias_source] [alias_destination]  
create [alias]  
delete [alias]  
list  
members [alias]  
remove [alias] [member_list]  
rename [alias_old] [alias_new]  
Keywords add [alias] [member_list]  
Specifies one or more ports/devices given by [member_list] to add to the alias  
named [alias]. Use a <space> to delimit ports/devices in [member_list]. An alias  
can have a maximum of 2000 members. A port/device in [member_list] can have  
any of the following formats:  
„
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can  
be 1–-239; port numbers can be 0–-255.  
„
„
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
The application verifies that the [alias] format is correct, but does not validate that  
such a port/device exists.  
copy [alias_source] [alias_destination]  
Creates a new alias named [alias_destination] and copies the membership into it  
from the alias given by [alias_source].  
create [alias]  
Creates an alias with the name given by [alias]. An alias name must begin with a  
letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 aliases.  
delete [alias]  
Deletes the specified alias given by [alias] from the zoning database. If the alias is  
a member of the active zone set, the alias will not be removed from the active  
zone set until the active zone set is deactivated.  
list  
Displays a list of all aliases. This keyword does not require an admin session.  
59022-11 A  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Alias Command  
0
members [alias]  
Displays all members of the alias given by [alias]. This keyword does not require  
an admin session.  
remove [alias] [member_list]  
Removes the ports/devices given by [member_list] from the alias given by [alias].  
Use a <space> to delimit ports/devices in [member_list]. A port/device in  
[member_list] can have any of the following formats:  
„
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can  
be 1–-239; port numbers can be 0–-255.  
„
„
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) for the device with  
the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
rename [alias_old] [alias_new]  
Renames the alias given by [alias_old] to the alias given by [alias_new].  
A-10  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
CIM Command  
0
CIM Command  
Manages CIM listener and subscription configurations on the switch. Refer to the  
”CIMListener Command” on page A-12 for information about creating and  
modifying CIM listeners. Refer to the ”CIMSubscription Command” on page A-14  
for information about creating and modifying CIM subscriptions.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
cim  
cancel  
clear  
edit  
limits  
save  
Keywords cancel  
Terminates the current CIM edit session without saving changes that were made.  
clear  
Clears all CIM listener and subscription configurations from the switch.  
edit  
Opens a CIM edit session.  
limits  
Displays the maximum allowed number of CIM listeners, subscriptions, and  
subscriptions per listener. This keyword does not require an Admin session nor a  
CIM edit session.  
save  
Saves all changes made during the current CIM edit session.  
Examples The following is an example of the CIM Edit command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> cim edit  
SANbox2 (admin-cim) #> cimlistener create CIM_listener_1  
.
.
.
SANbox2 (admin-cim) #> cim save  
The following is an example of the CIM Limits command:  
SANbox2 #> cim limits  
Cim Attribute  
Maximum  
-------------  
-------  
MaxListeners  
32  
50  
6
MaxSubscriptions  
MaxSubscriptionsPerListener  
59022-11 A  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
CIMListener Command  
0
CIMListener Command  
Configures CIM indication service listeners and adds subscriptions to listeners.  
Refer to the ”CIMSubscription Command” on page A-14 for information about  
configuring subscriptions.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session and a CIM Edit session. Refer to the ”CIM Command” on  
page A-11 for information about opening a CIM edit session.  
cimlistener  
add [listener_name] [subscription_list]  
create [listener_name]  
delete [listener_name]  
edit [listener_name]  
Keywords add [listener_name] [subscription_list]  
Adds the set of subscriptions given by [subscription_list] to the listener given by  
[listener_name]. Use a <space> to delimit subscription names in  
[subscription_list].  
create [listener_name]  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to create a CIM listener with the name given  
by [listener_name]. [listener_name] can have up to 32 characters: 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _,  
$, ^, and -. The CIM listener configuration parameters are described in Table A-3.  
Table A-3. CIM Listener Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Description  
Listener name  
Listener type:  
Type  
„ Permanent – Send indications to the CIM client whether a  
connection can be established or not. This is the default.  
„ Transient – Sends indications to the CIM client, but ceases  
if a connection cannot be established after 60 minutes.  
URL  
IP address of the CIM client and the port number to which to send  
indications. The default is 10.0.0.1:5000.  
delete [listener_name]  
Deletes the listener given by [listener_name] from the CIM database.  
edit [listener_name]  
Opens an editing session in which you can modify the CIM listener given by  
[listener_name]. Refer to Table A-3 for a description of the CIM listener  
configuration parameters.  
A-12  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
CIMListener Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the CIMListener Create command:  
SB5602-91.54 (admin-cim) #> cimlistener create listener_1  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Name listener_1  
Type (2=Permanent, 3=Transient)  
URL (IP address:port format)  
[Permanent  
]
[10.0.0.1:5000]  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved with the cim save command  
before it can take effect, or to discard this configuration  
use the cim cancel command.  
59022-11 A  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
CIMSubscription Command  
0
CIMSubscription Command  
Creates, edits, or removes CIM subscriptions.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session and a CIM Edit session. Refer to the ”CIM Command” on  
page A-11 for information about opening a CIM edit session.  
cimsubscription  
create [subscription_name]  
delete [subscription_name]  
edit [subscription_name]  
Keywords create [subscription_name]  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to create a CIM subscription with the name  
given by [subscription_name]. [subscription_name] can have up to 32 characters:  
0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -. Table A-4 describes the CIM subscription configuration  
parameters.  
Table A-4. CIM Subscription Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Name  
Description  
Subscription name.  
FilterID  
Event type for which the switch monitors and sends an indication to  
the CIM client. The event types are as follows:  
„ CreateComputerSystem – A switch is added to the fabric. This  
is the default.  
„ ModifyComputerSystem – A switch state change.  
„ DeleteComputerSystem – A switch is removed from the fabric.  
„ CreateFCPort – Not supported.  
„ ModifyFCPort – A Fibre Channel port state change.  
„ DeleteFCPort – Not supported.  
EnabledState  
Duration  
Enable (True) or disable (False) the subscription. The default is  
True.  
Subscription life span in seconds. The subscription life span begins  
when the subscription is created. Expired subscriptions do not send  
indications to the CIM client though they remain in the CIM  
database. Values can be 1–720000. 0 indicates indefinite, which is  
the default.  
delete [subscription_name]  
Deletes the subscription given by [subscription_name] from the CIM database.  
edit [subscription_name]  
Opens an editing session in which you can modify the CIM subscription given by  
[subscription_name]. Refer to Table A-4 for a description of the CIM subscription  
configuration parameters.  
A-14  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
CIMSubscription Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the CIMSubscription Create command:  
SANbox2 (admin-cim) #> cimsubscription create subscription_1  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
FilterID values: 1 = Create:ComputerSystem  
2 = Modify:ComputerSystem  
3 = Delete:ComputerSystem  
4 = Create:FCPort  
5 = Modify:FCPort  
6 = Delete:FCPort  
Name  
subscription_1  
FilterID  
(see allowed options above)  
[Create:ComputerSystem]  
EnabledState (True / False)  
[True  
]
]
Duration  
(decimal value, 0-720000 secs, 0=forever) [0  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved with the cim save command  
before it can take effect, or to discard this configuration  
use the cim cancel command.  
59022-11 A  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
0
Config Command  
Manages the Fibre Channel configurations on a switch. For information about  
setting the port and switch configurations, refer to the ”Set Config Command” on  
page A-60.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session for all keywords except List  
config  
activate [config_name]  
backup  
cancel  
copy [config_source] [config_destination]  
delete [config_name]  
edit [config_name]  
list  
restore  
save [config_name]  
Keywords activate [config_name]  
Activates the configuration given by [config_name]. If you omit [config_name], the  
currently active configuration is used. Only one configuration can be active at a  
time.  
backup  
Creates a file named configdata, which contains the system configuration  
information. To download this file, open an FTP session, log in with account  
name/password of “images” for both, and type “get configdata”. Refer to ”Backing  
up and Restoring Switch Configurations” on page A-4.  
cancel  
Terminates the current configuration edit session without saving changes that  
were made.  
copy [config_source] [config_destination]  
Copies the configuration given by [config_source] to the configuration given by  
[config_destination]. The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the  
default configuration.  
delete [config_name]  
Deletes the configuration given by [config_name] from the switch. You cannot  
delete the default configuration (Default Config) nor the active configuration.  
edit [config_name]  
Opens an edit session for the configuration given by [config_name]. If you omit  
[config_name], the currently active configuration is used.  
list  
Displays a list of all available configurations on the switch. This keyword does not  
require an admin session.  
A-16  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
0
restore  
Restores configuration settings to an out-of-band switch from a backup file named  
configdata, which must be first uploaded on the switch using FTP. You create the  
backup file using the Config Backup command. Use FTP to load the backup file  
on a switch, then enter the Config Restore command. After the restore is  
complete, the switch automatically resets. Refer to ”Backing up and Restoring  
Switch Configurations” on page A-4.  
Note:  
„ If the restore process changes the IP address, all management  
sessions are terminated. Use the Set Setup System command to  
return the IP configuration to the values you want. Refer to the ”Set  
Setup Command” on page A-77.  
„ Configuration archive files created with the SANsurfer Switch  
Manager Archive function are not compatible with the Config  
Restore command.  
save [config_name]  
Saves changes made during a configuration edit session in the configuration  
given by [config_name]. If you omit [config_name], the value for [config_name]  
you chose for the most recent Config Edit command is used. [config_name] can  
be up to 31 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The switch  
supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration.  
Notes  
If you edit the active configuration, changes will be held in suspense until you  
reactivate the configuration or activate another configuration.  
Examples The following shows an example of how to open and close a Config Edit session:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
The config named default is being edited.  
.
.
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> config cancel  
Configuration mode will be canceled. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
SANbox2 (admin) #> admin end  
59022-11 A  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
0
The following is an example of how to create a backup file (configdata) and  
download the file to the workstation.  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config backup  
SANbox2 (admin) #> admin end  
SANbox2 #> exit  
#>ftp symbolic_name or ip_address  
user: images  
password: images  
ftp> bin  
ftp> get configdata  
ftp> quit  
The following is an example of how to upload a configuration backup file  
(configdata) from the workstation to the switch, and then restore the configuration.  
#> ftp symbolic_name or ip_address  
user: images  
password: images  
ftp> bin  
ftp> put configdata  
ftp> quit  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config restore  
The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration.  
Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
Alarm Msg: [day month date time year][A1005.0021][SM][Configuration is being  
restored - this could take several minutes !]  
Alarm Msg: [day month date time year][A1000.000A][SM][The switch will be reset in  
3 seconds due to a config restore]  
SANbox2 (admin) #>  
Alarm Msg: [day month date time year][A1000.0005][SM][The switch is being reset]  
Good bye.  
A-18  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Create Command  
0
Create Command  
Creates support files for troubleshooting switch problems, and certificates for  
secure communications for SANsurfer Switch Manager.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
create  
certificate  
support  
Keywords certificate  
Creates a security certificate on the switch. The security certificate is required to  
establish an SSL connection with a management application such as SANsurfer  
Switch Manager. The certificate is valid 24 hours before the certificate creation  
date and expires 365 days after the creation date. Should the current certificate  
become invalid, use the Create Certificate command to create a new one.  
Note:  
To insure the creation of a valid certificate, be sure that the switch and  
the workstation time and date are the same. Refer to the following:  
„
”Date Command” on page A-22 for information about setting the  
time and date  
„ ”Set Command” on page A-58 (Timezone keyword) for information  
about setting the time zone on the switch and workstation  
„ ”Set Setup Command” on page A-77 (System keyword) for  
information about enabling the Network Time Protocol for  
synchronizing the time and date on the switch and workstation  
from an NTP server.  
support  
Assembles all log files and switch memory data into a core dump file  
(dump_support.tgz) on the switch. If your workstation has an FTP server, you can  
proceed with the command prompts to send the file from the switch to a remote  
host. Otherwise, you can use FTP to download the support file from the switch to  
your workstation. The support file is useful to technical support personnel for  
troubleshooting switch problems. Use this command when directed by your  
authorized maintenance provider.  
Examples The following is an example of the Create Support command when an FTP server  
is available on the workstation:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> create support  
Log Msg:[Creating the support file - this will take several seconds]  
FTP the dump support file to another machine? (y/n): y  
Enter IP Address of remote computer: 10.20.33.130  
Login name: johndoe  
Enter remote directory name: bin/support  
59022-11 A  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Create Command  
0
Would you like to continue downloading support file? (y/n) [n]: y  
Connected to 10.20.33.130 (10.20.33.130).  
220 localhost.localdomain FTP server (Version wu-2.6.1-18) ready.  
331 Password required for johndoe.  
Password: xxxxxxx  
230 User johndoe logged in.  
cd bin/support  
250 CWD command successful.  
lcd /itasca/conf/images  
Local directory now /itasca/conf/images  
bin  
200 Type set to I.  
put dump_support.tgz  
local: dump_support.tgz remote: dump_support.tgz  
227 Entering Passive Mode (10,20,33,130,232,133)  
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for dump_support.tgz.  
226 Transfer complete.  
43430 bytes sent in 0.292 secs (1.5e+02 Kbytes/sec)  
Remote system type is UNIX.  
Using binary mode to transfer files.  
221-You have transferred 43430 bytes in 1 files.  
221-Total traffic for this session was 43888 bytes in 1 transfers.  
221 Thank you for using the FTP service on localhost.localdomain.  
The following is an example of the Create Support command and how to  
download the support file to your workstation. When prompted to send the support  
file to another machine, decline, then close the Telnet session. Open an FTP  
session on the switch and log in with the account name images and password  
images. Transfer the dump_support.tgz file in binary mode with the Get  
command.  
SANbox2 (admin) #> create support  
Log Msg:[Creating the support file - this will take several seconds]  
FTP the dump support file to another machine? (y/n): n  
SANbox2 (admin) #> quit  
>ftp switch_ip_address  
user:  
images  
password: images  
ftp>bin  
ftp>get dump_support.tgz  
xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs.  
ftp>quit  
A-20  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Create Command  
0
The following is an example of the Create Certificate command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> create certificate  
The current date and time is day mon date hh:mm:ss UTC yyyy.  
This is the time used to stamp onto the certificate.  
Is the date and time correct? (y/n): [n] y  
Certificate generation successful.  
59022-11 A  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Date Command  
0
Date Command  
This command displays or sets the system date and time. To set the date and time  
the information string must be provided in this format: MMDDhhmmCCYY. The  
new date and time takes effect immediately.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session except to display the date.  
date  
[MMDDhhmmCCYY]  
Keywords [MMDDhhmmCCYY]  
Specifies the date – this requires an admin session. If you omit  
[MMDDhhmmCCYY], the current date is displayed which does not require an  
admin session.  
Notes  
Network Time Protocol (NTP) must be disabled to set the time with the Date  
command. Refer to the ”Set Setup Command” on page A-77, System keyword, for  
information about NTP.  
When setting the date and time on a switch that is enabled for SSL connections,  
the switch time must be within 24 hours of the workstation time. Otherwise, the  
connection will fail.  
Examples The following is an example of the Date command:  
SANbox2 #> date  
Mon Apr 07 07:51:24 2003  
A-22  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Firmware Install Command  
0
Firmware Install Command  
Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch, installs the firmware, then  
resets the switch (without a power-on self test) to activate the firmware. If  
possible, a non-disruptive activation is performed. The command prompts you for  
the following:  
„
„
„
IP address of the remote host  
An account name and password on the remote host  
Pathname for the firmware image file  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
firmware install  
Examples The following is an example of the Firmware Install command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> firmware install  
Warning: Installing new firmware requires a switch reset.  
A stable farbic is required to successfully activate the firmware on a  
switch without disrupting traffic. Therefore, before continuing with  
this action, ensure there are no administrative changes in progress  
anywhere in the fabric.  
Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions,  
including any Telnet sessions. When the firmware activation is complete,  
you may log in to the switch again.  
Do you want to continue? [y/n]: y  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
User Account  
IP Address  
: johndoe  
: 10.20.33.130  
Source Filename : 5.0.00.11_x86  
About to install image. Do you want to continue? [y/n] y  
Connected to 10.20.33.130 (10.20.33.130).  
220 localhost.localdomain FTP server (Version wu-2.6.1-18) ready.  
331 Password required for johndoe.  
Password: xxxxxxxxx  
230 User johndoe logged in.  
bin  
200 Type set to I.  
verbose  
Verbose mode off.  
This may take several seconds...  
The switch will now reset.  
Connection closed by foreign host.  
59022-11 A  
A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Group Command  
0
Group Command  
Creates groups, manages membership within the group, and manages the  
membership of groups in security sets.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session and a Security Edit session. Refer to the ”Security Command” on  
page A-52 for information about starting a Security Edit session. The List,  
Members, Securitysets, and Type keywords are available without an Admin  
session.  
group  
add [group]  
copy  
create [group] [type]  
delete [group]  
edit [group] [member]  
list  
members [group]  
remove [group] [member_list]  
rename [group_old] [group_new]  
securitysets [group]  
type [group]  
A-24  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Group Command  
0
Keywords add [group]  
Initiates an editing session in which to specify a group member and its attributes  
for the existing group given by [group]. ISL, Port, and MS member attributes are  
described in Table A-5, Table A-6, and Table A-7 respectively. The group name  
and group type attributes are read-only fields common to all three tables.  
Table A-5. ISL Group Member Attributes  
Attribute  
Member  
Description  
Worldwide name of the switch that would attach to the switch. A  
member cannot belong to more than one group.  
Authentication  
Primary Hash  
Enables (CHAP) or disables (None) authentication using the  
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). The default  
is None.  
The preferred hash function to use to decipher the encrypted  
Primary Secret sent by the ISL member. The hash functions are  
MD5 or SHA-1. If the ISL member does not support the Primary  
Hash, the switch will use the Secondary Hash.  
Primary Secret  
Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash for  
authentication with the ISL group member. The string has the  
following lengths depending on the Primary Hash function:  
„ MD5 hash: 16-byte  
„ SHA-1 hash: 20-byte  
Secondary Hash Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary Secret  
sent by the ISL group member. Hash values are MD5 or SHA-1. The  
Secondary Hash is used when the Primary Hash is not available on  
the ISL group member. The Primary Hash and the Secondary Hash  
cannot be the same.  
Secondary  
Secret  
Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and sent for  
authentication. The string has the following lengths depending on  
the Secondary Hash function:  
„ MD5 hash: 16-byte  
„ SHA-1 hash: 20-byte  
Binding  
Domain ID of the switch to which to bind the ISL group member  
worldwide name. This option is available only if  
FabricBindingEnabled is set to True using the Set Config Security  
command. Refer to the ”Set Config Command” on page A-60.  
0 (zero) specifies no binding.  
59022-11 A  
A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Group Command  
0
Table A-6. Port Group Member Attributes  
Attribute  
Description  
Member  
Port worldwide name for the N_Port device that would attach to the  
switch. A member cannot belong to more than one group.  
Authentication  
Primary Hash  
Enables (CHAP) or disables (None) authentication using the  
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). The default  
is None.  
The preferred hash function to use to decipher the encrypted  
Primary Secret sent by the Port group member. The hash functions  
are MD5 or SHA-1. If the Port group member does not support the  
Primary Hash, the switch will use the Secondary Hash.  
Primary Secret  
Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash for  
authentication with the Port group member. The string has the  
following lengths depending on the Primary Hash function:  
„ MD5 hash: 16-byte  
„ SHA-1 hash: 20-byte  
Secondary Hash Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary Secret  
sent by the Port group member. Hash values are MD5 or SHA-1.  
The Secondary Hash is used when the Primary Hash is not  
available on the Port group member. The Primary Hash and the  
Secondary Hash cannot be the same.  
Secondary  
Secret  
Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and sent for  
authentication. The string has the following lengths depending on  
the Secondary Hash function:  
„ MD5 hash: 16-byte  
„ SHA-1 hash: 20-byte  
A-26  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Group Command  
0
Table A-7. MS Group Member Attributes  
Attribute  
Member  
Description  
Port worldwide name for the N_Port device that would attach to  
the switch.  
CTAuthentication  
Common Transport (CT) authentication. Enables (True) or  
disables (False) authentication for MS group members. The  
default is False.  
Hash  
The hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secret sent  
by the MS group member. Hash values are MD5 or SHA-1.  
Secret  
Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Hash function for  
authentication with MS group members. The string has the  
following lengths depending on the Hash function:  
„ MD5 hash: 16-byte  
„ SHA-1 hash: 20-byte  
copy [group_source] [group_destination]  
Creates a new group named [group_destination] and copies the membership into  
it from the group given by [group_source].  
create [group] [type]  
Creates a group with the name given by [group] with the type given by [type]. A  
group name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid  
characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -. The security database supports a  
maximum of 16 groups. If you omit [type], ISL is used. [type] can be one of the  
following:  
ISL  
Configures security for attachments to other switches.  
Port  
Configures security for attachments to N_Port devices.  
MS  
Configures security for attachments to N_Port devices that are issuing  
management server commands.  
59022-11 A  
A-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Group Command  
0
edit [group] [member]  
Initiates an editing session in which to change the attributes of a worldwide name  
given by [member] in a group given by [group]. Member attributes that can be  
changed are described in Table A-8:  
Table A-8. Group Member Attributes  
Attribute  
Authentication  
Description  
Enables (CHAP) or disables (None) authentication using the  
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP).  
(ISL and Port Groups)  
CTAuthentication  
(MS Groups)  
CT authentication. Enables (True) or disables (False)  
authentication for MS group members. The default is False.  
Primary Hash  
(ISL and Port Groups)  
The preferred hash function to use to decipher the  
encrypted Primary Secret sent by the member. The hash  
functions are MD5 or SHA-1. If the member does not  
support the Primary Hash, the switch will use the Secondary  
Hash.  
Hash  
(MS Groups)  
The hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secret  
sent by the MS group member. Hash values are MD5 or  
SHA-1.  
Primary Secret  
(ISL and Port Groups)  
Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash  
for authentication with the member. The string has the  
following lengths depending on the Primary Hash function:  
„ MD5 hash: 16-byte  
„ SHA-1 hash: 20-byte  
Secondary Hash  
(ISL and Port Groups)  
Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary  
Secret sent by the group member. Hash values are MD5 or  
SHA-1. The Secondary Hash is used when the Primary  
Hash is not available on the group member. The Primary  
Hash and the Secondary Hash cannot be the same.  
Secondary Secret  
(ISL and Port Groups)  
Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and  
sent for authentication. The string has the following lengths  
depending on the Secondary Hash function:  
„ MD5 hash: 16-byte  
„ SHA-1 hash: 20-byte  
A-28  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Group Command  
0
Table A-8. Group Member Attributes  
Attribute  
Description  
Secret  
(MS Groups)  
Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Hash function  
for authentication with MS group members. The string has  
the following lengths depending on the Hash function:  
„ MD5 hash: 16-byte  
„ SHA-1 hash: 20-byte  
Binding  
(ISL Groups)  
Domain ID of the switch to which to bind the ISL group  
member worldwide name. This option is available only if  
FabricBindingEnabled is set to True using the Set Config  
Security command. Refer to the ”Set Config Command” on  
page A-60. 0 (zero) specifies no binding.  
list  
Displays a list of all groups and the security sets of which they are members. This  
keyword is available without an Admin session.  
members [group]  
Displays all members of the group given by [group]. This keyword is available  
without an Admin session.  
remove [group] [member_list]  
Remove the port/device worldwide name given by [member] from the group given  
by [group]. Use a <space> to delimit multiple member names in [member_list]  
rename [group_old] [group_new]  
Renames the group given by [group_old] to the group given by [group_new].  
securitysets [group]  
Displays the list of security sets of which the group given by [group] is a member.  
This keyword is available without an Admin session.  
type [group]  
Displays the group type for the group given by [group]. This keyword is available  
without an Admin session.  
Notes  
Refer to the ”Securityset Command” on page A-56 for information about  
managing groups in security sets.  
59022-11 A  
A-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Group Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the Group Add command:  
SANbox2 (admin-security) #> group add Group_1  
A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value  
with exception of the Group Member WWN field which is mandatory.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Group Name  
Group Type  
Member  
Group_1  
ISL  
(WWN)  
[00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00]  
Authentication (None / Chap)  
[None  
[MD5  
]
]
]
]
]
]
PrimaryHash  
(MD5 / SHA-1)  
PrimarySecret  
SecondaryHash  
(32 hex or 16 ASCII char value) [  
(MD5 / SHA-1 / None) [None  
SecondarySecret (40 hex or 20 ASCII char value) [  
Binding (domain ID 1-239, 0=None) [0  
Finished configuring attributes.  
To discard this configuration use the security cancel command.  
The following is an example of the Group Edit command:  
SANbox2 (admin-security) #> group edit G1 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:90:a3  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Group Name  
g1  
Group Type  
ISL  
Group Member  
Authentication  
PrimaryHash  
PrimarySecret  
SecondaryHash  
SecondarySecret  
Binding  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:90:a3  
(None / Chap)  
(MD5 / SHA-1)  
[None] chap  
[MD5 ] sha-1  
(40 hex or 20 ASCII char value) [  
] 12345678901234567890  
(MD5 / SHA-1 / None)  
[None] md5  
(32 hex or 16 ASCII char value) [  
] 1234567890123456  
]
(domain ID 1-239, 0=None)  
[3  
Finished configuring attributes.  
To discard this configuration use the security cancel command.  
A-30  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Group Command  
0
The following is an example of the Group List command:  
SANbox2 #> group list  
Group  
SecuritySet  
-----------  
-----  
group1 (ISL)  
alpha  
group2 (Port)  
alpha  
The following is an example of the Group Members command:  
SANbox2 #> group members group1  
Current list of members for Group: group1  
----------------------------------  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:71:ed  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:72:45  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:90:ef  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:b8:b7  
59022-11 A  
A-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Hardreset Command  
0
Hardreset Command  
Resets the switch and performs a power-on self test. This reset disrupts traffic,  
activates the pending firmware, and clears the alarm log. To save the alarm log  
before resetting, refer to the ”Set Log Command” on page A-71.  
Authority  
Admin session  
Syntax  
Notes  
hardreset  
To reset the switch without a power-on self test, refer to the ”Reset Command” on  
page A-44.  
To reset the switch without disrupting traffic, refer to the ”Hotreset Command” on  
page A-35.  
A-32  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Help Command  
0
Help Command  
Displays a brief description of the specified command, its keywords, and usage.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
help [command] [keyword]  
Keywords [command]  
Displays a summary of the command given by [command] and its keywords. If you  
omit [command], the system displays all available commands.  
[keyword]  
Displays a summary of the keyword given by [keyword] belonging to the  
command given by [command]. If you omit [keyword], the system displays the  
available keywords for the specified command.  
all  
Displays a list of all available commands (including command variations).  
Examples The following is an example of the Help Config command:  
SANbox2 #> help config  
config CONFIG_OPTIONS  
The config command operates on configurations.  
Usage: config  
{ activate | backup  
edit | list  
| cancel  
| copy  
| delete  
|
| restore | save }  
The following is an example of the Help Config Edit command:  
SANbox2 #> help config edit  
config edit [CONFIG_NAME]  
This command initiates a configuration session and places the current session  
into config edit mode.  
If CONFIG_NAME is given and it exists, it gets edited; otherwise, it gets  
created. If it is not given, the currently active configuration is edited.  
Admin mode is required for this command.  
Usage: config edit [CONFIG_NAME]  
59022-11 A  
A-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
History Command  
0
History Command  
Displays a numbered list of the previously entered commands from which you can  
re-execute selected commands.  
Authority  
None  
Syntax  
Notes  
history  
Use the History command to provide context for the ! command:  
„
„
„
„
Enter ![command_string] to re-execute the most recent command that  
matches [command_string].  
Enter ![line number] to re-execute the corresponding command from the  
History display  
Enter ![partial command string] to re-execute a command that matches the  
command string.  
Enter !! to re-execute the most recent command.  
Examples The following is an example of the History command:  
SANbox2 #> history  
1 show switch  
2 date  
3 help set  
4 history  
SANbox2 #> !3  
help set  
set SET_OPTIONS  
There are many attributes that can be set.  
Type help with one of the following to get more information:  
Usage: set  
{ alarm  
port  
| beacon  
| setup  
| config  
| log  
| pagebreak |  
| switch }  
A-34  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Hotreset Command  
0
Hotreset Command  
Resets the switch for the purpose of activating the pending firmware without  
disrupting traffic. This command terminates all management sessions, saves all  
configuration information, and clears the event log. After the pending firmware is  
activated, the configuration is recovered. This process takes less than 80  
seconds. To save the event log to a file before resetting, refer to the ”Set Log  
Command” on page A-71.  
Authority  
Admin session  
Syntax  
Notes  
hotreset  
„
You can load and activate version 5.0.x firmware on an operating switch  
without disrupting data traffic or having to re-initialize attached devices under  
the following conditions:  
‰
The current firmware version is a 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, or 5.x version  
that precedes the upgrade version.  
‰
No changes are being made to switches in the fabric including  
powering up, powering down, disconnecting or connecting ISLs, and  
switch configuration changes.  
‰
‰
‰
No port in the fabric is in the diagnostic state.  
No zoning changes are being made in the fabric.  
No changes are being made to attached devices including powering  
up, powering down, disconnecting, connecting, and HBA configuration  
changes.  
„
„
Ports that are stable when the non-disruptive activation begins, then change  
states, will be reset. When the non-disruptive activation is complete,  
SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions reconnect automatically. However,  
Telnet sessions must be restarted manually.  
This command clears the event log and all counters.  
59022-11 A  
A-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Image Command  
0
Image Command  
Manages and installs switch firmware.  
Admin session  
image  
cleanup  
Authority  
Syntax  
fetch [account_name] [ip_address] [file_source] [file_destination]  
install  
list  
unpack [file]  
Keywords cleanup  
Removes all firmware image files from the switch. All firmware image files are  
removed automatically each time the switch is reset.  
fetch [account_name] [ip_address] [file_source] [file_destination]  
Retrieves image file given by [file_source] and stores it on the switch with the file  
name given by [file_destination]. The image file is retrieved from the FTP server  
with the IP address given by [ip_address] and an account name given by  
[account_name]. If an account name needs a password to access the FTP server,  
the system will prompt you for it.  
install  
Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch, installs the firmware, then  
resets the switch (without a power-on self test) to activate the firmware. If  
possible, a non-disruptive activation is performed. The command prompts you for  
the following:  
„
„
„
IP address of the remote host  
An account name and password on the remote host  
Pathname for the firmware image file  
list  
Displays the list of image files that reside on the switch.  
unpack [file]  
Installs the firmware file given by [file]. After unpacking the file, a message  
appears confirming successful unpacking. The switch must be reset for the new  
firmware to take effect.  
A-36  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Image Command  
0
Notes  
To provide consistent performance throughout the fabric, ensure that all switches  
are running the same version of firmware.  
To install firmware when the management workstation has an FTP server, use the  
Image Install command or the ”Firmware Install Command” on page A-23. To  
install firmware when the management workstation does not have an FTP server,  
do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Connect to the switch through the Ethernet port or the serial port.  
Move to the folder or directory on the workstation that contains the new  
firmware image file.  
3.  
Establish communications with the switch using the File Transfer Protocol  
(FTP). Enter one of the following on the command line:  
>ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
or  
>ftp switchname  
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the switch IP address, and switchname is the  
switch name associated with the IP address.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Enter the following account name and password:  
user:images  
password: images  
Activate binary mode and copy the firmware image file on the switch:  
ftp>bin  
ftp>put filename  
Wait for the transfer to complete, then close the FTP session.  
xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs.  
ftp>quit  
Establish communications with the switch using the CLI. Enter one of the  
following on the command line:  
telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
or  
telnet switchname  
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the switch IP address, and switchname is the  
switch name associated with the IP address.  
8.  
A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login. Enter an account name  
and password. The default account name and password are (admin,  
password).  
59022-11 A  
A-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Image Command  
0
9.  
Open an Admin session to acquire the necessary authority.  
SANbox2 $>admin start  
10. Display the list of firmware image files on the switch to confirm that the file  
was loaded.  
SANbox2 (admin) $>image list  
11. Unpack the firmware image file to install the new firmware in flash memory.  
SANbox2 (admin) $>image unpack filename  
12. Wait for the unpack to complete.  
image unpack command result: Passed  
13. A message will prompt you to reset the switch to activate the firmware.  
Resetting the switch is disruptive. Use the Hotreset command to attempt a  
non-disruptive activation.  
SANbox2 (admin) $>hotreset  
Examples The following is an example of the Image Install command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> image install  
Warning: Installing new firmware requires a switch reset.  
Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions,  
including any Telnet sessions. When the firmware activation is complete,  
you may log in to the switch again.  
Do you want to continue? [y/n]: y  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
User Account  
IP Address  
: johndoe  
: 10.20.33.130  
Source Filename : 5.0.00.11_x86  
About to install image. Do you want to continue? [y/n] y  
Connected to 10.20.33.130 (10.20.33.130).  
220 localhost.localdomain FTP server (Version wu-2.6.1-18) ready.  
331 Password required for johndoe.  
Password: xxxxxxxxx  
230 User johndoe logged in.  
bin  
200 Type set to I.  
verbose  
Verbose mode off.  
This may take several seconds...  
The switch will now reset.  
Connection closed by foreign host.  
A-38  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Lip Command  
0
Lip Command  
Reinitializes the specified loop port.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
lip [port_number]  
Keywords [port_number]  
The number of the port to be reinitialized. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
Examples The following is an example of the Lip command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> lip 2  
59022-11 A  
A-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Passwd Command  
0
Passwd Command  
Changes a user account’s password.  
Authority  
Admin account name and an admin session to change another account’s  
password; You can change you own password without an Admin session.  
Syntax  
passwd [account_name]  
Keywords [account_name]  
The user account name. To change the password for an account name other than  
your own, you must open an admin session with the account name Admin. If you  
omit [account_name], you will be prompted to change the password for the  
current account name.  
Examples The following is an example of the Passwd command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> passwd user2  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
account OLD password  
: ********  
account NEW password (8-20 chars) : ********  
please confirm account NEW password: ********  
password has been changed.  
A-40  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Ping Command  
0
Ping Command  
Initiates an attempt to communicate with another switch over an Ethernet network  
and reports the result.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
ping [ip_address]  
Keywords [ip_address]  
The IP address of the switch to query. Broadcast IP addresses, such as  
255.255.255.255, are not valid.  
Examples The following is an example of a successful Ping command:  
SANbox2 #> ping 10.20.11.57  
Ping command issued. Waiting for response...  
SANbox2 #>  
Response successfully received from 10.20.11.57.  
This following is an example of an unsuccessful Ping command:  
SANbox2 #> ping 10.20.10.100  
Ping command issued. Waiting for response...  
No response from 10.20.10.100. Unreachable.  
59022-11 A  
A-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Ps Command  
0
Ps Command  
Displays current system process information.  
None  
ps  
Authority  
Syntax  
Examples The following is an example of the Ps command:  
SANbox2 #> ps  
PID PPID %CPU  
TIME  
ELAPSED COMMAND  
338  
339  
340  
341  
342  
343  
344  
345  
346  
347  
348  
349  
350  
351  
352  
404  
405  
406  
327 0.0 00:00:00 3-01:18:35 cns  
327 0.0 00:00:01 3-01:18:35 ens  
327 0.0 00:00:21 3-01:18:35 dlog  
327 0.1 00:05:35 3-01:18:35 ds  
327 0.2 00:11:29 3-01:18:35 mgmtApp  
327 0.0 00:00:04 3-01:18:35 fc2  
327 0.0 00:02:16 3-01:18:35 nserver  
327 0.0 00:02:44 3-01:18:35 mserver  
327 0.8 00:35:12 3-01:18:35 util  
327 0.0 00:00:29 3-01:18:35 snmpservicepath  
327 0.0 00:02:46 3-01:18:34 eport  
327 0.0 00:00:21 3-01:18:34 PortApp  
327 5.6 04:08:24 3-01:18:34 port_mon  
327 0.0 00:01:38 3-01:18:34 zoning  
327 0.0 00:00:01 3-01:18:34 diagApp  
327 0.0 00:00:04 3-01:18:27 snmpd  
327 0.0 00:00:02 3-01:18:27 snmpmain  
405 0.0 00:00:00 3-01:18:26 snmpmain  
A-42  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Quit Command  
0
Quit Command  
Closes the Telnet session.  
None  
quit, exit, or logout  
Authority  
Syntax  
Notes  
You can also enter Control-D to close the Telnet session.  
59022-11 A  
A-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
0
Reset Command  
Resets the switch configuration parameters. If you omit the keyword, the default is  
Reset Switch.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
reset  
config [config_name]  
factory  
port [port_number]  
radius  
security  
services  
snmp  
switch (default)  
system  
zoning  
Keywords config [config_name]  
Resets the configuration given by [config_name] to the factory default values for  
switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration as described in  
Table A-9 through Table A-12. If [config_name] does not exist on the switch, a  
configuration with that name will be created. If you omit [config_name], the active  
configuration is reset. You must activate the configuration for the changes to take  
effect. for switch, port, and port threshold alarm configuration default values.  
factory  
Resets switch configuration, port configuration, port threshold alarm configuration,  
zoning configuration, SNMP configuration, system configuration, security  
configuration, RADIUS configuration, switch services configuration, and zoning to  
the factory default values as described in Table A-9 through Table A-17. The  
switch configuration is activated automatically.  
Note:  
Because this keyword changes network parameters, the  
workstation could lose communication with the switch and  
release the Admin session.  
port [port_number]  
Reinitializes the port given by [port_number]. Ports are numbered beginning  
with 0.  
radius  
Resets the RADIUS configuration to the default values as described in  
Table A-14.  
security  
Clears the security database and deactivates the active security set. The security  
configuration value, autosave, and fabric binding remain unchanged.  
A-44  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
0
services  
Resets the switch services configuration to the default values as described in  
Table A-15.  
snmp  
Resets the SNMP configuration settings to the factory default values. Refer to  
Table A-13 for SNMP configuration default values.  
switch  
Resets the switch without a power-on self test. This is the default. This reset  
disrupts traffic and does the following:  
„
„
„
Activates the pending firmware.  
Closes all management sessions.  
Clears the event log. To save the event log before resetting, refer to the ”Set  
Log Command” on page A-71.  
To reset the switch with a power-on self test, refer to the ”Hardreset Command” on  
page A-32. To reset the switch without disrupting traffic, refer to the ”Hotreset  
Command” on page A-35.  
system  
Resets the system configuration settings to the factory default values. as  
described in Table A-16.  
Note:  
„ Because this keyword changes network parameters, the  
workstation could lose communication with the switch.  
zoning  
Clears the zoning database and deactivates the active zone set. The zoning  
configuration values (autosave, default visibility) remain unchanged.  
59022-11 A  
A-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
0
Notes  
The following tables specify the various factory default settings:  
Enter the Show Config Switch command to display switch configuration  
values.  
Table A-9. Switch Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
Admin State  
Online  
True  
Broadcast Enabled  
InbandEnabled  
FDMIEnabled  
True  
True  
FDMIEntries  
1000  
DefaultDomain ID  
Domain ID Lock  
Symbolic Name  
R_A_TOV  
1 (0x Hex)  
False  
SANbox2  
10000  
2000  
E_D_TOV  
Principal Priority  
Configuration Description  
InteropMode  
254  
Config Default  
Standard  
False  
LegacyAddressFormat  
A-46  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
0
Enter the Show Config Port command to display port configuration values.  
Table A-10. Port Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
Admin State  
Link Speed  
Port Type  
Online  
Auto  
GL  
Symbolic Name  
ALFairness  
Port n, where n is the port number  
False  
True  
False  
False  
0
DeviceScanEnabled  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
ARB_FF  
InteropCredit  
ExtCredit  
0
FANEnable  
True  
True  
False  
True  
False  
True  
False  
Auto  
True  
AutoPerfTuning  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
VIEnable  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
IOStreamGuard  
PDISCPingEnable  
59022-11 A  
A-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
0
Enter Show Config Threshold command to display threshold alarm  
configuration values.  
Table A-11. Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
False  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
25  
1
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
200  
0
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
2
FallingTrigger  
0
SampleWindow  
10  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
5
FallingTrigger  
1
SampleWindow  
10  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
5
FallingTrigger  
1
SampleWindow  
10  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
100  
5
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
Enter the Show Config Zoning command to display zoning configuration  
values.  
Table A-12. Zoning Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
InteropAutoSave  
Default  
True  
All  
DefaultVisibility  
DiscardInactive  
False  
A-48  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
0
Enter the Show Setup SNMP command to display SNMP configuration  
values.  
Table A-13. SNMP Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
SNMPEnabled  
Default  
True  
Contact  
<syscontact undefined>  
Location  
<sysLocation undefined>  
Description  
SANbox2-64 FC Switch  
Trap [1-5] Address  
Trap [1-5] Port  
Trap [1-5] Severity  
Trap [1-5] Version  
Trap [1-5] Enabled  
ObjectID  
Trap 1: 10.0.0.254; Traps 2–5: 0.0.0.0  
162  
Warning  
2
False  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.14 (SANbox2-8c)  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.11 (SANbox2-16)  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
False  
True  
59022-11 A  
A-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
0
Enter the Show Setup Radius command to display RADIUS configuration  
values.  
Table A-14. RADIUS Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
DeviceAuthOrder  
UserAuthOrder  
TotalServers  
Local  
Local  
1
DeviceAuthServer  
UserAuthServer  
AccountingServer  
ServerIPAddress  
ServerUDPPort  
Timeout  
False  
False  
False  
10.0.0.1  
1812  
2 seconds  
0
Retries  
SignPackets  
False  
Enter the Show Setup Services command to display switch service  
configuration values.  
Table A-15. Services Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
TelnetEnabled  
SSHEnabled  
True  
False  
True  
False  
True  
True  
False  
True  
True.  
False  
GUIMgmtEnabled  
SSLMgmtEnabled  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
SNMPEnabled  
NTPEnabled  
CIMEnabled  
FTPEnabled  
MgmtServerEnabled  
A-50  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
0
Enter the Show Setup System command to display system configuration  
values.  
Table A-16. System Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
Ethernet Network Discovery  
Ethernet Network IP Address  
Ethernet Network IP Mask  
Ethernet Gateway Address  
Admin Timeout  
Static  
10.0.0.1  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.254  
30 minutes  
0
InactivityTimeout  
LocalLogEnabled  
True  
RemotelogEnabled  
False  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
NTPClientEnabled  
10.0.0.254  
False  
NTPServerAddress  
10.0.0.254  
True  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
Enter the Show Config Security command to display security configuration  
values.  
Table A-17. Security Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
AutoSave  
FabricBindingEnabled  
True  
True  
59022-11 A  
A-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Security Command  
0
Security Command  
Opens a Security Edit session in which to manage the security database on a  
switch. Refer to the ”Group Command” on page A-24 and the ”Securityset  
Command” on page A-56.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session. The keywords Active, History, Limits, and List are available  
without an Admin session.  
security  
active  
cancel  
clear  
edit  
history  
limits  
list  
restore  
save  
Keywords active  
Displays the active security set, its groups, and group members. This keyword  
does not require an Admin session.  
cancel  
Closes a Security Edit session without saving changes. Use the Edit keyword to  
open a Security Edit session.  
clear  
Clears all inactive security sets from the volatile edit copy of the security  
database. This keyword does not affect the non-volatile security database.  
However, if you enter the Security Clear command followed by the Security Save  
command, the non-volatile security database will be cleared from the switch.  
Note:  
The preferred method for clearing the security database from the  
switch is the Reset Security command. Refer to the ”Reset Command”  
on page A-44.  
edit  
Initiates a Security Edit session in which to make changes to the security  
database. A Security Edit session enables you to use the Group and Securityset  
commands to create, add, and delete security sets, groups, and group members.  
To close a Security Edit session and save changes, enter the Security Save  
command. To close a Security Edit session without saving changes, enter the  
Security Cancel command.  
A-52  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Security Command  
0
history  
Displays history information about the security database and the active security  
set including the account name that made changes and when those changes  
were made. This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
limits  
Displays the current totals and the security database limits for the number of  
security sets, groups, members per group, and total members. This keyword does  
not require an Admin session.  
list  
Displays all security sets, groups, and group members in the security database.  
This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
restore  
Reverts the changes to the security database that have been made during the  
current Security Edit session since the last Security Save command was entered.  
save  
Saves the changes that have been made to the security database during a  
Security Edit session. Changes you make to any security set will not take effect  
until you activate that security set. Refer to the ”Securityset Command” on  
page A-56 for information about activating a security set.  
Examples The following is an example of the Security Active command:  
SANbox2 #> security active  
Active Security Information  
SecuritySet Group GroupMember  
----------- ----- -----------  
alpha  
group1 (ISL)  
10:00:00:00:00:10:21:16  
Authentication  
Primary Hash  
Primary Secret  
Secondary Hash  
Secondary Secret  
Binding  
Chap  
MD5  
********  
SHA-1  
********  
0
10:00:00:00:00:10:21:17  
Authentication  
Primary Hash  
Primary Secret  
Secondary Hash  
Secondary Secret  
Binding  
Chap  
MD5  
********  
SHA-1  
********  
0
59022-11 A  
A-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Security Command  
0
The following is an example of the Security History command:  
SB211.192 #> security history  
Active Database Information  
---------------------------  
SecuritySetLastActivated/DeactivatedBy Remote  
SecuritySetLastActivated/DeactivatedOn day month date time year  
Database Checksum  
00000000  
Inactive Database Information  
-----------------------------  
ConfigurationLastEditedBy  
ConfigurationLastEditedOn  
Database Checksum  
admin@IB-session11  
day month date time year  
00007558  
The following is an example of the Security Limits command:  
SANbox2 #> security limits  
Security Attribute  
------------------  
MaxSecuritySets  
MaxGroups  
Maximum  
-------  
4
Current  
[Name]  
------  
-------  
1
16  
2
MaxTotalMembers  
MaxMembersPerGroup  
1000  
1000  
19  
4
group1  
group2  
15  
A-54  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Security Command  
0
The following is an example of the Security List command:  
SANbox2 (admin-security) #> security list  
SB211.192 #> security list  
Active Security Information  
SecuritySet Group GroupMember  
----------- ----- -----------  
No active securityset defined.  
Configured Security Information  
SecuritySet Group GroupMember  
----------- ----- -----------  
alpha  
group1 (ISL)  
10:00:00:00:00:10:21:16  
Authentication  
Primary Hash  
Primary Secret  
Secondary Hash  
Secondary Secret  
Binding  
Chap  
MD5  
********  
SHA-1  
********  
0
10:00:00:00:00:10:21:17  
Authentication  
Primary Hash  
Primary Secret  
Secondary Hash  
Secondary Secret  
Binding  
Chap  
MD5  
********  
SHA-1  
********  
0
59022-11 A  
A-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Securityset Command  
0
Securityset Command  
Manages security sets in the security database.  
Authority  
Admin session and a Security Edit session. Refer to the ”Security Command” on  
page A-52 for information about starting a Security Edit session. The Active,  
Groups, and List keywords are available without an Admin session. You must  
close the Security Edit session before using the Activate and Deactivate  
keywords.  
Syntax  
securityset  
activate [security_set]  
active  
add [security_set] [group_list]  
copy [security_set_source] [security_set_destination]  
create [security_set]  
deactivate  
delete [security_set]  
groups [security_set]  
list  
remove [security_set] [group]  
rename [security_set_old] [security_set_new]  
Keywords activate [security_set]  
Activates the security set given by [security_set]. This keyword deactivates the  
active security set. Close the Security Edit session using the Security Save or  
Security Cancel command before using this keyword.  
active  
Displays the name of the active security set. This keyword is available to without  
an Admin session.  
add [security_set] [group_list]  
Adds one or more groups given by [group_list] to the security set given by  
[security_set]. Use a <space> to delimit multiple group names in [group_list]. A  
security set can have a maximum of three groups with no more than one group of  
each group type.  
copy [security_set_source] [security_set_destination]  
Creates a new security set named [security_set_destination] and copies into it the  
membership from the security set given by [security_set_source].  
create [security_set]  
Creates the security set with the name given by [security_set]. A security set  
name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid  
characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -. The security database supports a  
maximum of 4 security sets.  
deactivate  
Deactivates the active security set. Close the Security Edit session before using  
this keyword.  
A-56  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
A – Command Line Interface  
Securityset Command  
0
delete [security_set]  
Deletes the security set given by [security_set]. If the specified security set is  
active, the command is suspended until the security set is deactivated.  
groups [security_set]  
Displays all groups that are members of the security set given by [security_set].  
This keyword is available without an Admin session.  
list  
Displays a list of all security sets. This keyword is available without an Admin  
session.  
remove [security_set] [group]  
Removes a group given by [group] from the security set given by [security_set]. If  
[security_set] is the active security set, the group will not be removed until the  
security set has been deactivated.  
rename [security_set_old] [security_set_new]  
Renames the security set given by [security_set_old] to the name given by  
[security_set_new].  
Notes  
Refer to the ”Group Command” on page A-24 for information about creating and  
managing groups.  
Examples The following is an example of the Securityset Active command  
SANbox2 #> securityset active  
Active SecuritySet Information  
------------------------------  
ActiveSecuritySet alpha  
LastActivatedBy Remote  
LastActivatedOn day month date time year  
The following is an example of the Securityset Groups command  
SANbox2 #> securityset groups alpha  
Current list of Groups for SecuritySet: alpha  
---------------------------------------  
group1 (ISL)  
group2 (Port)  
The following is an example of the Securityset List command  
SANbox2 #> securityset list  
Current list of SecuritySets  
----------------------------  
alpha  
beta  
59022-11 A  
A-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Command  
0
Set Command  
Sets a variety of switch parameters.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session for all keywords except Alarm, Beacon, and Pagebreak which are  
available without an Admin session.  
set  
alarm [option]  
beacon [state]  
config [option]  
log [option]  
pagebreak [state]  
port [option]  
setup [option]  
switch [state]  
timezone  
Keywords alarm [option]  
Controls the display of alarms in the session output stream or clears the alarm log.  
[option] can be one of the following:  
clear  
Clears the alarm log history. This value requires an Admin session.  
on  
Enables the display of alarms in the session output stream.  
off  
Disables the display of alarms in the session output stream.  
beacon [state]  
Enables or disables the flashing of the Logged-In LEDs according to [state]. This  
keyword does not require an admin session. [state] can be one of the following:  
on  
Enables the flashing beacon.  
off  
Disables the flashing beacon.  
config [option]  
Sets switch, port, port threshold alarm, security, and zoning configuration  
parameters. Refer to the ”Set Config Command” on page A-60.  
log [option]  
Specifies the type of entries to be entered in the event log. Refer to the ”Set Log  
Command” on page A-71.  
A-58  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Command  
0
pagebreak [state]  
Specifies how much information is displayed on the screen at a time according to  
the value given by [state]. This keyword does not require an admin session. [state]  
can be one of the following:  
on  
Limits the display of information to 20 lines at a time. The page break  
functions affects the following commands: Alias (List, Members), Show  
(Alarm, Log), Zone (List, Members), Zoneset (List, Zones), Zoning (Active,  
List).  
off  
Allows continuous display of information without a break.  
port [option]  
Sets port state and speed for the specified port. The previous Set Config Port  
settings are restored after a switch reset or a reactivation of a switch  
configuration. Refer to the ”Set Port Command” on page A-75.  
setup [option]  
Changes SNMP and system configuration settings. Refer to the ”Set Setup  
Command” on page A-77.  
switch [state]  
Changes the administrative state for all ports on the switch to the state given by  
[state]. The previous Set Config Switch settings are restored after a switch reset  
or a reactivation of a switch configuration. [state] can be one of the following:  
online  
Places all ports online  
offline  
Places all ports offline.  
diagnostics  
Prepares all ports for testing.  
timezone  
Specifies the time zone for the switch and the workstation. The default is Universal  
Time (UTC) also known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This keyword prompts  
you to choose a region, then a subregion to specify the time zone.  
Examples The following examples enables and disables the beacon:  
SANbox2 #> set beacon on  
Command succeeded.  
SANbox2 $> set beacon off  
Command succeeded.  
59022-11 A  
A-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
Set Config Command  
Sets switch, port, port threshold alarm, security, and zoning configuration  
parameters. The changes you make with this command are not retained when you  
reset or power cycle the switch unless you save them using the Config Save  
command. Refer to the ”Config Command” on page A-16.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session and a Config Edit session  
set config  
port [port_number]  
ports [port_number]  
security  
switch  
threshold  
zoning  
Keywords port [port_number]  
Initiates an edit session in which to change configuration parameters for the port  
number given by [port_number]. If you omit [port_number], the system begins with  
port 0 and proceeds in order through the last port. For each parameter, enter a  
new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Enter “q” to end the configuration for one port, or “qq” to end the configuration for  
all ports. Table A-18 describes the port parameters.  
ports [port_number]  
Initiates an editing session in which to change configuration parameters for all  
ports based on the configuration for the port given by [port_number]. If you omit  
[port_number], port 0 is used. For each parameter, enter a new value or press the  
Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets. Enter “q” to end the  
configuration. Table A-18 describes the port parameters.  
Table A-18. Set Config Port Parameters  
Parameter  
AdminState  
Description  
Port administrative state:  
„ Online – Activates and prepares the port to send data.  
This is the default.  
„ Offline – Prevents the port from receiving signal and  
accepting a device login.  
„ Diagnostics – Prepares the port for testing and prevents  
the port from accepting a device login.  
„ Down – Disables the port by removing power from the  
port lasers.  
LinkSpeed  
PortType  
Transmission speed: 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or Auto. The default is  
Auto.  
Port type: GL, G, F, FL, Donor. The default is GL.  
A-60  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
Table A-18. Set Config Port Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
SymbolicPortName  
Descriptive name for the port. The name can be up to 32  
characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The  
default is Port n where n is the port number.  
ALFairness  
Arbitration loop fairness. Enables (True) or disables (False)  
the switch’s priority to arbitrate on the loop. The default is  
False.  
DeviceScanEnabled  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the scanning of the  
connected device for FC-4 descriptor information during  
login. The default is True.  
Enables (False) or disables (True) the immediate  
transmission of RSCN messages when communication  
between a port and a device is interrupted. If enabled, the  
RSCN message is delayed for 200 ms for locally attached  
devices and 400 ms for devices connected through other  
switches. The default is False. This parameter is ignored if  
IOStreamGuard is enabled.  
ARB_FF  
Send ARB_FF (True) instead of IDLEs (False) on the loop.  
The default is False.  
InteropCredit  
Interoperability credit. The number of buffer-to-buffer credits  
per port. 0 means the default (12) is unchanged. Changing  
interoperability credits is necessary only for E_Ports that are  
connected to non-FC-SW-2-compliant switches. Contact your  
authorized maintenance provider for assistance in using this  
feature.  
ExtCredit  
Extended credits. The number of port buffer credits that this  
port can acquire from donor ports. The default is 0.  
FANEnable  
Fabric address notification. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) the communication of the FL_Port address, port  
name, and node name to the logged-in NL_Port. The default  
is True.  
AutoPerfTuning  
Automatic performance tuning for FL_Ports only. The default  
is True.  
„ If AutoPerfTuning is enabled (True) and the port is an  
FL_Port, MFSEnable is automatically enabled.  
LCFEnable and VIEnable are overridden to False.  
„ If AutoPerfTuning is disabled (False), MFSEnable,  
LCFEnable, and VIEnable retain their original values.  
59022-11 A  
A-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
Table A-18. Set Config Port Parameters  
Description  
Parameter  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
VIEnable  
Link control frame preference routing. This parameter  
appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False. Enables (True) or  
disables (False) preferred routing of frames with R_CTL =  
1100 (Class 2 responses). The default is False. Enabling  
LCFEnable will disable MFSEnable.  
Multi-Frame Sequence bundling. This parameter appears  
only if AutoPerfTuning is False. Prevents (True) or allows  
(False) the interleaving of frames in a sequence. The default  
is True. Enabling MFSEnable disables LCFEnable and  
VIEnable.  
Virtual Interface (VI) preference routing. This parameter  
appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False. Enables (True) or  
disables (False) VI preference routing. The default is False.  
Enabling VIEnable will disable MFSEnable.  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
Management server enable. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) management server on this port. The default is True.  
Loop circuit closure prevention. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) the loop’s ability to remain in the open state  
indefinitely. True reduces the amount of arbitration on a loop  
when there is only one device on the loop. The default is  
False.  
IOStreamGuard  
I/O Stream Guard. Enables or disables the suppression of  
RSCN messages. IOStreamGuard can have the following  
values:  
„ Enable – Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages  
from other ports for which IOStreamGuard is enabled.  
„ Disable – Allows free transmission and reception of  
RSCN messages.  
„ Auto – Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages  
when the port is connected to an initiator device with a  
QLogic HBA. For older QLogic HBAs, such as the  
QLA2200, the DeviceScanEnabled parameter must also  
be enabled. The default is Auto.  
PDISCPingEnable  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the transmission of ping  
messages from the switch to all devices on a loop port. The  
default is True.  
security  
Initiates an editing session in which to change the security settings. The system  
displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value. For each  
A-62  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
parameter, enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value  
shown in brackets. Enter “q” or "Q" to end the editing session. Table A-19  
describes the Set Config Security parameters.  
Table A-19. Security Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
AutoSave  
Description  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the saving of changes  
to active security set in the switch’s permanent memory.  
The default is True.  
FabricBindingEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the configuration and  
enforcement of fabric binding on all switches the fabric.  
Fabric binding associates switch worldwide names with a  
domain ID in the creation of ISL groups.  
switch  
Initiates an editing session in which to change switch configuration settings. The  
system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value.  
For each parameter, enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the  
current value shown in brackets. Table A-20 describes the Set Config Switch  
parameters.  
Table A-20. Set Config Switch Parameters  
Parameter  
AdminState  
Description  
Switch administrative state: online, offline, or  
diagnostics. The default is Online.  
BroadcastEnabled  
InbandEnabled  
Broadcast. Enables (True) or disables (False)  
forwarding of broadcast frames. The default is True.  
Inband management. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) the ability to manage the switch over an ISL.  
The default is True.  
FDMIEnabled  
FDMIEntries  
Fabric Device Monitoring Interface. Enables (True) or  
disables (False) the monitoring of target and initiator  
device information. The default is True.  
The number of device entries to maintain in the FDMI  
database. Enter a number from 0–1000. The default  
is 1000.  
DefaultDomainID  
DomainIDLock  
Default domain ID. The default is 1.  
Prevents (True) or allows (False) dynamic  
reassignment of the domain ID. The default is False.  
59022-11 A  
A-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
Table A-20. Set Config Switch Parameters  
Parameter  
SymbolicName  
Description  
Descriptive name for the switch. The name can be up  
to 32 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and  
comma (,). The default is SANbox2.  
R_A_TOV  
Resource Allocation Timeout Value. The number of  
milliseconds the switch waits to allow two ports to  
allocate enough resources to establish a link. The  
default is 10000.  
E_D_TOV  
Error Detect Timeout Value. The number of  
milliseconds a port is to wait for errors to clear. The  
default is 2000.  
PrincipalPriority  
ConfigDescription  
The priority used in the FC-SW-2 principal switch  
selection algorithm. 1 is high, 255 is low. The default  
is 254.  
Switch configuration description. The configuration  
description can be up to 32 characters excluding #,  
semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is  
Config Default.  
InteropMode  
Propagates just the active zone set throughout the  
fabric (Standard, FC-SW-2 compliant) or the entire  
zoning database (Interop-1, non-compliant). The  
default is Standard.  
LegacyAddressFormat  
Available only when the InteropMode parameter is  
Interop-1, this parameter enables (True) or disables  
(False) the use of legacy address formatting for  
interoperating with non-FC-SW-2 switches. The  
default is False.  
A-64  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
threshold  
Initiates a configuration session by which to generate and log alarms for selected  
events. The system displays each event, its triggers, and sampling window one  
line at a time and prompts you for a value. For each parameter, enter a new value  
or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets. These  
parameters must be saved in a configuration and activated before they will take  
effect. Refer to the ”Config Command” on page A-16 for information about saving  
and activating a configuration. Table A-21 describes the Set Config Threshold  
parameters. The switch will down a port if an alarm condition is not cleared within  
three consecutive sampling windows (by default 30 seconds). Reset the port to  
bring it back online. An alarm is cleared when the threshold monitoring detects  
that the error rate has fallen below the falling trigger.  
Table A-21. Set Config Threshold Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Threshold Monitoring Enabled  
Master enable/disable parameter for all  
events. Enables (True) or disables (False)  
the generation of all enabled event alarms.  
The default is False.  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
The event type enable/disable parameter.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the  
generation of alarms for each of the  
following events:  
„ CRC errors  
„ Decode errors  
„ ISL connection count  
„ Device login errors  
„ Device logout errors  
„ Loss-of-signal errors  
Rising Trigger  
Falling Trigger  
Sample Window  
The event count above which a rising  
trigger alarm is logged. The switch will not  
generate another rising trigger alarm for  
that event until the count descends below  
the falling trigger and again exceeds the  
rising trigger.  
The event count below which a falling  
trigger alarm is logged. The switch will not  
generate another falling trigger alarm for  
that event until the count exceeds the  
rising trigger and descends again below  
the falling trigger.  
The period of time in seconds in which to  
count events.  
59022-11 A  
A-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
zoning  
Initiates an editing session in which to change switch zoning attributes. The  
system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value.  
For each parameter, enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the  
current value shown in brackets.  
Table A-22. Set Config Zoning Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
InteropAutoSave  
Available only when the InteropMode parameter is Standard, this  
parameter enables (True) or disables (False) the saving of  
changes to active zone set in the switch’s permanent memory.  
Refer to ”InteropMode” on page A-64. The default is True.  
Disabling the Autosave parameter can be useful to prevent the  
propagation of zoning information when experimenting with  
different zoning schemes. However, leaving the Autosave  
parameter disabled can disrupt device configurations should a  
switch have to be reset. For this reason, the Autosave parameter  
should be enabled in a production environment.  
DefaultVisibility  
DiscardInactive  
Enables (All) or disables (None) communication among the  
switch’s ports/devices and the fabric in the absence of an active  
zone set. The default is All.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the discarding of all inactive  
zone sets from that zoning database. Inactive zone sets are all  
zone sets except the active zone set. The default is False.  
Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Port command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config port 1  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Configuring Port Number: 1  
------------------------  
AdminState  
LinkSpeed  
PortType  
(1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics, 4=Down)  
(1=1Gb/s, 2=2Gb/s, 3=Auto)  
[Online]  
[Auto ]  
(GL / G / F / FL / Donor)  
[GL  
]
SymPortName  
(string, max=32 chars)  
[Port1 ]  
A-66  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
ALFairness  
(True / False)  
[False ]  
[True ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
DeviceScanEnable (True / False)  
ForceOfflineRSCN (True / False)  
ARB_FF  
(True / False)  
InteropCredit (decimal value, 0-255)  
[0  
[0  
]
]
ExtCredit  
FANEnable  
(dec value, increments of 11, non-loop only)  
(True / False)  
[True ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
[True ]  
[False ]  
[Disable]  
[True ]  
AutoPerfTuning (True / False)  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
VIEnable  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
IOStreamGuard (Enable / Disable / Auto)  
PDISCPingEnable (True / False)  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #>  
59022-11 A  
A-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
The following is an example of the Set Config Security command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config security  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
FabricBindingEnabled (True / False)  
AutoSave (True / False)  
[False]  
[True ]  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
The following is an example of the Set Config Switch command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config switch  
A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
AdminState  
(1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics)  
(True / False)  
[Online  
[True  
[True  
[True  
[1000  
[2  
]
]
]
BroadcastEnabled  
InbandEnabled  
FDMIEnabled  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
]
]
FDMIEntries  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
(decimal value, 1-239)  
(True / False)  
DefaultDomainID  
DomainIDLock  
SymbolicName  
R_A_TOV  
]
]
]
]
]
]
[False  
[SANbox  
[10000  
[2000  
[254  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(decimal value, 100-100000 msec)  
(decimal value, 10-20000 msec)  
(decimal value, 1-255)  
(string, max=64 chars)  
(0=Standard, 1=Interop_1)  
E_D_TOV  
PrincipalPriority  
ConfigDescription  
InteropMode  
[Default Config]  
[Standard  
]
A-68  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
The following is an example of the Set Config Threshold command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config threshold  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
(True / False)  
[False  
]
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
[25  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
FallingTrigger  
[1  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled (True / False)  
[True  
[200  
[0  
]
]
]
]
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[2  
[0  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[5  
[1  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[5  
[1  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[100  
[5  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
59022-11 A  
A-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
0
The following is an example of the Set Config Zoning command.  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config zoning  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press 'q'  
or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
InteropAutoSave  
DefaultVisibility  
DiscardInactive  
(True / False) [True]  
(All / None) [All ]  
(True / False) [False]  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
A-70  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
0
Set Log Command  
Specifies the events to record in the event log and display on the screen. You  
determine what events to record in the switch event log using the Component,  
Level, and Port keywords. You determine what events are automatically displayed  
on the screen using the Display keyword. Alarms are always displayed on the  
screen.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
set log  
archive  
clear  
component [filter_list]  
display [filter]  
level [filter]  
port [port_list]  
restore  
save  
start (default)  
stop  
Keywords archive  
Collects all log entries and stores the result in new file named logfile that is  
maintained in switch memory where it can be downloaded using FTP. To  
download logfile, open an FTP session, log in with account name/password of  
“images” for both, and type “get logfile”.  
clear  
Clears all log entries.  
component [filter_list]  
Specifies one or more components given by [filter_list] to monitor for events. A  
component is a firmware module that is responsible for a particular portion of  
switch operation. Use a <space> to delimit values in the list. [filter_list] can be one  
or more of the following:  
All  
Monitors all components. To maintain optimal switch performance, do not  
use this setting with the Level keyword set to Info.  
Chassis  
Monitors chassis hardware components such as fans and power supplies.  
Eport  
Monitors all E_Ports.  
Mgmtserver  
Monitors management server status.  
Nameserver  
Monitors name server status.  
59022-11 A  
A-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
0
None  
Monitor none of the component events.  
Other  
Monitors other miscellaneous events.  
Port  
Monitors all port events.  
SNMP  
Monitors all SNMP events.  
Switch  
Monitors switch management events.  
Zoning  
Monitors zoning conflict events.  
display [filter]  
Specifies the log events to automatically display on the screen according to the  
event severity levels given by [filter]. [filter] can be one of the following values:  
Critical  
Critical severity level events. The critical level describes events that are  
generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but  
require no action.  
Warn  
Warning severity level events. The warning level describes events that are  
generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but  
are more important than the informative level events.  
Info  
Informative severity level events. The informative level describes routine  
events associated with a normal fabric.  
None  
Specifies no severity levels for display on the screen.  
A-72  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
0
level [filter]  
Specifies the severity level given by [filter] to use in monitoring and logging events  
for the specified components or ports. [filter] can be one of the following values:  
Critical  
Monitors critical events. The critical level describes events that are generally  
disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but require no  
action.  
Warn  
Monitors warning and critical events. The warning level describes events  
that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the  
fabric, but are more important than the informative level events.  
Info  
Monitors informative, warning, and critical events. The informative level  
describes routine events associated with a normal fabric. This is the default  
severity level.  
None  
Monitors none of the severity levels.  
port [port_list]  
Specifies one or more ports to monitor for events. Choose one of the following  
values:  
[port_list]  
Specifies port or ports to monitor. Use a <space> to delimit values in the list.  
Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
All  
Specifies all ports.  
None  
Disables monitoring on all ports.  
restore  
Restores and saves the port, component, and level settings to the default values.  
save  
Saves the log settings for the component, severity level, port, and display level.  
These settings remain in effect after a switch reset. The log settings can be  
viewed using the Show Log Settings command. To export log entries to a file, use  
the Set Log Archive command.  
start  
Starts the logging of events based on the Port, Component, and Level keywords  
assigned to the current configuration. The logging continues until you enter the  
Set Log Stop command.  
stop  
Stops logging of events.  
59022-11 A  
A-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
0
Notes  
In addition to critical, warn, and informative severity levels, the highest event  
severity level is alarm. The alarm level describes events that are disruptive to the  
administration or operation of a fabric and require administrator intervention.  
Alarms are always logged and always displayed on the screen.  
A-74  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Port Command  
0
Set Port Command  
Sets port state and speed for the specified port temporarily until the next switch  
reset or new configuration activation. This command also clears port counters.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session except for the Clear keyword.  
set port [port_number]  
bypass [alpa]  
clear  
enable  
speed [transmission_speed]  
state [state]  
Keywords [port_number]  
Specifies the port. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
bypass [alpa]  
Sends a Loop Port Bypass (LPB) to a specific Arbitrated Loop Physical Address  
(ALPA) or to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop. [alpa] can be a specific ALPA or the  
keyword ALL to choose all ALPAs.  
clear  
Clears the counters on the port. This keyword does not require an admin session.  
enable  
Sends a Loop Port Enable (LPE) to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop.  
speed [transmission_speed]  
Specifies the transmission speed for the specified port. Choose one of the  
following port speed values:  
1Gb/s  
One gigabit per second.  
2Gb/s  
Two gigabits per second.  
Auto  
The port speed is automatically detected.  
59022-11 A  
A-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Port Command  
0
state [state]  
Specifies one of the following administrative states for the specified port:  
Online  
Places the port online. This activates and prepares the port to send data.  
Offline  
Places the port offline. This prevents the port from receiving signal and  
accepting a device login.  
Diagnostics  
Prepares the port for testing. This prepares the port for testing and prevents  
the port from accepting a device login.  
Down  
Disables the port by removing power from the port lasers.  
A-76  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
Set Setup Command  
Manages configuration settings for Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service  
(RADIUS) servers, switch services, SNMP, and system configurations.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
set setup  
radius  
services  
snmp  
system  
Keywords radius  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to configure RADIUS servers for user  
account and device authentication. Table A-23 describes the RADIUS server  
configuration fields.  
Table A-23. RADIUS Service Settings  
Entry  
Description  
DeviceAuthOrder  
Authenticator priority for devices:  
„ Local: Authenticate devices using only the local security  
database. This is the default.  
„ Radius: Authenticate devices using only the security  
database on the RADIUS server.  
„ RadiusLocal: Authenticate devices using the RADIUS  
server security database first. If the RADIUS server is  
unavailable, then use the local switch security database.  
UserAuthOrder  
Authenticator priority for user accounts:  
„ Local: Authenticate users using only the local security  
database. This is the default.  
„ Radius: Authenticate users using only the security  
database on the RADIUS server.  
„ RadiusLocal: Authenticate users using the RADIUS  
server security database first. If the RADIUS server is  
unavailable, then use the local switch security database.  
TotalServers  
Number of RADIUS servers to configure during this session.  
Setting TotalServers to 0 disables all RADIUS  
authentication. The default is 0.  
ServerIPAddress  
ServerUDPPort  
IP address of the RADIUS server. The default is 10.0.0.1.  
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number on the RADIUS  
server. The default is 1812.  
DeviceAuthServer  
Enable (True) or disable (False) this server for device  
authentication. The default is False.  
59022-11 A  
A-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
Table A-23. RADIUS Service Settings  
Entry  
Description  
UserAuthServer  
Enable (True) or disable (False) this server for user account  
authentication. A user authentication RADIUS server  
requires a secure management connection (SSL). The  
default is True.  
AccountingServer  
Enable (True) or disable (False) this server for auditing of  
activity during a user session. When enabled, user activity is  
audited whether UserAuthServer is enabled or not.The  
default is False. The accounting server UDP port number is  
the ServerUDPPort value plus 1 (default 1813).  
Timeout  
Retries  
Number of seconds to wait to receive a response from the  
RADIUS server before timing out. The default is 2.  
Number of retries after the first attempt to establish  
communication with the RADIUS server fails. The default is  
0.  
SignPackets  
Secret  
Enable (True) or disable (False) the use of sign packets to  
protect the RADIUS server packet integrity. The default is  
False.  
32-byte hex string or 16-byte ASCII string used as a  
password for authentication purposes between the switch  
and the RADIUS server.  
A-78  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
services  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to enable or disable switch services.  
Table A-24 describes the switch service parameters. For each parameter, enter a  
new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Note:  
Use caution when disabling TelnetEnabled and GUIMgmtEnabled; it is  
possible to disable all Ethernet access to the switch.  
Table A-24. Switch Services Settings  
Entry  
Description  
TelnetEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the ability to manage  
the switch over a Telnet connection. Disabling this service  
is not recommended. The default is True.  
SSHEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) Secure Shell (SSH)  
connections to the switch. SSH secures the remote  
connection to the switch. To establish a secure remote  
connection, your workstation must use an SSH client. The  
default is False.  
GUIMgmtEnabled  
SSLMgmtEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) out-of-band  
management of the switch with SANsurfer Switch  
Manager, the SANsurfer Switch Manager Application  
Application Programming Interface, SNMP, and CIM. If this  
service is disabled, the switch can only be managed  
inband or through the serial port. The default is True.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) secure SSL connections  
for management applications including SANsurfer Switch  
Manager, the SANsurfer Switch Manager web applet,  
SANsurfer Switch Manager Application Programming  
Interface, and the CIM server. The default is False.  
„ To enable secure SSL connections, you must first  
synchronize the date and time on the switch and  
workstation.  
„ This service must be enabled to authenticate users  
through a RADIUS server.  
„ Enabling SSL automatically creates a security  
certificate on the switch.  
„ To disable SSL when using a user authentication  
RADIUS server, the RADIUS server authentication  
order must be local.  
59022-11 A  
A-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
Table A-24. Switch Services Settings  
Entry  
Description  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the SANsurfer Switch  
Manager web applet. The web applet enables you to point  
at a switch with an internet browser and run SANsurfer  
Switch Manager through the browser. This parameter is  
the master control for the Set Setup System command  
parameter, EmbeddedGUIEnabled. The default is True.  
SNMPEnabled  
NTPEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the management of the  
switch through third-party applications that use the Simple  
Network Management Protocol (SNMP). This parameter is  
the master control for the Set Setup SNMP command  
parameter, SNMPEnabled. The default is True.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the Network Time  
Protocol (NTP) which allows the synchronizing of switch  
and workstation dates and times with an NTP server. This  
helps to prevent invalid SSL certificates and timestamp  
confusion in the event log. The default is False. This  
parameter is the master control for the Set Setup System  
command parameter, NTPClientEnabled.  
The default is False.  
CIMEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the management of the  
switch through third-party applications that use the  
Common Information Model (CIM). The default is True.  
FTPEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the File Transfer  
Protocol (FTP) for transferring files rapidly between the  
workstation and the switch. The default is True.  
MgmtServerEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the management of the  
switch through third-party applications that use GS-3  
Management Server (MS). This parameter is the master  
control for the Set Config Port command parameter,  
MSEnable. The default is False.  
A-80  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
snmp  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to change SNMP configuration settings.  
Table A-25 describes the SNMP fields. For each parameter, enter a new value or  
press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Table A-25. SNMP Configuration Settings  
Entry  
Description  
SNMPEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) SNMP on the switch. The  
default is True.  
Contact  
Specifies the name of the person to be contacted to respond to  
trap events. The name can be up to 64 characters excluding #,  
semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is undefined.  
Location  
Specifies the name of the switch location. The name can be up  
to 64 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,).  
The default is undefined.  
Trap [1-5] Address  
Specifies the workstation IP address to which SNMP traps are  
sent. The default address for trap 1 is 10.0.0.254. The default  
address for traps 2–5 is 0.0.0.0. Addresses, other than 0.0.0.0,  
for all traps must be unique.  
Trap [1-5] Port  
Specifies the workstation port to which SNMP traps are sent.  
Valid workstation port numbers are 1–65535. The default is  
162.  
Trap [1-5] Severity  
Trap [1-5] Version  
Trap [1-5] Enabled  
ReadCommunity  
Specifies the severity level to use when monitoring trap events.  
The default is Warning.  
Specifies the SNMP version (1 or 2) to use in formatting traps.  
The default is 2.  
Specifies whether traps (event information) are enabled or  
disabled (default).  
Read community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
read information from the switch. This is a write-only field. The  
value on the switch and the SNMP management server must  
be the same. The read community password can be up to 32  
characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The  
default is “public”.  
WriteCommunity  
Write community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
write information to the switch. This is a write-only field. The  
value on the switch and the SNMP management server must  
be the same. The write community password can be up to 32  
characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The  
default is “private”.  
59022-11 A  
A-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
Table A-25. SNMP Configuration Settings  
Entry  
Description  
TrapCommunity  
Trap community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
receive traps. This is a write-only field. The value on the switch  
and the SNMP management server must be the same. The  
trap community password can be up to 32 characters excluding  
#, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is “public”.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation of traps in  
response to trap authentication failures. The default is False.  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) SNMP communication with  
other switches in the fabric. The default is True.  
system  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to change system configuration settings.  
Table A-26 describes the system configuration fields. For each parameter, enter a  
new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Note:  
Changing the IP address will terminate all Ethernet management  
sessions.  
Table A-26. System Configuration Settings  
Entry  
Description  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Ethernet boot method: 1 - Static, 2 - Bootp, 3 - DHCP,  
4 - RARP. The default is 1 - Static.  
Ethernet Internet Protocol (IP) address. The default is  
10.0.0.1.  
Eth0NetworkMask  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
AdminTimeout  
Ethernet subnet mask address.  
Ethernet IP address gateway.  
Amount of time in minutes the switch waits before  
terminating an idle Admin session. Zero (0) disables the  
time out threshold. The default is 30, the maximum is  
1440.  
InactivityTimeout  
Amount of time in minutes the switch waits before  
terminating an idle Telnet command line interface  
session. Zero (0) disables the time out threshold. The  
default is 0, the maximum is 1440.  
A-82  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
Table A-26. System Configuration Settings  
Entry  
Description  
LocalLogEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the saving of log  
information on the switch. The default is True.  
RemoteLogEnabled  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
NTPClientEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the recording of the  
switch event log on a remote host that supports the  
syslog protocol. The default is False.  
The IP address of the host that will receive the switch  
event log information if remote logging is enabled. The  
default is 10.0.0.254.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the Network Time  
Protocol (NTP) client on the switch. This client enables  
the switch to synchronize its time with an NTP server.  
This feature supports NTP version 4 and is compatible  
with version 3. An Ethernet connection to the server is  
required and you must first set an initial time and date on  
the switch. The synchronized time becomes effective  
immediately. The default is False.  
NTPServerAddress  
The IP address of the NTP server from which the NTP  
client acquires the time and date. The default is  
10.0.0.254.  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the SANsurfer Switch  
Manager Web applet. Changing this parameter to False  
while the applet is running will terminate the applet. The  
default is True.  
59022-11 A  
A-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup RADIUS command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> set setup radius  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the attributes  
for the server being processed, press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
If you wish to terminate the configuration process completely, press 'qq' or  
'QQ' and the ENTER key to so do.  
DeviceAuthOrder  
UserAuthOrder  
TotalServers  
(1=Local, 2=Radius, 3=RadiusLocal) [Local]  
(1=Local, 2=Radius, 3=RadiusLocal) [Local]  
(decimal value, 0-5)  
[1  
]
Server: 1  
ServerIPAddress  
ServerUDPPort  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[10.20.11.8]  
[1812  
[True  
[True  
[False  
[10  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
DeviceAuthServer (True / False)  
UserAuthServer (True / False)  
AccountingServer (True / False)  
Timeout  
(decimal value, 10-30 secs)  
Retries  
(decimal value, 1-3, 0=None)  
(True / False)  
[0  
SignPackets  
Secret  
[False  
(32 hex or 16 ASCII char value) [******** ]  
Do you want to save and activate this radius setup? (y/n): [n]  
The following is an example of the Set Setup Services command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> set setup services  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
*Warning: If services are disabled, the connection to the switch may be lost.  
TelnetEnabled  
SSHEnabled  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
[True ]  
[False]  
[True ]  
[False]  
[True ]  
[True ]  
[False]  
[True ]  
[True ]  
[True ]  
GUIMgmtEnabled  
SSLMgmtEnabled  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled (True / False)  
SNMPEnabled  
NTPEnabled  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
CIMEnabled  
FTPEnabled  
MgmtServerEnabled  
Do you want to save and activate this services setup? (y/n): [n]  
A-84  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
The following is an example of the Set Setup SNMP command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> set setup snmp  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Trap Severity Options  
---------------------  
unknown, emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notify, info, debug, mark  
SNMPEnabled  
Contact  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
(string, max=64 chars)  
(string, max=64 chars)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[<sysContact undefined]  
[sysLocation undefined]  
Location  
Trap1Address  
Trap1Port  
[10.20.71.15  
[162  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Trap1Severity  
Trap1Version  
Trap1Enabled  
Trap2Address  
Trap2Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap2Severity  
Trap2Version  
Trap2Enabled  
Trap3Address  
Trap3Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap3Severity  
Trap3Version  
Trap3Enabled  
Trap4Address  
Trap4Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap4Severity  
Trap4Version  
Trap4Enabled  
Trap5Address  
Trap5Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap5Severity  
Trap5Version  
Trap5Enabled  
ReadCommunity  
WriteCommunity  
TrapCommunity  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
[False  
[public  
[private  
[public  
[False  
[True  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
59022-11 A  
A-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
0
The following is an example of the Set Setup System command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> set setup system  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Eth0NetworkMask  
(1=Static, 2=Bootp, 3=Dhcp, 4=Rarp) [Static  
]
]
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
[10.0.0.1  
[255.255.255.0]  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
AdminTimeout  
[10.0.0.254  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
(dec value 0-1440 minutes, 0=never) [30  
(dec value 0-1440 minutes, 0=never) [0  
InactivityTimeout  
LocalLogEnabled  
(True / False)  
[True  
RemoteLogEnabled  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
NTPClientEnabled  
NTPServerAddress  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
(True / False)  
[False  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(True / False)  
[10.0.0.254  
[False  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(True / False)  
[10.0.0.254  
[True  
A-86  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
Show Command  
Displays fabric, switch, and port operational information.  
None  
show  
about  
Authority  
Syntax  
alarm [option]  
audit  
broadcast  
chassis  
cimlistener [listener_name]  
cimsubscription [subscription_name]  
config [option]  
domains  
donor  
fabric  
fdmi [port_wwn]  
interface  
log [option]  
lsdb  
mem [count]  
ns [option]  
pagebreak  
perf [option]  
port [port_number]  
post log  
setup [option]  
steering [domain_id]  
support  
switch  
timezone  
topology  
users  
version  
Keywords about  
Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the  
switch. This keyword is equivalent to the Version keyword.  
59022-11 A  
A-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
alarm [option]  
Displays the alarm log and session display setting. If you omit [option], the  
command displays the last 200 alarm entries. The alarm log is cleared when the  
switch is reset or power cycled. [option] has the following value:  
setting  
Displays the status of the parameter that controls the display of alarms in the  
session output stream. This parameter is set using the Set Alarm command.  
audit  
Displays the most recent 200 records in the administrative audit log. The audit log  
contains configuration and administrative changes that have been made to the  
switch including the originating management session and IP address.  
broadcast  
Displays the broadcast tree information and all ports that are currently transmitting  
and receiving broadcast frames.  
chassis  
Displays chassis component status and temperature.  
cimlistener [listener_name]  
Displays CIM indicator services listener information for the listener given by  
[listener_name]. If you omit [listener_name], the command displays all listeners.  
cimsubscription [subscription_name]  
Displays CIM subscription information for the subscription given by  
[subscription_name]. If you omit [subscription_name], the command displays all  
subscriptions.  
config [option]  
Displays switch, port, and zoning configuration attributes. Refer to the ”Show  
Config Command” on page A-103.  
domains  
Displays list of each domain and its worldwide name in the fabric.  
donor  
Displays list of current donor configuration for all ports.  
fabric  
Displays list of each domain, symbolic name, worldwide name, node IP address,  
and port IP address.  
fdmi [port_wwn]  
Displays detailed information about the device host bus adapter given by  
[port_wwn]. If you omit [port_wwn], the command displays a summary of host bus  
adapter information for all attached devices in the fabric. Illegal characters in the  
display appear as question marks (?).  
interface  
Displays the status of the active network interfaces.  
A-88  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
log [option]  
Displays log entries. Refer to the ”Show Log Command” on page A-106. The log  
is cleared when the switch is reset or power cycled.  
lsdb  
Displays Link State database information  
mem [count]  
Displays information about memory activity for the number of seconds given by  
[count]. If you omit [count], the value 1 is used. Displayed memory values are in  
1K block units.  
Note:  
This keyword will display memory activity updates until [count] is  
reached – it cannot be interrupted. Therefore, avoid using large  
values for [count].  
ns [option]  
Displays name server information for the specified [option]. If you omit [option],  
name server information for the local domain ID is displayed. [option] can have the  
following values:  
all  
Displays name server information for all switches and ports.  
[domain_id]  
Displays name server information for the switch given by [domain_id].  
[domain_id] is a switch domain ID.  
[port_id]  
Displays name server information for the port given by [port_id]. [port_id] is a  
port Fibre Channel address.  
pagebreak  
Displays the current pagebreak setting. The pagebreak setting limits the display of  
information to 20 lines (On) or allows the continuous display of information without  
a break (Off).  
perf [option]  
Displays performance information for all ports. Refer to the ”Show Perf Command”  
on page A-109.  
59022-11 A  
A-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
port [port_number]  
Displays operational information for the port given by [port_number]. Ports are  
numbered beginning with 0. If [port number] is omitted, information is displayed for  
all ports. Table A-27 describes the port parameters.  
Table A-27. Show Port Parameters  
Entry  
Description  
AIinit  
Incremented each time the port begins AL initialization.  
AIinitError  
Number of times the port entered initialization and the  
initialization failed.  
Bad Frames  
Number of frames that have framing errors.  
Number of class x frames received by this port.  
Number of class x frames sent by this port.  
Number of class x words received by this port.  
Number of class x words sent by this port.  
ClassXFramesIn  
ClassXFramesOut  
ClassXWordsIn  
ClassXWordsOut  
ClassXToss  
Number of times an SOFi3 or SOFn3 frame is tossed from  
TBUF.  
DecodeError  
EpConnects  
FBusy  
Number of decode errors detected  
Number of times an E_Port connected through ISL negotiation.  
Number of times the switch sent a F_BSY because Class 2  
frame could not be delivered within ED_TOV time. Number of  
class 2 and class 3 fabric busy (F_BSY) frames generated by  
this port in response to incoming frames. This usually indicates  
a busy condition on the fabric or N_Port that is preventing  
delivery of this frame.  
Flowerrors  
Received a frame when there were no available credits.  
Number of frames from devices that were rejected.  
Invalid CRC detected.  
FReject  
InvalidCRC  
InvalidDestAddr  
LIP_AL_PD_ALPS  
Invalid destination address detected.  
Number of F7, AL_PS LIPs, or AL_PD (vendor specific) resets,  
performed.  
LIP_F7_AL_PS  
This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop. An L_Port, identified by  
AL_PS, may have noticed a performance degradation and is  
trying to restore the loop.  
A-90  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
Table A-27. Show Port Parameters  
Entry  
Description  
LIP_F8_AL_PS  
This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L_Port  
identified by AL_PS.  
LIP_F7_F7  
LIP_F8_F7  
Link Failures  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire a valid  
AL_PA.  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to indicate that a loop  
failure has been detected at the receiver.  
Number of optical link failures detected by this port. A link  
failure is a loss of synchronization or a loss of signal while not  
in the offline state. A loss of signal causes the switch to attempt  
to re-establish the link. If the link is not re-established, a link  
failure is counted. A link reset is performed after a link failure.  
Login  
Number of device logins  
Logout  
Number of device logouts  
LoopTimeouts  
LossOfSync  
A two (2) second timeout as specified by FC-AL-2.  
Number of synchronization losses (>100 ms) detected by this  
port. A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an  
invalid transmission word.  
PrimSeqErrors  
RxLinkResets  
Primitive sequence errors detected.  
Number of link reset primitives received from an attached  
device.  
RxOfflineSeq  
Number of offline sequences received. An OLS is issued for  
link initialization, a Receive & Recognize Not_Operational  
(NOS) state, or to enter the offline state.  
TotalErrors  
Total number of errors detected.  
TotalLIPsRecvd  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames received by this  
port.  
TotalLIPsXmitd  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted by  
this port.  
TotalLinkResets  
TotalOfflineSeq  
Total number of link reset primitives.  
Total number of Offline Sequences issued and received by this  
port.  
TotalRxFrames  
TotalRxWords  
Total number of frames received by this port.  
Total number of words received by this port.  
59022-11 A  
A-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
Table A-27. Show Port Parameters  
Entry  
Description  
TotalTxFrames  
TotalTxWords  
TxLinkResets  
TxOfflineSeq  
Total number of frames issued by this port.  
Total number of words issued by this port.  
Number of Link Resets issued by this port.  
Total number of Offline Sequences issued by this port.  
post log  
Displays the Power On Self Test (POST) log which contains results from the most  
recently failed POST.  
setup [option]  
Displays setup attributes for the system, SNMP, and the switch manufacturer.  
Refer to the ”Show Setup Command” on page A-111.  
steering [domain_id]  
Displays the routes that data takes to the switch given by [domain_id]. If you omit  
[domain_id], the system displays routes for all switches in the fabric.  
support  
Executes a series of commands that display a complete description of the switch,  
its configuration, and operation. The display can be captured from the screen and  
used for diagnosing problems. This keyword is intended for use at the request of  
your authorized maintenance provider. The commands that are executed include  
the following:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Alias List  
Config List  
Date  
Group List  
History  
Ps  
Security (List, Limits, History)  
Securityset (Active, List)  
Show (About, Alarm, Backtrace, Chassis, Config Port, Config Security,  
Config Switch, Config Threshold, Dev, Dev Settings, Domains, Donor,  
Fabric, Log, Log Archive, Log Settings, Lsdb, Mem, Ns, Perf, Port, Setup  
Mfg, Setup Snmp, Setup System, Steering, Switch, Topology, Users)  
„
„
Uptime  
User Accounts  
A-92  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
„
„
„
Whoami  
Zoneset (Active, List)  
Zoning (History, Limits, List)  
switch  
Displays switch operational information.Table A-28 describes the switch  
operational parameters.  
Table A-28. Switch Operational Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
SymbolicName  
SwitchWWN  
SwitchType  
BootVersion  
CreditPool  
Descriptive name for the switch  
Switch world wide name  
Switch model  
PROM boot version  
Number of port buffer credits available to  
recipient ports  
DomainID  
Switch domain ID  
FirstPortAddress  
FlashSize - MBytes  
LogLevel  
FC address of switch port 0  
Size of the flash memory in megabytes  
Event severity level used to record events  
in the event log  
MaxPorts  
Number of ports available on the switch  
NumberOfResets  
Number of times the switch has been reset  
over its service life  
ReasonForLastReset  
Action that caused the last reset  
ActiveImageVersion - build date  
Active firmware image version and build  
date.  
PendingImageVersion - build date  
ActiveConfiguration  
Firmware image version and build date  
that is pending. This image will become  
active at the next reset or power cycle.  
Name of the switch configuration that is in  
use.  
AdminState  
Switch administrative state  
Admin session status  
AdminModeActive  
59022-11 A  
A-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
Table A-28. Switch Operational Parameters  
Parameter  
BeaconOnStatus  
Description  
Beacon status as set by the Set Beacon  
command.  
OperationalState  
Switch operational state  
PrincipalSwitchRole  
Principal switch status. True indicates that  
this switch is the principal switch.  
BoardTemp (1) - Degrees Celsius  
BoardTemp (2) - Degrees Celsius  
Internal switch temperature at circuit board  
sensor 1  
Internal switch temperature at circuit board  
sensor 2  
SwitchDiagnosticsStatus  
SwitchTemperatureStatus  
Results of the power-on self test  
Switch temperature status: normal,  
warning, failure  
timezone  
Displays the current time zone setting.  
topology  
Displays all connected devices.  
users  
Displays a list of logged-in users. This is equivalent to the User List command.  
version  
Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the  
switch. This keyword is equivalent to the About keyword.  
A-94  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the Show Chassis command:  
SANbox2 #> show chassis  
Chassis Information  
-------------------  
BoardTemp (1) - Degrees Celsius  
BoardTemp (2) - Degrees Celsius  
FanStatus (1)  
32  
36  
Good  
Good  
Good  
Good  
1
FanStatus (2)  
PowerSupplyStatus (1)  
PowerSupplyStatus (2)  
HeartBeatCode  
HeartBeatStatus  
Normal  
The following is an example of the Show Domains command:  
SANbox2 #> show domains  
Principal switch is (remote): 10:00:00:60:69:50:0b:6c  
Upstream Principal ISL is  
Domain ID List:  
: 1  
Domain 97 (0x61) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:71:ed  
Domain 98 (0x62) WWN = 10:00:00:60:df:22:2e:0c  
Domain 99 (0x63) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:72:45  
Domain 100 (0x64) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:ba:68  
Domain 101 (0x65) WWN = 10:00:00:60:df:22:2e:06  
Domain 102 (0x66) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:90:ef  
Domain 103 (0x67) WWN = 10:00:00:60:69:50:0b:6c  
Domain 104 (0x68) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:b8:b7  
The following is an example of the Show Fabric command:  
SANbox2 #> show fabric  
Domain  
------  
WWN  
---  
Enet IP Addr  
------------  
FC IP Addr  
----------  
0.0.0.0  
SymbolicName  
------------  
gui sb1 .11  
sw12  
16 (0x10) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:77:81 10.20.68.11  
17 (0x11) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:6a:2d 10.20.68.12  
18 (0x12) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:c3:04 10.20.68.160  
19 (0x13) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:bc:56 10.20.68.108  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
sw .160  
0.0.0.0  
Sb2 .108  
59022-11 A  
A-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show FDMI command:  
SANbox2 #> show fdmi  
HBA ID  
PortID Manufacturer  
Model  
-------  
QLA2342  
QL2330  
Ports  
--------  
------ ---------------  
-----  
21:01:00:e0:8b:27:aa:bc 610000 QLogic Corporation  
21:00:00:00:ca:25:9b:96 180100 QLogic Corporation  
2
2
The following is an example of the Show FDMI WWN command:  
SANbox2 #> show fdmi 21:00:00:e0:8b:09:3b:17  
FDMI Information  
----------------  
Manufacturer  
SerialNumber  
Model  
QLogic Corporation  
[04202  
QLA2342  
ModelDescription  
PortID  
QLogic QLA2342 PCI Fibre Channel Adapter  
610000  
NodeWWN  
20:00:00:e0:8b:07:aa:bc  
HardwareVersion  
DriverVersion  
OptionRomVersion  
FirmwareVersion  
OperatingSystem  
MaximumCTPayload  
NumberOfPorts  
FC5010409-10  
8.2.3.10 Beta 2 (W2K VI)  
1.21  
03.02.13.  
SunOS 5.8  
2040  
1
Port 21:01:00:e0:8b:27:aa:bc  
SupportedFC4Types  
SupportedSpeed  
CurrentSpeed  
MaximumFrameSize  
OSDeviceName  
HostName  
FCP  
2Gb/s  
2Gb/s  
2048  
A-96  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show NS (local domain) command:  
SANbox2 #> show ns  
Seq Domain  
No ID  
Port  
ID  
Port  
Type COS PortWWN  
NodeWWN  
-------  
--- ------  
------ ---- --- -------  
1
2
3
4
19 (0x13) 1301e1 NL  
3
3
3
3
21:00:00:20:37:73:13:69 20:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
21:00:00:20:37:73:12:9b 20:00:00:20:37:73:12:9b  
21:00:00:20:37:73:05:26 20:00:00:20:37:73:05:26  
21:01:00:e0:8b:27:a7:bc 20:01:00:e0:8b:27:a7:bc  
19 (0x13) 1301e2 NL  
19 (0x13) 1301e4 NL  
19 (0x13) 130d00 N  
The following is an example of the Show NS [domain_ID] command:  
SANbox2 #> show ns 18  
Seq Domain  
No ID  
--- ------  
18 (0x12) 120700 N  
Port  
Port  
ID  
Type COS PortWWN  
NodeWWN  
-------  
------ ---- --- -------  
1
3
21:00:00:e0:8b:07:a7:bc 20:00:00:e0:8b:07:a7:bc  
The following is an example of the Show NS [port_ID] command:  
SANbox2 #> show ns 1301e1  
Port ID: 1301e1  
--------  
PortType  
NL  
PortWWN  
21:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
SymbolicPortName  
NodeWWN  
20:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
SymbolicNodeName  
NodeIPAddress  
ClassOfService  
PortIPAddress  
FabricPortName  
FC4Type  
0.0.0.0  
3
0.0.0.0  
20:01:00:c0:dd:00:bc:56  
FCP  
FC4Desc  
(NULL)  
59022-11 A  
A-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Interface command:  
SANbox2 #> show interface  
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:DD:00:BD:ED  
inet addr:10.20.68.107 Bcast:10.20.68.255 Mask:255.255.255.0  
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1  
RX packets:4712 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0  
TX packets:3000 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0  
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100  
RX bytes:415313 (405.5 Kb) TX bytes:716751 (699.9 Kb)  
Interrupt:11 Base address:0xfcc0  
lo  
Link encap:Local Loopback  
inet addr:127.0.0.1 Mask:255.0.0.0  
UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:16436 Metric:1  
RX packets:304 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0  
TX packets:304 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0  
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0  
RX bytes:20116 (19.6 Kb) TX bytes:20116 (19.6 Kb)  
A-98  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Port command:  
SANbox2 #> show port 1  
Port Number: 1  
------------  
AdminState  
AsicNumber  
AsicPort  
Online  
0
OperationalState Online  
PerfTuningMode  
PortID  
Normal  
1
0e0800  
ConfigType  
DiagStatus  
EpConnState  
EpIsoReason  
IOStreamGuard  
LinkSpeed  
GL  
PortWWN  
20:08:00:c0:dd:03:d5:94  
E
Passed  
Connected  
NotApplicable  
Disabled  
2Gb/s  
RunningType  
MediaPartNumber PL-XPL-VC-SG3-22  
MediaRevision  
MediaType  
1
200-M5-SN-I  
Unknown  
00000485  
Port8  
MediaVendor  
MediaVendorID  
SymbolicName  
SyncStatus  
LinkState  
Active  
LoggedIn  
12  
LoginStatus  
MaxCredit  
SyncAcquired  
True  
MediaSpeeds  
1Gb/s, 2Gb/s  
XmitterEnabled  
ALInit  
5
0
0
LIP_F8_AL_PS  
LIP_F8_F7  
0
ALInitError  
BadFrames  
0
LinkFailures  
Login  
2
Class2FramesIn 0  
Class2FramesOut 0  
3
Logout  
2
Class2WordsIn  
0
LoopTimeouts  
LossOfSync  
PrimSeqErrors  
RxLinkResets  
RxOfflineSeq  
TotalErrors  
1
Class2WordsOut 0  
2
Class3FramesIn 999  
Class3FramesOut 540  
0
1
Class3Toss  
0
0
Class3WordsIn  
29516  
628777  
Class3WordsOut 8406  
TotalLinkResets 6  
TotalLIPsRecvd 5  
TotalLIPsXmitd 7  
TotalOfflineSeq 5  
DecodeErrors  
EpConnects  
FBusy  
628775  
3
0
0
0
0
FlowErrors  
FReject  
TotalRxFrames  
TotalRxWords  
TotalTxFrames  
TotalTxWords  
TxLinkResets  
TxOfflineSeq  
999  
29516  
540  
8406  
5
InvalidCRC  
InvalidDestAddr 0  
LIP_AL_PD_AL_PS 0  
LIP_F7_AL_PS  
LIP_F7_F7  
0
5
5
59022-11 A  
A-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Switch command:  
SANbox2 #> show switch  
Switch Information  
------------------  
SymbolicName  
sw .108  
SwitchWWN  
100000c0dd00bc56  
SwitchType  
SANbox2-64  
BootVersion  
Vx.x.x.x-0 (day month date time year)  
CreditPool  
0
DomainID  
19 (0x13)  
FirstPortAddress  
FlashSize - MBytes  
LogLevel  
130000  
128  
Critical  
MaxPorts  
16  
NumberOfResets  
ReasonForLastReset  
ActiveImageVersion - build date  
15  
PowerUp  
Vx.x.x.0-2 (day month date time year)  
PendingImageVersion - build date Vx.x.x.0-17 (day month date time year)  
ActiveConfiguration  
AdminState  
default  
Online  
False  
False  
Online  
False  
32  
AdminModeActive  
BeaconOnStatus  
OperationalState  
PrincipalSwitchRole  
BoardTemp (1) - Degrees Celsius  
BoardTemp (2) - Degrees Celsius  
SwitchDiagnosticsStatus  
SwitchTemperatureStatus  
36  
Passed  
Normal  
The following is an example of the Show Topology command:  
SANbox2 #> show topology  
Unique ID Key  
-------------  
A = ALPA, D = Domain ID, P = Port ID  
Port  
Local Local  
Remote Remote  
Type NodeWWN  
------ -------  
Unique  
Number Type PortWWN  
------ ----- -------  
ID  
------  
010500 P  
4(0x4) D  
5
F
E
20:05:00:c0:dd:00:bd:ec  
20:0a:00:c0:dd:00:bd:ec  
N
E
20:00:00:00:c9:22:1e:93  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:80:21  
10  
A-100  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Topology command for port 1:  
SANbox2 #> show topology 1  
Local Link Information  
----------------------  
PortNumber 1  
PortID  
650100  
PortWWN  
PortType  
20:01:00:c0:dd:00:91:11  
F
Remote Link Information  
-----------------------  
Device 0  
NodeWWN 50:80:02:00:00:06:d5:38  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 1  
NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:2b:08:c9  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 2  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 3  
NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:2b:05:c9  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
59022-11 A  
A-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Version command:  
SANbox2 #> show version  
*****************************************************  
*
*
*
*
*
*
Command Line Interface SHell (CLISH)  
*****************************************************  
SystemDescription  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
MACAddress  
SANbox2-64 FC Switch  
10.20.11.192 (use 'set setup system' to update)  
00:c0:dd:00:71:ee  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:71:ed  
FAM033100024  
WorldWideName  
ChassisSerialNumber  
SymbolicName  
SANbox2  
ActiveSWVersion  
ActiveTimestamp  
DiagnosticsStatus  
V5.0.x.x.xx.xx  
day month date time year  
Passed  
A-102  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
0
Show Config Command  
Displays switch, port, alarm threshold, security, and zoning for the current  
configuration.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show config  
port [port_number]  
security  
switch  
threshold  
zoning  
Keywords port [port_number]  
Displays configuration parameters for the port number given by [port_number].  
Ports are numbered beginning with 0. If [port_number] is omitted, all ports are  
specified.  
security  
Displays the security database Autosave parameter value.  
switch  
Displays configuration parameters for the switch.  
threshold  
Displays alarm threshold parameters for the switch.  
zoning  
Displays zoning configuration parameters for the switch.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Port command:  
SANbox2 #> show config port 3  
Port Number: 3  
------------  
AdminState  
LinkSpeed  
PortType  
Offline  
Auto  
GL  
SymbolicName  
ALFairness  
Port3  
False  
DeviceScanEnabled True  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
ARB_FF  
False  
False  
0
InteropCredit  
ExtCredit  
0
FANEnabled  
True  
False  
False  
True  
AutoPerfTuning  
LCFEnabled  
MFSEnabled  
59022-11 A  
A-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
0
MSEnabled  
NoClose  
True  
False  
Disabled  
False  
True  
IOStreamGuard  
VIEnabled  
PDISCPingEnable  
The following is an example of the Show Config Switch command:  
SANbox2 #> show config switch  
Configuration Name: default  
-------------------  
Switch Configuration Information  
--------------------------------  
AdminState  
Online  
BroadcastEnabled  
InbandEnabled  
FDMIEnabled  
False  
True  
False  
FDMIEntries  
10  
DomainID  
19 (0x13)  
DomainIDLock  
SymbolicName  
R_A_TOV  
True  
sw108  
10000  
E_D_TOV  
2000  
PrincipalPriority  
ConfigDescription  
ConfigLastSavedBy  
ConfigLastSavedOn  
InteropMode  
254  
Default Config  
admin@OB-session5  
day month date time year  
Standard  
A-104  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Config Threshold command:  
SANbox2 #> show config threshold  
Configuration Name: default  
------------  
Threshold Configuration Information  
-----------------------------------  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
False  
True  
25  
FallingTrigger  
1
SampleWindow  
10  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True  
RisingTrigger  
25  
0
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
True  
2
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
0
10  
True  
5
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
1
10  
True  
5
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
1
10  
True  
100  
5
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
The following is an example of the Show Config Zoning command:  
SANbox2 #> show config zoning  
Configuration Name: default  
-------------------  
Zoning Configuration Information  
--------------------------------  
InteropAutoSave  
DefaultVisibility  
DiscardInactive  
True  
All  
False  
59022-11 A  
A-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
0
Show Log Command  
Displays the contents of the log or the parameters used to create and display  
entries in the log. The log contains a maximum of 1200 entries. When the log  
reaches its entry capacity, subsequent entries overwrite the existing entries,  
beginning with the oldest.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show log  
[number_of_events]  
component  
display [filter]  
level  
options  
port  
settings  
Keywords [number_of_events]  
Specifies the number of the most recent events to display from the event log.  
[number_of_events] must be a positive integer.  
component  
Displays the components currently being monitored for events. The components  
are as follows:  
All  
Monitors all components.  
Chassis  
Monitors chassis hardware components such as fans and power supplies.  
Eport  
Monitors all E_Ports.  
Mgmtserver  
Monitors management server status.  
Nameserver  
Monitors name server status.  
None  
Monitor none of the component events.  
Other  
Monitors other miscellaneous events.  
Port  
Monitors all port events  
SNMP  
SNMP events.  
Switch  
Monitors switch management events.  
A-106  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
0
Zoning  
Monitors zoning conflict events.  
display [filter]  
Displays log events on the screen according to the component or severity level  
filter given by [filter]. [filter] can be one of the following:  
Info  
Displays all informative events.  
Warning  
Displays all warning events.  
Critical  
Displays all critical events.  
Eport  
Displays all events related to E_Ports.  
Mgmtserver  
Displays all events related to the management server.  
Nameserver  
Displays all events related to the name server.  
Port [port_number]  
Displays all events related to the port given by [port_number].  
SNMP  
Displays all events related to SNMP.  
Switch  
Displays all events related to switch management.  
Zoning  
Displays all events related to zoning.  
level  
Displays the event severity level logging setting and the display level setting.  
options  
Displays the options that are available for configuring event logging and automatic  
display to the screen. Refer to the for information about how to configure event  
logging and display level.  
port  
Displays the ports being monitored for events. If an event occurs which is of the  
defined level and on a defined component, but not on a defined port, no entry is  
made in the log.  
settings  
Displays the current filter settings for component, severity level, port, and display  
level. This command is equivalent to executing the following commands  
separately: Show Log Component, Show Log Level, and Show Log Port.  
59022-11 A  
A-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the Show Log Component command:  
SANbox2 #> show log component  
Current settings for log  
------------------------  
FilterComponent  
NameServer MgmtServer Zoning Switch Blade Port Eport Snmp  
The following is an example of the Show Log Level command:  
SANbox2 #> show log level  
Current settings for log  
------------------------  
FilterLevel  
DisplayLevel  
Info  
Critical  
The following is an example of the Show Log Options command:  
SANbox2 #> show log options  
Allowed options for log  
-----------------------  
FilterComponent  
All,None,NameServer,MgmtServer,Zoning,Switch,Blade,Port,Eport,Snmp  
FilterLevel  
DisplayLevel  
Critical,Warn,Info,None  
Critical,Warn,Info,None  
The following is an example of the Show Log command:  
SANbox2 #> show log  
[327][day month date time year][I][Eport Port:0/8][Eport State=  
E_A0_GET_DOMAIN_ID]  
[328][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][FSPF PortUp state=0]  
[329][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Sending init hello]  
[330][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Processing EFP, oxid= 0x8]  
[331][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Eport State = E_A2_IDLE]  
[332][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][EFP,WWN= 0x100000c0dd00b845,  
len= 0x30]  
[333][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Sending LSU oxid=0xc:type=1]  
[334][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Send Zone Merge Request]  
[335][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][LSDB Xchg timer set]  
[336][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Setting attribute  
Oper.UserPort.0.8.EpConnState Connected]  
A-108  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Perf Command  
0
Show Perf Command  
Displays port performance in frames/second and bytes/second. If you omit the  
keyword, the command displays data transmitted (out), data received (in), and  
total data transmitted and received in frames/second and bytes per second.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show perf  
byte  
inbyte  
outbyte  
frame  
inframe  
outframe  
errors  
Keywords byte  
Displays continuous performance data in total bytes/second transmitted and  
received for all ports. Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
inbyte  
Displays continuous performance data in bytes/second received for all ports. Type  
“q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
outbyte  
Displays continuous performance data in bytes/second transmitted for all ports.  
Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
frame  
Displays continuous performance data in total frames/second transmitted and  
received for all ports. Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
inframe  
Displays continuous performance data in frames/second received for all ports.  
Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
outframe  
Displays continuous performance data in frames/second transmitted for all ports.  
Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
errors  
Displays continuous error counts for all ports. Type “q” and press the Enter key to  
stop the display.  
59022-11 A  
A-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Perf Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the Show Perf command:  
SANbox2 #> show perf  
Port  
Number  
------ -------  
Bytes/s  
Bytes/s  
(out)  
Bytes/s  
(total)  
Frames/s  
(in)  
Frames/s  
Frames/s  
(in)  
(out)  
(total)  
-------  
-------  
--------  
--------  
--------  
0
7K  
58K  
0
136M  
0
136M  
58K  
0
245  
1K  
0
68K  
0
68K  
1K  
0
1
2
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
7K  
58K  
136M  
0
7K  
136M  
136M  
58K  
0
0
245  
1K  
68K  
0
245  
70K  
68K  
1K  
0
7
136M  
7K  
58K  
0
68K  
245  
1K  
0
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7K  
58K  
7K  
136M  
0
245  
1K  
245  
70K  
136M  
68K  
The following is an example of the Show Perf Byte command:  
SANbox2 #> show perf byte  
Displaying bytes/sec (total)... (Press any key to stop display)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
137M 58K 0  
136M 58K 0  
135M 58K 0  
137M 58K 0  
136M 58K 0  
137M 58K 0  
136M 58K 0  
136M 58K 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8K  
8K  
7K  
8K  
7K  
8K  
8K  
7K  
137M  
136M  
135M  
137M  
136M  
137M  
136M  
136M  
q
A-110  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
0
Show Setup Command  
Displays the current SNMP and system settings.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show setup  
mfg  
radius  
services  
snmp  
system  
Keywords mfg  
Displays manufacturing information about the switch.  
radius  
Displays RADIUS server information.  
services  
Displays switch service status information.  
snmp  
Displays the current SNMP settings.  
system  
Displays the current system settings.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Setup Mfg command:  
SANbox2 #> show setup mfg  
Manufacturing Information  
-------------------------  
BrandName  
QLogic Corporation  
Unknown  
BuildDate  
ChassisPartNumber  
ChassisSerialNumber  
CPUBoardSerialNumber  
MACAddress  
Unknown  
0
000603949  
00:c0:dd:00:90:aa  
Unknown  
PlanarPartNumber  
SwitchSymbolicName  
SwitchWWN  
SANbox2  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:90:ab  
SANbox2-64 FC Switch  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.11  
SystemDescription  
SystemObjectID  
59022-11 A  
A-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Setup Services command:  
SANbox2 #> show setup services  
System Services  
-----------------------------  
TelnetEnabled  
SSHEnabled  
True  
False  
True  
False  
True  
True  
True  
True  
True  
True  
GUIMgmtEnabled  
SSLMgmtEnabled  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
SNMPEnabled  
NTPEnabled  
CIMEnabled  
FTPEnabled  
ManagementServerEnabled  
The following is an example of the Show Setup RADIUS command:  
SANbox2 #> show setup radius  
Radius Information  
------------------  
DeviceAuthOrder  
UserAuthOrder  
TotalServers  
RadiusLocal  
RadiusLocal  
1
Server: 1  
ServerIPAddress  
ServerUDPPort  
10.20.11.8  
1812  
DeviceAuthServer False  
UserAuthServer True  
AccountingServer False  
Timeout  
2
Retries  
0
SignPackets  
Secret  
False  
********  
A-112  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Setup Snmp command:  
SANbox2 #> show setup snmp  
SNMP Information  
----------------  
SNMPEnabled  
Contact  
True  
<sysContact undefined>  
Location  
N_107 System Test Lab  
Description  
Trap1Address  
Trap1Port  
SANbox2-64 FC Switch  
10.0.0.254  
162  
Trap1Severity  
Trap1Version  
Trap1Enabled  
Trap2Address  
Trap2Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap2Severity  
Trap2Version  
Trap2Enabled  
Trap3Address  
Trap3Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap3Severity  
Trap3Version  
Trap3Enabled  
Trap4Address  
Trap4Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap4Severity  
Trap4Version  
Trap4Enabled  
Trap5Address  
Trap5Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap5Severity  
Trap5Version  
Trap5Enabled  
ObjectID  
warning  
2
False  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.11  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
True  
True  
59022-11 A  
A-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
0
The following is an example of the Show Setup System command:  
SANbox2 #> show setup system  
System Information  
------------------  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Eth0NetworkMask  
Static  
10.20.11.32  
255.255.252.0  
10.20.8.254  
30  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
AdminTimeout  
InactivityTimeout  
LocalLogEnabled  
0
True  
RemoteLogEnabled  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
NTPClientEnabled  
NTPServerAddress  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
False  
10.0.0.254  
True  
51.68.85.102  
True  
A-114  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Shutdown Command  
0
Shutdown Command  
Terminates all data transfers on the switch at convenient points and closes the  
Telnet session. Always power cycle the switch after entering this command.  
Authority  
Admin session  
Syntax  
Notes  
shutdown  
Always use this command to perform an orderly shut down before removing  
power from the switch.  
When the shutdown is complete, the Heartbeat LED is extinguished.  
59022-11 A  
A-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
0
Test Command  
Tests ports using internal (SerDes level), external (transceiver), and online  
loopback tests. Internal and external tests require that the port be placed in  
diagnostic mode. Refer to the ”Set Command” on page A-58 for information about  
changing the port administrative state. While the test is running, the remaining  
ports on the switch remain fully operational.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
test  
port [port_number] [test_type]  
cancel  
status  
Keywords port [port_number] [test_type]  
Tests the port given by [port_number] using the test given by [test_type]. If you  
omit [test_type], Internal is used. [test_type] can have the following values:  
internal  
Tests the SerDes for all port speeds independent of the capabilities of the  
transceiver. This is the default. The port must be in diagnostics mode to  
perform this test.  
external  
Tests both the SerDes and transceiver for all port speeds that are supported  
by the transceiver. The port must be in diagnostics mode to perform this test,  
and a loopback plug must be installed in the transceiver.  
online  
Tests communications between the port and its device node or device loop  
at the operating port speed. The port being tested must be online and  
connected to a remote device. The port passes if the test frame that was  
sent by the ASIC matches the frame that is received. This test does not  
disrupt communication on the port.  
cancel  
Cancels the online test in progress.  
status  
Displays the status of a test in progress, or if there is no test in progress, the  
status of the test that was executed last.  
A-116  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
0
Examples To run an internal or external port test, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
To start an admin session, enter the following command and press the Enter  
key.  
admin start  
Place the port in Diagnostics mode, enter the following command (x = port  
number) and press the Enter key.  
set port x state diagnostics  
Choose the type of port loopback test to run:  
„
To run an internal loopback test, enter the following:  
test port x internal  
„
To run an external loopback test, enter the following command. A  
loopback plug must be installed for this test to pass.  
test port x external  
4.  
A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen. Press the Enter key  
to accept each default parameter value, or type a new value for each  
parameter and press the Enter key. The TestLength parameter is the  
number of frames sent, the FrameSize (256 byte maximum in some cases)  
parameter is the number of bytes in each frame, and the DataPattern  
parameter is the pattern in the payload.  
5.  
6.  
After the test type has been chosen and the command executed, a message  
on the screen will appear detailing the test results.  
After the test is run, put the port back into online state by entering the  
following command (x = port number) and pressing the Enter key.  
set port x state online  
7.  
To verify port is back online, enter the following command and press the  
Enter key. The contents of the AdminState field should display be “Online”.  
show port x  
59022-11 A  
A-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
0
The online loopback (node-to-node) test requires that port be online and  
connected to a remote device. To run the online loopback test, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
To start an admin session, enter the following command and press the Enter  
key.  
admin start  
To run the online loopback test, enter the following command and press the  
Enter key.  
test port x online  
A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen. Press the Enter key  
to accept each default parameter value, or type a new value for each  
parameter and press the Enter key. The TestLength parameter is the  
number of frames sent, the FrameSize (256 byte maximum in some cases)  
parameter is the number of bytes in each frame, and the DataPattern  
parameter is the pattern in the payload. Before running the test, make sure  
that the device attached to the port can handle the test parameters.  
SANbox2 (admin) #> test port x online  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will  
follow. Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to  
accept the default value. If you wish to terminate this  
process before reaching the end of the list press 'q' or 'Q'  
and the ENTER key to do so.  
TestLength  
FrameSize  
(decimal value, 1-4294967295) [100  
(decimal value, 36-2148) [256  
]
]
DataPattern (32-bit hex value or 'Default') [Default]  
StopOnError (True/False)  
[False ]  
Do you want to start the test? (y/n) [n]  
4.  
After all parameter values are defined, press the Y key to start the test. After  
the command executes, a message on the screen will appear detailing the  
test results.  
A-118  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Uptime Command  
0
Uptime Command  
Displays the elapsed up time since the switch was last reset and reset method. A  
hot reset or non-disruptive firmware activation does not reset the elapsed up time  
reported by this command.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
uptime  
Examples The following is an example of the Uptime command:  
SANbox2 #> uptime  
Elapsed up time : 0 day(s), 2 hour(s), 28 min(s), 44 sec(s)  
Reason last reset: NormalReset  
59022-11 A  
A-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
User Command  
0
User Command  
Administers and displays user accounts.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin account name and an Admin session. The Accounts and List keywords are  
available to all account names without an Admin session.  
user  
accounts  
add  
delete [account_name]  
edit  
list  
Keywords accounts  
Displays all user accounts that exist on the switch. This keyword is available to all  
account names without an Admin session.  
add  
Add a user account to the switch. You will be prompted for an account name, a  
password, authority, and an expiration date.  
„
„
A switch can have a maximum of 15 user accounts.  
Account names are limited to 15 characters; passwords must be 8–20  
characters.  
„
„
Admin authority grants permission to use the Admin command to open an  
admin session, from which all commands can be entered. Without Admin  
authority, you are limited to view-only commands.  
The expiration date is expressed in the number of days until the account  
expires (2000 maximum). The switch will issue an expiration alarm every  
day for seven days prior to expiration. 0 (zero) specifies that the account has  
no expiration date.  
delete [account_name]  
Deletes the account name given by [account_name] from the switch.  
edit  
Initiates an edit session that prompts you for the account name for which to  
change the expiration date and authority.  
list  
Displays the list of users currently logged in and their session numbers. Provides  
the same function as the Show Users command. This keyword is available to all  
account names without an Admin session.  
Notes  
Authority level or password changes that you make to an account that is currently  
logged in do not take effect until that account logs in again.  
A-120  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
A – Command Line Interface  
User Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the User Accounts command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> user accounts  
Current list of user accounts  
-----------------------------  
images  
admin  
chuckca  
gregj  
fred  
(admin authority = False, never expires)  
(admin authority = True , never expires)  
(admin authority = False, expires in < 50 days)  
(admin authority = True , expires in < 100 days)  
(admin authority = True , never expires)  
The following is an example of the User Add command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> user add  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
account name (1-15 chars)  
: user1  
account password (8-20 chars) : *******  
please confirm account password: *******  
set account expiration in days (0-2000, 0=never): [0] 100  
should this account have admin authority? (y/n): [n] y  
OK to add user account 'user1' with admin authority  
and to expire in 100 days?  
Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
The following is an example of the User Edit command:  
SB211.192 (admin) #> user edit  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
account name (1-15 chars)  
: user1  
set account expiration in days (0-2000, 0=never): [0]  
should this account have admin authority? (y/n): [n]  
OK to modify user account 'user1' with no admin authority  
and to expire in 0 days?  
Please confirm (y/n): [n]  
59022-11 A  
A-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
User Command  
0
The following is an example of the User Delete command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> user del user3  
The user account will be deleted. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
The following is an example of the User List command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> user list  
User  
Ethernet Addr-Port  
------------------  
10.20.68.108-1031  
10.20.68.108-1034  
Unknown  
Logged in Since  
---------------  
----  
admin@OB-session1  
admin@OB-session2  
snmp@OB-session3  
snmp@IB-session4  
admin@OB-session5  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
Unknown  
Unknown  
A-122  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Whoami Command  
0
Whoami Command  
Displays the account name, session number, and switch domain ID for the Telnet  
session.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
whoami  
Examples The following is an example of the Whoami command:  
SANbox2 #> whoami  
User name  
: admin@session2  
: SANbox2  
Switch name  
Switch domain ID: 21 (0x15)  
59022-11 A  
A-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
0
Zone Command  
Manages zones and zone membership on a switch.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session and a Zoning Edit session. Refer to the ”Zoning Command” on  
page A-130 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session. The List,  
Members, and Zonesets keywords are available without an Admin session.  
zone  
add [zone] [member_list]  
copy [zone_source] [zone_destination]  
create [zone]  
delete [zone]  
list  
members [zone]  
remove [zone] [member_list]  
rename [zone_old [zone_new]  
type [zone] [zone_type]  
zonesets [zone]  
Keywords add [zone] [member_list]  
Specifies one or more ports/devices given by [members] to add to the zone  
named [zone]. Use a <space> to delimit aliases and ports/devices in  
[member_list]. A zone can have a maximum of 2000 members. [member_list] can  
have any of the following formats:  
„
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can  
be 1–-239; port numbers can be 0–-255.  
„
„
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
„
Alias name  
The application verifies that the [members] format is correct, but does not validate  
that such a member exists.  
copy [zone_source] [zone_destination]  
Creates a new zone named [zone_destination] and copies the membership into it  
from the zone given by [zone_source].  
create [zone]  
Creates a zone with the name given by [zone]. An zone name must begin with a  
letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 2000 zones.  
delete [zone]  
Deletes the specified zone given by [zone] from the zoning database. If the zone  
is a component of the active zone set, the zone will not be removed from the  
active zone set until the active zone set is deactivated.  
A-124  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
0
list  
Displays a list of all zones and the zone sets of which they are components. This  
keyword does not require an Admin session.  
members [zone]  
Displays all members of the zone given by [zone]. This keyword does not require  
an Admin session.  
remove [zone] [member_list]  
Removes the ports/devices given by [member_list] from the zone given by [zone].  
Use a <space> to delimit aliases and ports/devices in [member_list].  
[member_list] can have any of the following formats:  
„
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can  
be 1–-239; port numbers can be 0–-255.  
„
„
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
„
Alias name  
rename [zone_old] [zone_new]  
Renames the zone given by [zone_old] to the zone given by [zone_new].  
type [zone] [zone_type]  
Specifies the zone type given by [zone_type] to be assigned to the zone name  
given by [zone]. If you omit the [zone_type], the system displays the zone type for  
the zone given by [zone]. [zone_type] can be one of the following:  
soft – name server zone  
hardACL – Access control list hard zone. This keyword is case sensitive.  
zonesets [zone]  
Displays all zone sets of which the zone given by [zone] is a component. This  
keyword does not require an Admin session.  
59022-11 A  
A-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the Zone List command:  
SANbox2 #> zone list  
Zone  
ZoneSet  
-------------------  
wwn_b0241f  
zone_set_1  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
wwn_2215c3  
wwn_0160ed  
wwn_c001b0  
wwn_401248  
wwn_02402f  
wwn_22412f  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
The following is an example of the Zone Members command:  
SANbox2 #> zone members wwn_b0241f  
Current List of Members for Zone: wwn_b0241f  
---------------------------------  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
A-126  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
0
The following is an example of the Zone Zonesets command:  
SANbox2 #> zone zonesets zone1  
Current List of ZoneSets for Zone: zone1  
----------------------------------  
zone_set_1  
59022-11 A  
A-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoneset Command  
0
Zoneset Command  
Manages zone sets and component zones across the fabric.  
Authority  
Admin session and a Zoning Edit session. Refer to the ”Zoning Command” on  
page A-130 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session. The Active, List,  
and Zones keywords are available without an Admin session. You must close the  
Zoning Edit session before using the Activate and Deactivate keywords.  
Syntax  
zoneset  
activate [zone_set]  
active  
add [zone_set] [zone_list]  
copy [zone_set_source] [zone_set_destination]  
create [zone_set]  
deactivate  
delete [zone_set]  
list  
remove [zone_set] [zone_list]  
rename [zone_set_old] [zone_set_new]  
zones [zone_set]  
Keywords activate [zone_set]  
Activates the zone set given by [zone_set]. This keyword deactivates the active  
zone set. Close the Zoning Edit session before using this keyword.  
active  
Displays the name of the active zone set. This keyword does not require Admin  
session.  
add [zone_set] [zone_list]  
Adds a list of zones and aliases given by [zone_list] to the zone set given by  
[zone_set]. Use a <space> to delimit zone and alias names in [zone_list].  
copy [zone_set_source] [zone_set_destination]  
Creates a new zone set named [zone_set_destination] and copies into it the  
zones from the zone set given by [zone_set_source].  
create [zone_set]  
Creates the zone set with the name given by [zone_set]. A zone set name must  
begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9,  
A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 zone  
sets.  
deactivate  
Deactivates the active zone set. Close the Zoning Edit session before using this  
keyword.  
delete [zone_set]  
Deletes the zone set given by [zone_set]. If the specified zone set is active, the  
command is suspended until the zone set is deactivated.  
A-128  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoneset Command  
0
list  
Displays a list of all zone sets. This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
remove [zone_set] [zone_list]  
Removes a list of zones given by [zone_list] from the zone set given by  
[zone_set]. Use a <space> to delimit zone names in [zone_list]. If [zone_set] is the  
active zone set, the zone will not be removed until the zone set has been  
deactivated.  
rename [zone_set_old] [zone_set_new]  
Renames the zone set given by [zone_set_old] to the name given by  
[zone_set_new]. You can rename the active zone set.  
zones [zone_set]  
Displays all zones that are components of the zone set given by [zone_set]. This  
keyword does not require an Admin session.  
Notes  
„
„
„
A zone set must be active for its definitions to be applied to the fabric.  
Only one zone set can be active at one time.  
A zone can be a component of more than one zone set.  
Examples The following is an example of the Zoneset Active command:  
SANbox2 #> zoneset active  
ActiveZoneSet  
Bets  
LastActivatedBy admin@OB-session6  
LastActivatedOn day month date time year  
The following is an example of the Zoneset List command:  
SANbox2 #> zoneset list  
Current List of ZoneSets  
------------------------  
alpha  
beta  
The following is an example of the Zoneset Zones command:  
SANbox2 #> zoneset zones ssss  
Current List of Zones for ZoneSet: ssss  
----------------------------------  
zone1  
zone2  
zone3  
59022-11 A  
A-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
0
Zoning Command  
Opens a Zoning Edit session in which to create and manage zone sets and zones.  
Refer to the ”Zone Command” on page A-124 and the ”Zoneset Command” on  
page A-128.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session except for the Active, History, Limits, and List keywords. The Clear  
keyword also requires a zoning edit session.  
zoning  
active  
cancel  
clear  
edit  
history  
limits  
list  
restore  
save  
Keywords active  
Displays information for the active zone set including component zones and zone  
members. This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
cancel  
Closes the current Zoning Edit session. Any unsaved changes are lost.  
clear  
Clears all inactive zone sets from the volatile edit copy of the zoning  
database. This keyword requires a zoning edit session. This keyword does  
not affect the non-volatile zoning database. However, if you enter the Zoning  
Clear command followed by the Zoning Save command, the non-volatile  
zoning database will be cleared from the switch.  
Note:  
The preferred method for clearing the zoning database from the switch  
is the Reset Zoning command.  
edit  
Opens a Zoning Edit session.  
A-130  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
0
history  
Displays a history of zoning modifications. This keyword does not require an  
Admin session. History information includes the following:  
„
Time of the most recent zone set activation or deactivation and the user who  
performed it  
„
Time of the most recent modifications to the zoning database and the user  
who made them.  
„
Checksum for the zoning database  
limits  
Displays the number of zone sets, zones, aliases, members per zone, members  
per alias, and total members in the zoning database. This keyword also displays  
the switch zoning database limits, excluding the active zone set, which are  
described in Table A-29. This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
Table A-29. Zoning Database Limits  
Limit  
MaxZoneSets  
Description  
Maximum number of zone sets (256)  
Maximum number of zones (2000)  
Maximum number of aliases (2500)  
MaxZones  
MaxAliases  
MaxTotalMembers  
Maximum number of zone and alias members (10000)  
that can be stored in the switch’s zoning database.  
MaxZonesInZoneSets  
Maximum number of zones that are components of zone  
sets (2000), excluding those in the orphan zone set, that  
can be stored in the switch’s zoning database. Each  
instance of a zone in a zone set counts toward this  
maximum.  
MaxMembersPerZone  
MaxMembersPerAlias  
Maximum number of members in a zone (2000)  
Maximum number of members in an alias (2000)  
list  
Lists all zoning definitions. This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
restore  
Reverts the changes to the zoning database that have been made during the  
current Zoning Edit session since the last Zoning Save command was entered.  
save  
Saves changes made during the current Zoning Edit session. The system informs  
you that the zone set must be activated to implement any changes. This does not  
apply if you entered the Zoning Clear command during the Zoning Edit session.  
59022-11 A  
A-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
0
Examples The following is an example of the Zoning Edit command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> zoning edit  
SANbox2 (admin-zoning) #>  
.
.
SANbox2 (admin-zoning) #> zoning cancel  
Zoning edit mode will be canceled. Please confirm (y/n): [n]  
SANbox2 (admin) #> admin end  
y
The following is an example of the Zoning Limits command:  
SANbox2 #> zoning limits  
Zoning Attribute  
----------------  
MaxZoneSets  
Maximum  
-------  
256  
Current  
[Zoning Name]  
-------------  
-------  
6
MaxZones  
2000  
17  
1
MaxAliases  
2500  
MaxTotalMembers  
MaxZonesInZoneSets  
MaxMembersPerZone  
10000  
2000  
166f  
19  
2000  
10  
23  
9
D_1_JBOD_1  
D_1_Photons  
D_2_JBOD1  
16  
5
D_2_NewJBOD_2  
E1JBOD1  
5
E2JBOD2  
3
LinkResetZone  
LinkResetZone2  
NewJBOD1  
3
8
8
NewJBOD2  
24  
8
Q_1Photon1  
Q_1_NewJBOD1  
Q_1_Photon_1  
Q_2_NewJBOD2  
ZoneAlias  
13  
21  
3
3
ZoneDomainPort  
ZoneFCAddr  
4
MaxMembersPerAlias  
2000  
2
AliasInAZone  
A-132  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
0
The following is an example of the Zoning List command:  
SANbox2 #> zoning list  
Active ZoneSet Information  
ZoneSet  
Zone  
ZoneMember  
--------------------------------  
wwn  
wwn_b0241f  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
wwn_2215c3  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:23:bd:31  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:14:16  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:15:c3  
Configured Zoning Information  
ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember  
--------------------------------  
wwn  
wwn_b0241f  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
wwn_2215c3  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:23:bd:31  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:14:16  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:15:  
59022-11 A  
A-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
0
Notes  
A-134  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Access Control List Zone  
Arbitrated Loop  
Access Control List zoning divides the  
fabric for purposes of controlling discovery  
and inbound traffic.  
A Fibre Channel topology where ports use  
arbitration to establish a point-to-point  
circuit.  
Active Zone Set  
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA)  
The zone set that defines the current  
zoning for the fabric.  
A unique one-byte value assigned during  
loop initialization to each NL_Port on a  
loop.  
Active Firmware  
ASIC  
The firmware image on the switch that is in  
use.  
Application Specific Integrated Circuit  
Activity LED  
Auto Save  
A port LED that indicates when frames are  
entering or leaving the port.  
Zoning parameter that determines whether  
changes to the active zone set that a  
switch receives from other switches in the  
fabric will be saved to permanent memory  
on that switch.  
Administrative State  
State that determines the operating state  
of the port, I/O blade, or switch. The  
configured administrative state is stored in  
the switch configuration. The configured  
administrative state can be temporarily  
overridden using the command line  
interface.  
BootP  
A type of network server.  
Buffer Credit  
A measure of port buffer capacity equal to  
one frame.  
Alarm  
A message generated by the switch that  
specifically requests attention. Alarms are  
generated by several switch processes.  
Some alarms can be configured.  
Cascade Topology  
A fabric in which the switches are  
connected in series. If you connect the last  
switch back to the first switch, you create a  
cascade-with-a-loop topology.  
Alias  
A named set of ports or devices. An alias  
is not a zone, and can not have a zone or  
another alias as a member.  
Class 2 Service  
A service which multiplexes frames at  
frame boundaries to or from one or more  
N_Ports wit h acknowledgment provided.  
AL_PA  
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address  
59022-11 A  
Glossary-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
Class 3 Service  
Fabric View File  
A service which multiplexes frames at  
frame boundaries to or from one or more  
N_Ports without acknowledgment.  
A file containing a set of fabrics that were  
opened and saved during a previous  
SANsurfer Switch Manager session.  
Configured Zone Sets  
Fan Fail LED  
The zone sets stored on a switch  
excluding the active zone set.  
An LED that indicates that a cooling fan in  
the switch is operating below standard.  
Default Visibility  
Flash Memory  
Zoning parameter that determines the  
level of communication among  
ports/devices when there is no active zone  
set.  
Memory on the switch that contains the  
chassis control firmware.  
Force PROM Mode  
See Maintenance Mode.  
Domain ID  
User defined number that identifies the  
switch in the fabric.  
Frame  
Data unit consisting of a start-of-frame  
(SOF) delimiter, header, data payload,  
CRC, and an end-of-frame (EOF)  
delimiter.  
Event Log  
Log of messages describing events that  
occur in the fabric.  
FRU  
Expansion Port  
Field Replaceable Unit  
E_Port that connects to another FC-SW-2  
compliant switch.  
Heartbeat LED  
A chassis LED that indicates the status of  
the internal switch processor and the  
results of the Power-On Self-Test.  
Fabric Database  
The set of fabrics that have been opened  
during a SANsurfer Switch Manager  
session.  
Inactive Firmware  
The firmware image on the switch that is  
not in use.  
Fabric Management Switch  
The switch through which the fabric is  
managed.  
In-band Management  
The ability to manage a switch through  
another switch over an inter-switch link.  
Fabric Name  
User defined name associated with the file  
that contains user list data for the fabric.  
Initiator  
The device that initiates a data exchange  
with a target device.  
Fabric Port  
An F_Port.  
Glossary-2  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
In-Order-Delivery  
Management Workstation  
A feature that requires that frames be  
received in the same order in which they  
were sent.  
PC workstation that manages the fabric  
through the fabric management switch.  
Mesh Topology  
Input Power LED  
A fabric in which each chassis has at least  
one port directly connected to each other  
chassis in the fabric.  
A chassis LED that indicates that the  
switch logic circuitry is receiving proper DC  
voltages.  
MIB  
Inter-Switch Link  
Management Information Base  
The connection between two switches  
using E_Ports.  
Multistage Topology  
A fabric in which two or more edge  
switches connect to one or more core  
switches.  
IP  
Internet Protocol  
LIP  
NL_Port  
Loop Initialization Primitive sequence  
Node Loop Port. A Fibre Channel device  
port that supports arbitrated loop protocol.  
Logged-In LED  
N_Port  
A port LED on SANbox2-8c and  
SANbox2-16 switches that indicates  
device login or loop initialization status.  
Node Port. A Fibre Channel device port in  
a point-to-point or fabric connection.  
Maintenance Button  
Output Power LED  
Formerly known as the Force PROM  
button. Momentary button on the switch  
used to reset the switch or place the switch  
in maintenance mode.  
A power supply LED that indicates that the  
power supply is providing DC voltage to  
the switch. Applies only to SANbox2-16  
and SANbox2-64 switches.  
Maintenance Mode  
Over Temperature LED  
Formerly known as force PROM mode.  
Maintenance mode sets the IP address to  
10.0.0.1 and provides access to the switch  
for maintenance purposes.  
A chassis LED or a power supply LED that  
indicates that the switch or power supply is  
overheating.  
Pending Firmware  
Management Information Base  
The firmware image that will be activated  
upon the next switch reset.  
A set of guidelines and definitions for  
SNMP functions.  
POST  
Power On Self Test  
59022-11 A  
Glossary-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
Power On Self Test (POST)  
World Wide Name (WWN)  
Diagnostics that the switch chassis  
performs at start up.  
A unique 64-bit address assigned to a  
device by the device manufacturer.  
Principal Switch  
WWN  
World Wide Name  
The switch in the fabric that manages  
domain ID assignments.  
Zone  
SANsurfer Switch Manager  
A set of ports or devices grouped together  
to control the exchange of information.  
Switch management application.  
SFP  
Zone Set  
Small Form-Factor Pluggable.  
A set of zones grouped together. The  
active zone set defines the zoning for a  
fabric.  
Small Form-Factor Pluggable  
A transceiver device, smaller than a  
GigaBit Interface Converter, that plugs into  
the Fibre Channel port.  
Zoning Database  
The set of zone sets, zones, and aliases  
stored on a switch.  
SNMP  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
Soft Zone  
Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes  
of controlling discovery. Members of the  
same soft zone automatically discover and  
communicate freely with all other  
members of the same zone.  
Target  
A storage device that responds to an  
initiator device.  
User Account  
An object stored on a switch that consists  
of an account name, password, authority  
level, and expiration date.  
VCCI  
Voluntary Control Council for Interference  
Glossary-4  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
authentication  
A
device 3-1, A-26  
trap 4-33  
user 3-1  
authority A-7  
auto save  
default fabric view file 2-16  
graphing options 5-22  
zoning configuration 3-45  
access control list zone 3-39, 3-53  
account name 3-22  
display A-120, A-123  
factory A-2  
active zone set 3-33, 3-39  
Active Zoneset data window 3-33  
Admin  
account name A-7  
authority A-7  
B
Admin command A-8  
Admin session timeout A-82  
administrative state  
configured 4-21, 5-11  
current 4-21, 5-11  
port 5-11, A-76  
switch 4-21, A-59  
alarm  
configuration 4-15, A-65  
configuration defaults A-48  
configuration display A-103  
description A-74  
beacon A-58  
binding A-25, A-29  
BootP boot method 4-30  
broadcast 4-24, A-88  
browser 2-2  
browser location 2-16, 5-22  
C
certificate A-19  
CHAP authentication A-26  
chassis  
log A-58, A-88  
LEDs 4-41  
alias  
status A-88  
add members 3-54, A-9  
copy A-9  
create 3-54, A-9  
delete A-9  
delete members A-10  
description 3-39  
checklist 3-8  
CIM command A-11  
CIMListener command A-12  
CIMSubscription command A-14  
command line interface A-1  
command syntax A-6  
commands A-7  
display list A-9  
display members A-10  
remove 3-55  
Common Information Model  
configure A-11  
rename A-10  
display listener A-88  
display subscription A-88  
listener A-12  
service 4-28, A-80  
subscription A-14  
Alias command A-9  
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address A-75  
archive configuration 4-35  
Config command A-16  
59022-11 A  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
configuration  
activate A-16  
default fabric view file  
auto save 2-16  
archive 4-35  
backup A-16  
SANsurfer Switch Manager 2-16  
defaults  
copy A-16  
delete A-16  
edit A-16  
list A-16  
alarm configuration A-48  
port configuration A-47  
RADIUS configuration A-50  
security configuration A-51  
services configuration A-50  
reset A-44  
restore 4-36, A-17  
save A-17  
wizard 4-19  
configured administrative state 4-21  
connection  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
configuration A-49  
switch configuration A-46  
system configuration A-51  
zoning configuration A-48  
device  
authentication 3-1  
nickname 3-35  
Secure Socket Layer A-19  
security 3-7, A-79  
contact 4-33  
scan 5-14  
security 3-9  
Devices data window 3-32, 4-8  
disk space 2-2  
CRC error 4-15  
Create command A-19  
credits 5-14  
current administrative state 4-21  
distance 5-14  
domain ID  
D
binding A-25, A-29  
description 4-22  
display A-88  
data window  
active security 3-19  
Active Zoneset 3-33  
configured security 3-19  
Configured Zonesets 4-14  
description 2-24, 2-27, 2-31  
Devices 3-32, 4-8  
port information 5-7  
port statistics 5-4  
switch 4-8  
lock 4-22  
donor port 5-2, 5-13, A-88  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 4-30  
E
E_Port  
isolation 3-55, 4-22  
self-discovery 5-13  
embedded GUI service 4-27  
encryption key  
database  
fabric 3-22  
zoning 3-42  
default fabric view file 2-15  
performance view file 5-22  
Error Detect Timeout 4-26  
event browser  
date 4-17  
Date command A-22  
Decode error 4-15  
default  
filter 3-30  
preference 2-17  
sort 3-31  
configuration 4-38  
visibility 3-45, 3-48  
zoning 3-46  
Index-2  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
event logging  
faceplate display  
by component A-71, A-106  
by port A-73, A-107  
by severity level A-107  
display A-106  
data window 2-31  
description 2-19, 2-28  
open 2-27  
popup menu 2-30  
restore defaults A-73  
save settings A-73  
settings A-107  
severity level A-73  
start A-73  
factory defaults 4-38, A-44  
Fan Fail LED 4-41  
FC-4 descriptor 5-14  
FDMI - See Fabric Device Management  
Interface  
File Transfer Protocol  
example A-37  
service 4-28, A-80  
stop A-73  
event severity 3-29  
extended credit wizard 5-14  
external test 5-17, A-116  
firmware  
image file 4-40, A-36  
install with CLI A-23  
install with SANbox Manager 4-40  
list image files A-36  
non-disruptive activation 4-40, A-35  
remove image files A-36  
retrieve image file A-36  
unpack image A-36  
version A-94  
F
F_Port 5-2, 5-13  
fabric  
add 3-22  
add a switch 3-24  
database 3-22  
delete 3-23  
displaying information 3-26  
loop port 5-2, 5-13  
management 3-1  
management workstation 2-2  
merge 3-55  
Firmware Install command A-23  
FL_Port 5-2, 5-13  
G
gateway address 4-30, A-82  
generic  
loop port 5-13  
port 5-2, 5-13  
global graph type 5-26  
graph  
port 5-2, 5-13  
rediscovery 3-24  
security 3-7  
services 3-19  
status 3-27  
tracker 3-20  
print 5-26  
tree 2-23  
rescale 5-26  
zoning 3-37  
statistics 5-26  
type 5-26  
Fabric Device Management Interface 4-23,  
A-88  
fabric view file  
auto save 5-22  
open 3-23  
graphic window 2-24  
save 2-16, 3-24  
59022-11 A  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
group  
ISL monitoring 4-15  
layout 2-26  
legacy address format 4-26  
link  
delete 3-26  
selecting 2-26  
status 2-25  
add member 3-15, A-25  
copy A-27  
create 3-13, A-27  
edit member attributes 3-16, A-28  
list A-29  
list members A-29  
Management Server A-27  
remove 3-16  
remove member 3-16, A-29  
rename 3-16, A-29  
type A-27, A-29  
Group command A-24  
GUI management service 4-27  
L
Link control frame preference routing A-62  
Link data window 3-34  
link state database A-89  
Lip command A-39  
listener  
add A-12  
Common Information Model A-88  
create A-12  
H
hard reset 4-18  
Hardreset command A-32  
hardware status 4-41  
Heartbeat LED 4-41  
help 2-18  
delete A-12  
log  
archive A-71  
clear A-71  
Help command A-33  
History command A-34  
host bus adapter A-88  
hot reset 4-18  
display A-72, A-107  
event A-71, A-106  
local A-83  
power-on self test A-92  
remote A-83  
Hotreset command A-35  
logged in users A-94  
login  
I
limit 3-23, A-2  
I/O Stream Guard 5-13, A-62  
Image command A-36  
in-band management  
description 4-24  
monitoring 4-15  
logout monitoring 4-15  
loop port  
bypass A-75  
enable A-75  
fabric 5-2, 5-13  
generic 5-13  
initialization A-39  
loopback test 5-16  
loss of signal monitoring 4-15  
enable 3-20  
indication service listener A-12  
Initial Start Dialog 2-16  
Input Power LED 4-41  
internal test 5-16, A-116  
internet browser 2-2  
interoperability 4-25  
IP  
address 4-30, A-82  
configuration 4-30  
ISL group A-27  
Index-4  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
Non-disruptive code load and activation 4-17  
NTP - See Network Time Protocol  
M
Management Server  
group A-27  
service 4-28, A-80  
manufacturer information A-111  
mask address A-82  
MD5 authentication A-26  
media status 5-4  
O
online  
help 2-18  
test 5-17  
operating systems 2-2  
orphan zone set 3-39  
Over Temperature LED 4-41  
memory  
activity A-89  
workstation 2-2  
menu structure 2-20  
Multi-Frame Sequence bundling A-62  
P
page break A-59  
Passwd command A-40  
password  
N
change A-40  
factory A-2  
name server  
display A-89  
switch 3-22, A-40  
user account 4-5  
performance  
export 3-35  
zone 3-38  
NDCLA - See Non-disruptive code load and  
activation  
graphs 5-23  
tuning A-61  
network  
performance view file  
default 5-21  
encryption key 5-22  
open 5-21  
configuration reset A-45  
discovery 4-30, A-82  
gateway address A-82  
interfaces A-88  
save 5-21  
IP address A-82  
mask A-82  
Ping command A-41  
polling frequency 5-23  
popup menu 2-27, 2-30  
properties 4-29, 4-32  
Network Time Protocol  
client 4-31, A-83  
description 4-17  
interaction with Date command A-22  
server address A-83  
service 4-28, A-80  
nickname  
create 3-35  
delete 3-36  
edit 3-36  
export 3-36  
import 3-37  
node-to-node test 5-17  
non-disruptive activation A-35  
59022-11 A  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
port  
R
administrative state 5-11, A-76  
buffer credits 5-14  
configuration 5-10, A-60  
configuration defaults A-47  
configuration display A-103  
counters A-75  
displaying information 5-1  
external test A-116  
group A-27  
RADIUS - See Remote Authentication Dial-In  
User Service  
RADIUS server  
add 3-2  
authentication order 3-6  
configuration A-77  
configuration defaults A-50  
configuration display A-111  
edit configuration 3-5  
remove 3-4  
reset A-44  
read community 4-33  
refresh 3-27, 4-8  
Registered State Change Notification 5-13,  
A-62  
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service  
server 3-1  
remote log  
enable 4-31, A-83  
host address A-83  
reset  
with POST 4-18  
initialize A-44  
internal test A-116  
loopback test A-116  
mode 5-2  
online test A-116  
operational information A-90  
operational state 5-3  
performance 5-18, A-89, A-109  
performance tuning A-61  
reset 5-16  
selecting 2-29  
speed 5-3, A-75  
status 2-28  
symbolic name 5-14  
test 5-16  
type 5-13  
without POST 4-18  
Reset command A-44  
Resource Allocation Timeout 4-26  
restore configuration 4-36  
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol 4-30  
view 2-17, 2-28  
Port Information data window 4-13, 5-7  
Port Statistics data window 4-12, 5-4  
port/device tree 3-43  
power on self test log A-92  
preferences  
SANsurfer Performance Viewer 5-22  
SANsurfer Switch Manager 2-16  
principal switch 4-22  
processor 2-2  
S
SANbox2-16 switch 3-27  
SANbox2-8c switch 3-27  
SANsurfer Management Suite  
exit 2-12  
Linux install 2-6  
Solaris install 2-7  
properties  
network 4-29, 4-32  
port 5-10  
uninstall 2-14  
Windows install 2-4  
Ps command A-42  
Q
Quit command A-43  
Index-6  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
SANsurfer Performance Viewer  
arrange graphs 5-24  
customize graphs 5-24  
display graphs 5-23  
exit 5-20  
security database  
archive 3-18  
clear 3-16, A-52  
display 3-17, A-53  
display history A-53  
limits A-53  
security edit session  
cancel A-52  
preferences 5-22  
start 5-19  
SANsurfer Switch Manager  
default fabric file 2-12  
Linux install 2-3  
Mac OS X install 2-4  
preferences 2-16, 5-22  
Solaris install 2-3  
start 2-9  
uninstall 2-13, 2-15  
user interface 2-19  
version 2-18  
web applet A-80, A-83  
Windows install 2-3  
scan device 5-14  
secret A-26  
Secure Shell  
description 3-7  
initiate A-52  
revert changes A-53  
save changes A-53  
security set  
activate 3-18, A-56  
add member group A-56  
copy A-56  
create 3-11, A-56  
deactivate 3-18, A-56  
delete A-57  
delete member group A-57  
display A-57  
display active A-52, A-56  
display members A-57  
remove 3-16  
service 4-28, A-79  
Secure Socket Layer  
certificate A-19  
rename 3-16, A-57  
Securityset command A-56  
SerDes level test 5-16  
service listener A-12  
services 4-27  
description 3-7  
service 4-28, A-79  
switch time A-22  
security  
configuration 3-17, A-62  
configuration defaults A-51  
configuration display A-103  
connection 3-7  
consistency checklist 3-8  
database A-44  
device 3-9  
services configuration defaults A-50  
Set command A-58  
Set Config command A-60  
Set Log command A-71  
Set Port command A-75  
Set Setup command A-77  
severity levels 3-29  
SFP level test 5-17  
SHA-1 authentication A-26  
Show command A-87  
Show Config command A-103  
Show Log command A-106  
Show Perf command A-109  
Show Setup command A-111  
Shutdown command A-115  
fabric 3-7  
Security command A-52  
59022-11 A  
Index-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
Simple Network Management Protocol  
configuration 4-33, A-81  
configuration display A-111  
defaults A-49  
enable 3-19, 4-33  
proxy 4-33  
switch  
add 3-24  
administrative state 4-21, A-59  
advanced properties 4-25  
configuration 4-19, A-63  
configuration defaults A-46  
configuration display A-103  
delete 3-26  
displaying information 4-7  
hard reset 4-18, A-32  
hot reset 4-18  
reset A-45  
service 4-28, A-80  
trap configuration 4-34  
soft zone 3-38, 3-53  
static boot method 4-30  
status icon color 2-23  
steering A-92  
icons 3-27  
location 4-33  
subnet mask address 4-30  
subscription  
create A-14  
delete A-14  
display A-88  
log A-83  
management service 4-27, A-79  
manufacturer information A-111  
operational information A-93  
paging 4-16  
support file 4-39, A-19  
properties 4-20  
replace 3-25  
reset 4-17, A-119  
reset without POST 4-18, A-45  
restore factory defaults 4-38  
selecting 2-26  
services A-45, A-79, A-111  
status 2-25  
Switch data window 4-8  
symbolic name 4-21  
port 5-14  
syslog 4-31  
system configuration  
change A-82  
defaults A-51  
display A-111  
system services 4-27  
T
Telnet  
service 4-28, A-79  
session timeout A-82  
Test command A-116  
testing ports 5-16  
time 4-17, A-22  
Index-8  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
time zone A-59  
timeout  
version snapshot  
compare 3-21  
Admin session A-82  
Telnet session A-82  
values 4-26  
export 3-21  
save 3-20  
Virtual Interface preference routing A-62  
tool bar  
standard 2-22  
zoning 3-43  
W
web applet  
topology display  
arrange icons 2-26  
data windows 2-27  
description 2-19  
usage 2-25  
enable A-83  
service 4-27, A-80  
Whoami command A-123  
wizard  
configuration 4-19  
extended credit 5-14  
zoning 3-41  
transceiver status 5-4  
trap  
authentication 4-33  
community 4-33  
configuration 4-34  
SNMP version 4-34  
working  
directory 2-16, 5-22  
status indicator 2-24  
workstation requirements 2-2  
write community 4-33  
U
Z
Uptime command A-119  
user account  
add A-120  
admin A-2  
admin account A-2  
create 4-3  
zone  
access control list 3-39  
add member port 3-51, A-124  
copy 3-48, A-124  
create 3-50, A-124  
definition 3-38  
default 4-2  
delete A-120  
display A-120  
edit A-120  
list A-120  
logged in A-94  
modify 4-6  
password 4-5  
remove 4-4  
security 3-8  
delete A-124  
delete member port A-125  
discard inactive 3-45  
list A-125  
list members A-125  
name server 3-38  
remove 3-49, 3-52  
remove all 3-53  
remove member port 3-52  
rename 3-52, A-125  
soft 3-38  
User command A-120  
V
type 3-53, A-125  
Zone command A-124  
version 2-18  
59022-11 A  
Index-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-8c/16 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
0
zone merge  
description 3-55  
failure 3-55  
failure recovery 3-56  
zone set  
activate 3-48, A-128  
active 3-33, 3-39, A-130  
add member zone A-128  
copy A-128  
create 3-47, A-128  
deactivate 3-48, A-45, A-128  
definition 3-39  
delete A-128  
delete member zone 3-49, A-129  
discard inactive 3-45  
display A-129  
display active A-128  
display members A-129  
display zones A-125  
management 3-47  
orphan 3-39  
remove 3-49  
rename 3-52, A-129  
tree 3-43  
Zoneset command A-128  
zoning 4-25  
configuration 3-44, A-66  
configuration defaults A-48  
configuration display A-103  
database 3-40, 3-42, A-45  
default 3-46  
edit A-130  
history A-131  
limits A-131  
list definitions A-131  
remove all 3-46  
revert changes A-131  
save edits A-131  
wizard 3-41  
Zoning command A-130  
Index-10  
59022-11 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Q Logic Switch 5000 9000 User Guide
Quadra Fire Indoor Fireplace QF130 User Guide
Radio Shack Fax Machine TFX 1031 User Guide
Radio Shack Speaker 40 4094 User Guide
Remington Chainsaw M12510US, M15012US, M15014US, M15014AS, M30016US, M30016AS, M30016AW, M30016UW, M35016US, M35016AW User Guide
Revolabs Wireless Office Headset 75 User Guide
Runco Flat Panel Television XP OPAL65 DHD User Guide
Samsung Clothes Dryer DV45H6300EG User Guide
Samsung Watch SM V7000ZKAXAR User Guide
Scytek electronic Remote Starter 100RS User Guide